Vykon Hvac

PARTNER INFORMATION
TRIDIUM
Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2
Release_3.4.46_HVAC.2.2
Vykon HVAC
Application guide
Copyright © TRIDIUM. INC.
TRIDIUM EUROPE LTD
th
DOCUMENT RELEASE DOC REFERENCE: teu-jb-101_16.doc DATE 18 Mar ‘10
16 PAGE 1 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
TRIDIUM
This page intentionally left blank
th
16 PAGE 2 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Contents TRIDIUM
Contents:
Contents: ................................................................................................................... 3
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 7
Scope.......................................................................................................................... 7
Acknowledgements and references........................................................................ 7
The applications library............................................................................................ 9
Vykon HVAC applications ........................................................................... 11

General applications (hvacAppsGeneral) ................................................... 11
Heating plant applications (hvacAppsHeatingPlant) ................................... 12
Heat delivery applications (hvacAppsHeatDelivery) ................................... 12
Cooling plant applications (hvacAppsCoolingPlant).................................... 13
Cooling delivery applications (hvacAppsCoolingDelivery) .......................... 13
Air handling applications (hvacAppsAirHandling)........................................ 14
Standard-applications and Mini-applications (hvacAppsGeneral)............... 15
Common functions ................................................................................................... 17
Hysteresis.................................................................................................... 18
Heat curve ................................................................................................... 20
Adaptive optimum start optimiser ................................................................ 23
Non adaptive optimum start optimiser......................................................... 26
Setpoint change delay................................................................................. 28
Application Status........................................................................................ 30
General functions and applications ........................................................................ 31
The pump exercise application.................................................................... 32

Alarms ......................................................................................................... 36
Alarm indicator strategy............................................................................... 38
The holiday schedule application ................................................................ 40
The time schedule application..................................................................... 43
The outside temperature application ........................................................... 49
The average outside temperature application ............................................. 53
th
16 PAGE 3 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Contents TRIDIUM
The night purge application ......................................................................... 57

The fire override application ........................................................................ 62
The trace heating application ...................................................................... 65
The Max 10 boilers application ................................................................................ 67
Overview ..................................................................................................... 67
Boiler heat generation plant......................................................................... 69
System enablers, interlocks and alarms...................................................... 70
Desired supply temperature and heat demand control strategy ................. 73
Delta T, boiler staging and sequence control strategy ................................ 76
Transport system and pump sequence strategy ......................................... 79
The radiator group application ................................................................................ 81
Overview ..................................................................................................... 81
Common strategies ..................................................................................... 84
Control on supply temperature .................................................................... 88
Control on space temperature..................................................................... 93
The radiant panels application ................................................................................ 99
Overview ..................................................................................................... 99
The heating delivery system application ................................................................ 117
Overview ..................................................................................................... 117

Control strategy ........................................................................................... 121
The heating non controlled group application....................................................... 129
Overview ..................................................................................................... 129

The domestic hot water (DHW) application............................................................ 135
Overview ..................................................................................................... 135

The Max 4 chillers application ................................................................................. 145
Overview ..................................................................................................... 145

Cooling plant................................................................................................ 146
th
16 PAGE 4 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Contents TRIDIUM
System enablers, interlocks and alarms ..................................................... 147

Chiller staging and sequence control on direct strategy ............................. 152
Chiller staging and sequence control on supply temperature strategy ....... 156
Chiller staging and sequence control on load power strategy..................... 158
Chiller staging and sequence control staged externally strategy ................ 161
Transport system and pump sequence strategy ......................................... 163
Cooling delivery - The delivery system application............................................... 165
Overview ..................................................................................................... 165

Cooling delivery - The pre-controlled group application ...................................... 175
Overview ..................................................................................................... 175

The Air Handling Unit application ........................................................................... 189
Overview ..................................................................................................... 189

Application selection.................................................................................... 190
System enablers, interlocks and alarms ..................................................... 191
Control strategy overview............................................................................ 192
Delayed start-up method strategy ............................................................... 194
Heating and cooling staging strategy .......................................................... 202
Low / High fan speed control strategy ......................................................... 208
Fan modulating control strategy .................................................................. 210
Filters strategy............................................................................................. 212
Supply fan control strategy.......................................................................... 213
Extract fan control strategy ......................................................................... 215
Heater control strategy ................................................................................ 217
Chilled water cooler control strategy ........................................................... 224
DX chiller control strategy ........................................................................... 227
Humidifier control strategy........................................................................... 231
Heat recovery run around coil strategy ....................................................... 234
Heat recovery wheel control strategy.......................................................... 237
Heat recovery plate heat exchanger (modulating bypass) strategy ............ 239
Heat recovery plate heat exchanger (open / close bypass) strategy .......... 243
Heat recovery mixing dampers strategy...................................................... 245
th
16 PAGE 5 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Contents TRIDIUM
The extract fan application....................................................................................... 251
Overview ..................................................................................................... 251

Extract fan control strategy overview .......................................................... 252
Fan On / Off control strategy ....................................................................... 253
Fan Low / High control strategy................................................................... 255
The heat recovery unit (HRU) application............................................................... 257
Overview ..................................................................................................... 257

Control strategy overview............................................................................ 258
Combined supply fan and extract fan control strategy ................................ 259
Separate supply fan and extract fan on / off control strategy ...................... 262
Separate supply fan and extract fan modulating control strategy ............... 265
Bypass air damper open / close control strategy ........................................ 270
Bypass air damper modulating control strategy .......................................... 271
Default alarms............................................................................................................ 277
Logging ...................................................................................................................... 281
Overview ..................................................................................................... 281

Logging frequency and capacity.................................................................. 281
Default logging............................................................................................. 281
Related documents ................................................................................................... 284
Document Control..................................................................................................... 284

This is a 284 page document at A4
th
16 PAGE 6 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Introduction TRIDIUM
Introduction
Vykon HVAC provides a new approach to creating heating, ventilating and air-conditioning control
applications within a standard Tridium JACE® controller. Powered by the industry-leading NiagaraAX
Framework®, it dramatically speeds up control system engineering whilst ensuring consistency and
accuracy of set-up.
For the installer, to the engineer and end-user, Vykon HVAC has been designed to provide productivity,
reliability and efficiency from a simple to use, intuitive software based solution. With a web browser
interface for remote maintenance and a future-proof ability to adapt along with a building’s lifespan the
benefits of Vykon HVAC set the benchmark for HVAC applications.
The use of standardised applications provides the framework to control any location. Although each Vykon
HVAC installation will be different in option choices and settings, as each is derived from a standard
application source, it offers instant familiarity and versatility for the engineer.
Thanks to the power of the NiagaraAX® framework you won’t get bogged down with detailed programming.
Configuring of Vykon HVAC is a truly automated experience. Applications come with default settings to
ensure your system works first time, every time and modifications can be made instantly offering total
flexibility and future-proof expansion.
As a solution which is delivered in a standard JACE® controller, Vykon HVAC seamlessly connects to the
controls automation network and operates alongside other application solutions. It is a scalable
implementation which supports standard NiagaraAX® connectability to enterprise applications.
Scope
This document contains a detailed description of all the applications available in the Vykon HVAC release.
Summary of the applications library

Mini applications
General applications
Super applications
Standard applications
Acknowledgements and references
Most of the Vykon HVAC application control strategies are based upon industry standard principles and
techniques. The description of their operation in this guide contains content which has been collected from
several sources. Grateful acknowledgement is therefore made to the following:
Title Author Organisation

Application Guide AG 7/98 – Library of system AJ Martin The Building Services Research
control strategies CP Banyard and Information Association (BSRIA)
Design Guide 2000 SeaChange SeaChange
Building Control Systems – CIBSE Guide H CIBSE The Chartered Institution of Building Services
Engineers (CIBSE)
Terminology and graphical symbols (VDI code of DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung.e.V Berlin.(DIN)
practice) DIN 1946 Part 1)
th
16 PAGE 7 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Introduction TRIDIUM
th
16 PAGE 8 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
The applications library TRIDIUM
The applications library
Here is an overview of HVAC applications and strategies that comprise the Vykon HVAC applications
library…
Heating Systems
Heat generation
Constant or modulating boilers
Boiler status and system monitoring
Individual boiler pumps and cut-off valves
Single or twin primary pumps and cut off valves
Shunt pump
Delta T temperature and sequence control
Heat distribution (secondary circuits)

Constant volume / variable temperature
Constant temperature / variable volume
Single or twin secondary pumps and cut off valves
Radiators or radiant panels
Indirect or direct domestic hot water system (DHWS)
Cooling Systems
Water chillers
Packaged air cooled water chillers
Chiller status and system monitoring
Individual chiller pumps and cut-off valves
Single or twin primary pumps and cut off valves
Staged sequence control
Chilled water distribution (secondary circuits)

Constant volume and variable volume
Single or twin secondary pumps and cut off valves
Pressure or temperature controlled
Dew point control
th
16 PAGE 9 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Air Handling Systems
Humidification
Damper control Steam humidifier (constant or modulating)
Full outside air damper system
Supply fan
Filtration Constant volume supply fan
Air filter with pressure monitoring Two speed supply fan
VAV main duct static pressure system -
Heat recovery supply fan speed control
Thermal wheel (constant speed or modulating)
Mixing dampers Extract fan
Run around coil Constant volume extract fan
Fixed plate heat exchanger (constant or Two speed extract fan
modulating bypass) Variable volume extract fan
Cooling coil Fire / smoke control

Chilled water (CHW) cooling coil Fire / smoke control, plant shutdown
Direct expansion (up to 4 stages of DX) cooling Fire / smoke control, damper position
coil
Control strategies for air handling systems
Heating coil Constant air volume system
Low temperature hot water (LTHW) heating coil Variable air volume system
General control strategies
Time control Compensated control

Low temperature plant protection PID control
Summer condition Sequence control
Adaptive and non adaptive optimum start Delta T control
Night purge Pump auto changeover
Trace heating Pump exercise
Fire system interlock Thermal flow
Fan overrun Geo-thermal wells
Pump prerun and overrun
th
16 PAGE 10 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Vykon HVAC applications

Within the Vykon HVAC library, applications are categorised as either ‘super-applications’, ‘general-
applications’, standard-applications’ or ‘mini-applications’ and their definition determines the scope and type
of HVAC application.
‘Super-applications’ and ‘general-applications’ form the core of the automated Vykon HVAC application
library because these applications provide complete controls flexibility and can all be set up and configured
AX
without any recourse to programming with the Niagara workbench tool. The “heating plant” application is
an example of a ‘super-application’. General-applications’ are common applications which all HVAC control
systems need and these are always loaded by default into every station. A “time schedule” or “holiday
schedule” are examples of ‘general-applications’.
The Vykon HVAC “New HVAC station wizard” provides an easy to use intuitive method of selecting one or
more ‘super-applications’ from the Vykon HVAC library for inclusion in a station. The ‘super-applications’,
or ‘general-applications’ can then be completely configured via the browser because they contain all the I/O
configuration, settings parameters, alarming, histories, graphics visualisation and other functionality in
common with any fully completed HVAC application. It is by using these applications that the Vykon HVAC
applications engineering user can gain the maximum productivity in engineering time and reliability.
‘Mini-applications’ and ‘standard-applications’ are the building-blocks of the ‘super-applications’ because

they contain fundamental hvac components and control strategies and also include appropriate graphics.
These building blocks are made available in Vykon HVAC to the applications engineer so that, if required,
they can be manually selected and configured to easily add new or extra controls functionality to an
application whilst still maintaining the same overall ‘look-and-feel’ of the ‘super-applications’. “Room
sensor” and “PID Loop” are examples of ‘mini-applications’, and “Air heater”, “Thermal wheel” and “Heat
pump” are examples of ‘standard-applications’.
General applications (hvacAppsGeneral)

All the applications which make up the general applications can be inspected and used by the applications
engineer by accessing them via the hvacAppsGeneral module in the palette. General applications
(GeneralApp) is a ‘super-application’ but breaks the rule of being available for selection in the “New HVAC
station wizard”. This is because it is always automatically selected and available in every station because it
is part of the ‘default station’ which is used whenever the wizard creates a station. General applications
consist of some general station application configuration and some ‘general-applications’
General station application configuration

Station time and date display
Generation of I/O module wiring schedules
Reset push button configuration
Alarm indication and control behaviour
General-applications
Pump exercise
Holiday schedule application
Time schedule application
Outside temperature application
Average outside air temperature applicatin
Night purge application
Fire override application
Trace heating application
th
16 PAGE 11 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Heating plant applications (hvacAppsHeatingPlant)

The applications which make up the heating plant applications can be inspected and used by the
applications engineer by accessing them via the hvacAppsHeatingPlant module in the palette. There is one
‘super-application’ in the heating plant module which is available for selection in the “New HVAC station
wizard”……
Super-applications
Max 10 boilers: The Max 10 boilers application comprises monitoring and control facilities for a
boiler system comprising up to 10 packaged boiler units. The application contains options for
temperature and sequence control as well as mechanical options such as on/off or modulating
boilers, individual boiler pumps with or without cut off valves and a range of shunt pump
arrangements. Applications which are utilising a combined boiler-calorifier packaged unit are also
accommodated in the Max 10 boilers application.
Heat delivery applications (hvacAppsHeatDelivery)

The applications which make up the heat delivery applications can be inspected and used by the
applications engineer by accessing them via the hvacAppsHeatDelivery module in the palette. There are
five ‘super-applications’ in the heat delivery module and they are all available for selection in the “New
HVAC station wizard”…
Super-applications
Radiator group: The radiator group application provides a heating delivery secondary circuit
comprising pump, control valve, monitoring devices and control strategies to maintain the
environmental temperature of a space which is heated with water filled radiators. The radiator
group application offers valve arrangement options for constant volume, variable temperature and
constant temperature, variable volume circuits as well as control using supply or space temperature
Radiant panels: The radiant panels application provides a heating delivery secondary circuit
comprising pump, control valve, monitoring devices and control strategies to maintain the
environmental temperature of a space which is heated with water filled radiant panels. The radiant
panels application offers valve arrangement options for constant volume, variable temperature and
constant temperature, variable volume circuits as well as control using supply or space
temperature.
Delivery system: The delivery system application provides a general purpose secondary circuit for
the delivery of heated water. It comprises maintained or modulating, single or twin pump
arrangements, restricting or diverting control valve, monitoring devices and control strategies to
maintain the supply temperature and pressure of any connected secondary circuits. The delivery
system is responsive to the demand of any secondary circuits that are connected to it as well as
being able to communicate with the heat generating system for boiler demand temperature and
boiler demand limiting
Non-controlled group: The non controlled group application provides a simple secondary circuit
for the delivery of heated water to heating devices. It contains no pumps nor controlled valve. Its
primary use is an un-controlled delivery system which can communicate with the heat generating
system for boiler demand temperature.
Domestic hot water (DHW): - The domestic hot water (DHW) application provides for a
comprehensive range of mechanical equipment, control and protection strategies for the
distribution of tap water. Heat supply for the final DHW circuit may be supplied by electricity, gas or
indirectly from a boiler system with or without a heat exchanger. Temperature protection strategies
are available for both the calorifier and DHW circuit as well as a ‘high heat’ strategy specifically
designed for Legionella prevention. The DHW application is able to communicate with the heat
generating system for boiler demand temperature and boiler demand limiting. In addition the DHW
application can also communicate with other heat distribution circuits to request DHW preference
priority for heat supply.
th
16 PAGE 12 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Cooling plant applications (hvacAppsCoolingPlant)

The applications which make up the cooling plant applications can be inspected and used by the
applications engineer by accessing them via the hvacAppsCoolingPlant module in the palette. There is just
one ‘super-application’ in the cooling plant module and it is available for selection in the “New HVAC station
wizard”…
Super-applications
Max 4 chillers: The Max 4 chillers application comprises monitoring and control facilities for a
chiller system comprising up to 4 packaged chiller units. The application contains options for
temperature and sequence control as well as mechanical options such as on/off chillers, single or
twin primary pumps and individual chiller pumps with or without cut off valves.
Cooling delivery applications (hvacAppsCoolingDelivery)

The applications which make up the cooling delivery applications can be inspected and used by the
applications engineer by accessing them via the hvacAppsCoolingDelivery module in the palette. There are
two ‘super-applications’ in the cooling delivery module and they are both available for selection in the “New
HVAC station wizard”…
Super-applications
Delivery system: The delivery system application provides a general purpose secondary circuit for
the delivery of chilled water. It comprises maintained or modulating, single or twin pump
arrangements, restricting or diverting control valve, monitoring devices and control strategies to
maintain the supply temperature and pressure of any connected secondary circuits. The delivery
system is responsive to the demand of any secondary circuits that are connected to it as well as
being able to communicate with the chiller system for chilled water demand temperature.
Pre-controlled group: The cooling delivery pre-controlled group application provides a chilled
water delivery secondary circuit comprising pump, control valve, monitoring devices and control
strategies to maintain the chilled water (CHW) demand of a zone of mechanical equipment such as
fan coil units (FCU) or chilled ceilings. The pre-controlled group application offers valve
arrangement options for constant volume, variable temperature and constant temperature, variable
volume circuits as well as control using supply or space temperature.
th
16 PAGE 13 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Air handling applications (hvacAppsAirHandling)

All the applications which make up the air handling applications can be inspected and used by the
applications engineer by accessing them via the hvacAppsAirHandling module in the palette. There are
three ‘super-applications’ in the air handling applications module and they are all available for selection in
the “New HVAC station wizard”…
Super-applications
Air handling unit: Air handling unit: An extensive air handling unit application comprising
mechanical systems for ventilation, heat recovery, humidification and methods for heating and
cooling the supply air
Extract fan: The extract fan application comprises an extract fan which can either be an on/off or
two speed Hi/Lo device.
Heat recovery unit (HRU): The heat recovery unit (HRU) application comprises a supply and
extract fan in a unit which is also equipped with an air heat exchanger. The HRU is a simple way of
ventilating a space when there is no direct need for any additional heating or cooling.
th
16 PAGE 14 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Standard-applications and Mini-applications (hvacAppsGeneral)

These applications are made available for use by the applications engineer to create custom applications
and add functionality to the ‘super-applications’. They can all be inspected and used by accessing them via
the hvacAppsGeneral module in the palette.
Standard-applications
Air heater
Air cooler
Air DX cooler
Modulating humidifier
On-off humidifier
Thermal wheel
Run-around coil
Plate heat exchanger
Dampers
AHU start functions
Heat and demand control
Heat-pump
Cooling tower
Weather station
Thermal flow
Geo-thermal wells
Mini-applications
Dampers (Air valves) (Register valve, Register valve 0-10v, Register valve Tri-state, Valve FDS)
ColdGeneration (Chiller)
Fans (Fan, Fan 0-10v, Fan HiLo, Fan HiLo with IO)
Functions (Adaptive OSC, Heating curve, Hysteresis Rel, Hsteresis Abs, Non-adaptive OSC, PID
loop)
HeatGeneration (Boiler, Boiler 0-10v, Boiler HiLo, Boiler HiLo with IO, Boiler on-off 0-10v, Boiler on-
off tri-state)
Pumps (Pump, Pump 0-10v)
Sensors (Duct sensor, Outside sensor, Room sensor)
Valves (Changeover valve 3-way, Valve 0-10v, Valve 2-way, Valve 3-way, Valve tri-state)
th
16 PAGE 15 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
th
16 PAGE 16 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Common functions TRIDIUM
Common functions
In this section are a number of functions which are common and used in more than one place in the ‘super-
applications’ and to avoid repetition, they are described here. Some all also available as “mini-applications”
and can be found in various folders of the general applications module (hvacAppsGeneral) and.Functions
module (hvacFunctions)
Common functions
Hysteresis absolute (abs) [hvacAppsGeneral – Functions]
Hysteresis relative (rel) [hvacAppsGeneral – Functions]
Heat curve [hvacAppsGeneral – Functions]
Adaptive optimum start optimiser [hvacAppsGeneral – Functions]
Non adaptive optimum start optimiser [hvacAppsGeneral – Functions]
Set point change delay (decrease value) [hvacFunctions – Functions]
Application Status
th
16 PAGE 17 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Hysteresis
Overview
Hysteresis is used to filter signals so that the output reacts slowly by taking recent history into account. In
an HVAC application for example, a thermostat controlling a heater will turn the heater on when the
temperature drops below 5°C, but will not turn it off until the temperature rises above 7°C. Thus the on/off
output of the thermostat to the heater when the temperature is between 5°C and 7°C depends on the
history of the temperature. This prevents rapid switching on and off as the temperature drifts around the
set point.
The hysteresis function that is used in Vykon HVAC has the additional functionality of ‘time’ which further
enhances the filtering of on/off control. There are also two variants of the hysteresis function, absolute
hysteresis and relative hysteresis, which are used extensively in the Vykon HVAC applications.
Operation
Operation of both the absolute hysteresis (hysteresis abs) and relative hysteresis (hysteresis rel) is
described in Figure 1 and Figure 2 respectively below. Both versions offer two preset operational modes,
heating and cooling and the output is an on or off value. The behaviour of the output of each of these
modes is similar except that one is the inversion of the other. Note how the adjustable time delay offers
another level of filtering to the change of value. The hysteresis (rel) calculates the difference that the
measured input is away from a ‘relative setpoint’ value input in order to determine the switching points.
air temp.
ºC
Outside
On
Heat
Off
Cool On
Off
00:10 00:20
Figure 1: Hysteresis (abs) operation
th
16 PAGE 18 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
ºC
air temp.
Outside
12
Setpoint
10 10
9
On
Heat
Off
Cool On
Off
00:10 00:20
Figure 2: Hysteresis (rel) operation
th
16 PAGE 19 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Heat curve
Overview
The heat curve function is a method of adjusting a value, usually one which is used as a control loop
setpoint in accordance with some other temperature value. A typical example is for compensated water
temperature control where the flow water temperature setpoint is varied as a function of the measured
outside air temperature. This is sometimes called weather compensation or compensated setpoint.
The heat curve function that is used in Vykon HVAC is designed to be a universal control device that can be
used for any type of application which requires that an output value is set by the value of an input to a
configured ratio. The heat curve has optional slope correction functionality which provides compensation
for those applications using non-linear control devices such as most varieties of valve.
Operation
The output value (Y) of the heat curve function is calculated using the input value (X) and a slope which is
defined by two co-ordinates X1/Y1 and X2/Y2. This fundamental relationship is simply described in Figure 1.
Y2
Output
Y1
X X
1 2
Input
Figure 1: Fundamental heat curve operation
When the heat curve is used in its usual and default application mode, the input values of X1 and X2 are two
values of an outside air temperature which would typically set the setpoint value of a loop controlling the
internal water flow temperature between values defined by Y1 and Y2. Operation is simple such that if the
outside air temperature was -10°C or lower then the water flow temperature would control to 90°C and as
the outside air temperature rose to 20°C and above, control of the flow temperature would decrease in a
linear manner to 20°C. Figure 2 shows this relationship but please note that for this application the output
values of Y1 and Y2 are positioned on the Y axis in a ‘reversed’ order of magnitude. To overcome this
apparent graphical discrepancy the heat curve has a “standard” configuration setting which allows the heat
curve to be displayed in a more ‘usual’ fashion. This is also shown in Figure 2.
th
16 PAGE 20 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Notice that the heat curve display indicates what the value of the current measured input is (in this example
“Outside air temperature”) and the value of the calculated output (in this example “Flow temperature”). The
values of X1/Y1 and X2/Y2 are user adjustable settings and the heat curve function also provides for both
maximum and minimum limits to be set on the output which will override any conflicting output from the
curve. These two values can optionally be set either by an “external” value from other control strategy logic
or “internal” by a user setting. Figure 2 shows the heat curve with “internal” (user) settings.
ºC
Flow temperature
20
90
ºC
-10 20
Outside air temperature
Figure 2: Typical heat curve operation
In order to accommodate use of the heat curve in applications where the transfer ratio action is not
reversed, it has an optional “proportional” configuration setting and an example of this is shown in Figure 3.
Notice that Figure 3 also shows the heat curve with “external” maximum and minimum output value limit
settings.
ºC
Output temperature
40
30
ºC
20 50
Input temperature
Figure 3: Proportional heat curve operation
th
16 PAGE 21 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Slope factor
The slope factor is a means of altering the transfer ratio of the heat curve from being a simple straight
linear relationship to a more complex one. The slope factor is an adjustment which is applied at a point
which equal to 2/3 between the X1/X2 values. An example can be seen in the Figure 4. With a slope factor
of 1.0 an output of 43.3°C corresponds to an input of 10°C. However with a slope factor of 1.5 the output is
lifted to 64.9 at the same input value. The linear slope effectively ‘tilts’ at the 2/3 point on the x axes but the
X1/Y1 and X2/Y2 values remain constant.
ºC
90
Output temperature
64.9
Slope factor = 1.5
Slope factor = 1.5
43.3
Slope factor = 1
Slope factor = 1
20
Input temperature
-10 0 10 20 ºC
⅔ ⅓
Figure 4: Slope factor operation
Figure 5 shows examples from the heat curve function…
Figure 5: Slope factor in operation
th
16 PAGE 22 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Adaptive optimum start optimiser
Overview
Optimum start is used for the optimisation of start time for heating systems in intermittently occupied
buildings with regular occupation profiles. Adaptive optimum start operation utilises an adaptive self-
learning algorithm to achieve the defined comfort conditions at the start of the occupied period in the
shortest possible time, thus minimising fuel consumption and thereby maximising energy efficiency.
Optimum start control systems are now required by many statutory building regulatory bodies. For
example, in the UK, optimum start is required for heating systems of over 100kW capacity and generally
recommended for heating systems of over 30kW capacity.
In a heating application the optimum start strategy will switch on some time before the time that people
arrive in the building, in order to heat the building up to its normal occupied temperature. This is known as
the preheat period. How long the preheat period needs to be depends on the outside temperature, the
thermal response time of the building structure and of the heating plant, and the difference between the
current space temperature and desired space temperature at occupancy time. An optimum start strategy
monitors the outside temperature, and ensures that the preheat period is the correct length of time for the
building to reach occupancy temperature neither before nor after people arrive. This minimises energy
wastage by 'optimising' the preheat time.
An adaptive optimum start strategy will modify its preheat time algorithm after each plant operating period
using knowledge of the time at which the space temperature setpoint was achieved or of the actual space
temperature when normal plant operation at occupancy began. The algorithm is continually modified and
this iterative process modifies and adapts the algorithm to the particular building and installation and so
improve its performance. The optimum start operation terminates either when the space temperature
reaches its setpoint value or when occupancy time arrives and normal plant operation begins.
The optimum start function that is used in Vykon HVAC two variants, adaptive and non-adaptive and both
are used extensively in the Vykon HVAC applications. Three boolean signals are provided by the optimiser
for use by other HVAC applications. These are; Preheat, Occupancy and Combined. Figure 1 shows a
summary of the Vykon HVAC adaptive optimum start optimiser.
Time &
next event
Preheat
Adaptive
Occupancy HVAC
optimum start
applications
Combined
Space air temperature
Figure 1: Adaptive optimum start optimiser
th
16 PAGE 23 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Operation
Operation of the adaptive optimum start optimiser is shown in Figure 2 and it can be described in three
parts…
Calculated start time

Outside temperature correction
Adaption factor
Boost constant
K space temp.
0 20 minutes
time to raise 1kelvin
ºC
ºC space temperature
max. preheat duration
outside temperature
desired space preheat normal operation

temp. correction
factor desired space
(10*0.1)=1 space temp. 21 temp. at
occupancy
10 12
22:00 03:00 06:00 16:00

calculated start time occupancy start occupancy end
Boolean signals
Preheat
applications
to HVAC
Occupancy
Combined
Figure 2: Adaptive optimum start optimiser operation

The optimiser uses the boost constant (default 20 min / K) to calculate the duration of the preheat
period and this is based upon the delta T (∆T) value between the current space temperature and the
desired space temperature (default 21°C) required at the start of occupancy. This calculation will only
take place as long as the following conditions are satisfied…
The optimiser is not in a preheat mode

The current space temperature is lower than the desired space temperature at occupancy
The outside temperature is less than 15°C
th
16 PAGE 24 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
The calculated start time may also be adjusted by the outside temperature correction algorithm and
adaption factor. The preheat period will be no longer than the maximum preheat time parameter
(default 8hr)
Outside temperature correction

The outside temperature is used to adjust the desired space temperature at occupancy and thereby the
preheat period to avoid undershoot and overshoot during the spring and autumn seasons. The product
of the outside temperature and the desired space temperature correction factor (default 0.10) is
subtracted from the desired space temperature. This provides a corrected desired space temperature
value which is then used to calculate the preheat period
Adaption factor
The adaption factor (default 0.8) is a measure of learning within the optimiser because it reflects how
successful the optimiser was at the end of the preheat period. It is used to correct the next calculated
start time.
If the desired space temperature at occupancy is achieved then there is no change to the adaption
factor. This value will be used for the subsequent occupancy period
If the desired space temperature is achieved early then the adaption factor will be adjusted to a
lower value so that the subsequent occupancy period will start later
If occupancy time occurs before the desired space temperature is reached then the adaption factor
will be adjusted to a higher value so that the subsequent occupancy period will start earlier
In the example shown in Figure 2, the space temperature is currently 11°C. The desired space
temperature at occupancy of 21°C is corrected to 20°C due to the outside air temperature and desired
space temperature correction factor (10*0.1=1). This means that the heating plant must raise the space by
9°C which will take 3 hours (with a boost constant of 20 minutes per 1K). If the desired space temperature
at occupancy is achieved then there will be no change to the adaption factor of 0.8.
th
16 PAGE 25 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Non adaptive optimum start optimiser
Overview
Optimum start is used for the optimisation of start time for heating systems in intermittently occupied
buildings with regular occupation profiles. Optimum start control systems are now required by many
statutory building regulatory bodies. For example, in the UK, optimum start is required for heating systems
of over 100kW capacity and generally recommended for heating systems of over 30kW capacity.
In a heating application the optimum start strategy will switch on some time before the time that people
arrive in the building, in order to heat the building up to its normal occupied temperature. This is known as
the preheat period. How long the preheat period needs to be depends on the outside temperature and the
thermal response time of the building structure. An optimum start strategy monitors the outside
temperature, and ensures that the preheat period is the correct length of time for the building to reach
occupancy temperature neither before nor after people arrive. This minimises energy wastage by
'optimising' the preheat time.
The optimum start function that is used in Vykon HVAC two variants, adaptive and non-adaptive and both
are used extensively in the Vykon HVAC applications. Three boolean signals are provided by the optimiser
for use by other HVAC applications. These are; Preheat, Occupancy and Combined. Figure 1 shows a
summary of the Vykon HVAC non adaptive optimum start optimiser.
Time & Preheat

next event
Non adaptive Occupancy HVAC
Outside air temperature optimum start applications
Combined
Figure 1: Non adaptive optimum start optimiser
Operation
The non adaptive optimum start optimiser does not use the space temperature in its calculation of start
time. It relies entirely on the outside temperature only and it calculates the start of preheat from the outside
temperature and a factor which reflects the performance of the heating plant and building fabric. Operation
of the non adaptive optimum start optimiser is shown in Figure 2.
th
16 PAGE 26 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
preheat time = 15 ºC – outside temperature * degree hour factor

Outside temperature
ºC
max. preheat duration
preheat normal operation
space temp.
22:00 03:00 06:00 16:00

calculated start time occupancy start occupancy end
Boolean signals
Preheat
applications
to HVAC
Occupancy
Combined
Figure 2: non adaptive optimum start optimiser operation

The start time of preheat is calculated by using a delta T (∆T) value between the outside temperature
and a 15°C constant. The calculated preheat time is the product of this ∆T value and a degree hour
factor (default 0.25) and this is a cumulative algorithm. This calculation will only take place as long as
the following conditions are satisfied…
The optimiser is not in a preheat mode

The outside temperature is less than 15°C
The preheat period will be no longer than the maximum preheat duration parameter (default 8hr). In
addition, if the preheat period follows a period of extended shutdown such as a holiday, then the
preheat period will be extended by the value of the ‘extend preheat after holiday shutdown’ value
(default 10 minutes).
th
16 PAGE 27 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Setpoint change delay
Overview
The setpoint change delay function provides a method of smoothly changing a setting from one value to
another. When a setting is subjected to a sudden and violent step change the resulting control strategy
may become unstable while it reacts to the new setting. A typical example is where the setpoint to a control
loop is changed from one value to another when the system moves between normal and night setback
operation. By introducing a ‘setpoint change delay’ the step change can be made to incrementally move
between settings thereby smoothing out any sudden change.
The setpoint change delay function, referred to in the Vykon HVAC applications is provided by a ‘decrease
value’ function. This function is designed to be a universal control device that can be used for any type of
application which requires a delayed change between two values.
Operation
The output of the decrease value function will be set equal to the input when the enable signal is true.
When enable goes false then the output will decrement towards zero at a rate determined by the interval,
which has a default of 10 seconds, and a step value of default 0.1. This fundamental relationship is simply
described in Figure 1.
(setpoint change delay) interval

output
+IN
0 step value
-IN (0.1)
True
Enable
False
Figure 1: Decrease value operation
th
16 PAGE 28 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
When the decrease value function is used as a setpoint change function then the setpoint will change to the
new value at a rate determined by the configurable setpoint change delay parameter and a step value of
0.1. In the example shown in Figure 2, the control loop setpoint will be changed smoothly over a period of 5
/ 0.1 seconds. This equates to a delay of 50 seconds.
1 sec
setpoint change delay
ºC
control loop setpoint
50 step value
0.1
45
normal operation delay night control
Figure 2: Typical decrease value operation
th
16 PAGE 29 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Application Status
Overview
The main graphic view of every one of the Vykon HVAC applications contains a ‘Status’ label which can be
used to manually override the application. In addition it contains a ‘Status log’ which details the recent
history of the application’s status.
Operation
There are two functions available by mouse click on the status label of the main graphic view of each
application and these are illustrated in Figure 1
Figure 1: Status label operation
Status label ‘Left’ mouse click:

A pop-up dialogue displays the contents of a status (string) log which by default shows the most recent
30 records of automatic and manual events of the application status. The ‘Time range’ drop-down
allows for a different range filter to be selected. The list may also be ‘exported’ by use of the column
selection switch
Status label ‘Right’ mouse click:

The application may be manually overridden to On / Off / Auto. Note that this manual action will not
override any safety interlocks such as ‘frost protection’ that may be configured or in operation.
th
16 PAGE 30 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
General functions and TRIDIUM
applications
General functions and applications
All the applications which make up the general applications can be inspected and used by the applications
engineer by accessing them via the hvacAppsGeneral module in the palette. There are also a number of
general functions included in this which can also be configured and set. General applications (GeneralApp)
is a ‘super-application’ but breaks the rule of being available for selection in the “New HVAC station wizard”.
This is because it is always automatically selected and available in every station because it is part of the
‘default station’ which is used whenever the wizard creates a station. General functions and applications
consist of some general station application configuration and setup and the following ‘functions’ and
‘general applications’ will be detailed in this section:
General functions
Pump exercise
Alarms
General applications
Holiday schedule application
Time schedule application
Outside temperature application
Average outside air temperature application
Night purge application
Fire override application
Trace heating application
th
16 PAGE 31 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
The pump exercise application
Overview
Whenever mechanical devices such as pumps are not used for long periods of time, seizure due to
corrosion and precipitate build-up may occur. “Pump exercise” is an application which exercises the pumps
periodically to ensure operation after the times of inactivity.
The pump exercise application can be found in the hvacAppsGeneral module. It is also one of a number of
applications that are part of the GeneralApp which is a super application and is part of the default station
and automatically installed in every Vykon HVAC station database. It provides a pump exercise strategy
which can be used by other super applications. Figure 1 summarises the pump exercise application…
Time & Pump exercise On / Off HVAC

day
application applications
None
Direct
Enable pump
exercise Interval
Figure 1: The pump exercise application
th
16 PAGE 32 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Control strategy
There are two methods of pump exercise available within this application; ‘Direct’ or ‘Interval’. The
difference between the two relates to the flexibility required for pump exercise, particularly on whether
individual pumps have differing requirements for their pump exercise operation:
Direct:
An example of pump exercise (direct) is illustrated in Figure 2. This is the simplest method of operation
and is selected when the ‘Enable pump exercise’ is configured as ‘Direct’. A ‘Day of week’ is set to
select the day(s) during the week when the pump exercise must occur. The ‘Start time’ and ‘End time’
settings determine when on the day(s) the pump(s) will start and stop under control of this pump
exercise application. A pump exercise configuration within every relevant HVAC application must also
be set to ‘Direct’ thereby providing a consistent site-wide ‘Direct’ pump exercise strategy.
S S M T W T F S S M T
Direct
(General app)
.
Direct
Pump
(HVAC app)
.
Time
Figure 2: Pump exercise (Direct) operation
th
16 PAGE 33 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Interval:
An example of pump exercise (interval) is illustrated in Figure 3. This method gives some control of
when the pump exercise occurs to individual pumps in the relevant HVAC applications and also is
dependent upon the normal operation of the pump. If the pump has been running normally then a
pump exercise is not required. It is only after the pump has not been running for some time (the
‘interval’) then a pump exercise is needed but furthermore, this pump exercise may be scheduled not to
run at inconvenient times during the week such as when there are no maintenance personnel on site.
This method of pump exercise is selected when the ‘Enable pump exercise’ is configured as ‘Interval’.
The ‘Day of week’, ‘Start time’ and ‘End time’ settings determine an “operational window” during the
week when the pumps may perform a pump exercise operation. The exact time and duration of the
pump exercise is determined by the settings within each relevant HVAC application and the normal
operation of each pump but this pump exercise application effectively gives an enabling operation
window.
This method will allow pump exercise to occur for example only at times when the maintenance facility
is on-site such as during a weekday. It also allows individual pumps to have different regimes for the
frequency that pump exercise takes place and for how long it lasts. The pump exercise configuration
within every relevant HVAC application must therefore be set to ‘Interval’. When this is done the ‘Pump
exercise interval’ and the normal running of the pump sets the frequency of pump exercise and the
‘Pump exercise duration’ sets how long it lasts. Note that the ‘interval’ timer in the HVAC application is
reset whilst the pump is normally running and the reset removed every time it stops.
S M T W T F S S M T W T
Interval
(General app)
.
Pump
Interval
(HVAC app)
.
Time
Reset removed
Figure 3: Pump exercise (Interval) operation
th
16 PAGE 34 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Note that only when the ‘Pump exercise interval’ has expired and the pump exercise application ‘Start
time’ is active the pump will start and this is illustrated by the example in Figure 4.
Finally, beware that if the pump exercise application is set to ‘interval’ with ‘Start time’ and ‘End times’
set appropriately large but if the relevant HVAC application is set to ‘direct’, the pump will operate for
the duration of the start-to-stop time.
S M T W T F S S M T W T
Interval
(General app)
.
Pump
Interval
(HVAC app)
.
Time
Figure 4: Pump exercise (Interval) operation
th
16 PAGE 35 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Alarms
Overview
All the super applications of Vykon HVAC contain strategy options that include the allocation of one or more
alarms which alert users, of any mechanical plant failure or adverse environmental conditions. These
alarms are collected in two alarm databases called “Urgent alarms” and “NonUrgent alarms”. The alarms
are available for review and acknowledgement via the browser interface. In addition, the alarms in these
databases can be made to affect the condition of one or more visual or audible indicator devices which
could be sited in the mechanical plant room or elsewhere in the building under control.
Alarm classification and behaviour

There are two main alarm databases that contain the alarms which alert users of any mechanical plant
failure or adverse environmental conditions. These are…
Urgent Alarms
Non Urgent Alarms
The behaviour of each is similar with respect to annunciation or indication and acknowledgement but these
two provide a ‘priority’ choice to offer some categorisation of alarms. A HighHigh alarm which is monitoring
a boiler flow high temperature is an example of an Urgent Alarm but a High alarm which is monitoring the
same boiler flow temperature but configured at a lower level to give a warning is an example of a Non
Urgent Alarm.
Vykon HVAC has another two types of alarm classification for the alarms in each of these two databases.
These are…
Urgent Alarms Ack and Urgent Alarms NoAck

Non Urgent Alarms Ack and Non Urgent Alarms NoAck
th
16 PAGE 36 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
The significance of the ‘Ack’ and ‘NoAck’ types, as their names suggest, relates to options on the behaviour
of the alarm and plant control with respect to “Acknowledgement”. Consider the boiler application example
illustrated in Figure 1 to describe the operation of the Ack and NoAck functionality…
UrgentAlarmsAck and NonUrgentAlarmsAck behaviour:
Fail
Boiler failure alarm
Normal

Available
Boiler availability
Unavailable
On
Alarm indicator(s)
Off

Browser interface view Alarm
No alarm

Acknowledge
UrgentAlarmsNoAck and NonUrgentAlarmsNoAck behaviour: ‘Alarm indicator behaviour’
Fail
Boiler failure alarm
Normal

Available
Boiler availability
Unavailable
On
Alarm indicator(s)
Off

Browser interface view Alarm

No alarm

Acknowledge
No alarm visible Unacknowledged cleared alarm
Figure 1: Alarm Ack and NoAck behaviour Unacknowledged alarm Acknowledged uncleared alarm
Using the signals shown in Figure 1, consider the following operation…

1) A boiler goes into lockout and raises a boiler failure alarm
2) The boiler immediately becomes unavailable for demand and sequence control
3) The alarm indicator, which may be sited in the plant room, goes to an active on state
4) An (as yet) unacknowledged alarm is raised
5) If the alarm is of the ‘Ack’ type then, even though the original boiler failure alarm clears, the boiler still
remains unavailable until an “Acknowledgement” is generated either from user acknowledgement via
the browser interface or from pressing the “Reset” pushbutton
6) Alternatively, if the alarm is of the ‘NoAck’ type then, even though an acknowledgement has not been
generated, as soon as the original boiler failure alarm clears the boiler becomes immediately available
Notes:
If an acknowledgement of an (as yet) uncleared alarm is generated then both Ack and NoAck types
behave in exactly the same way in that there is no change of I/O condition
The behaviour of the Alarm indicator(s) when an acknowledgement is generated when the alarm is
still active can either be to go off or to remain on until all the alarms are cleared. This is set by the
‘Alarm indicator behaviour setting’
th
16 PAGE 37 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Alarm indicator strategy

The alarm indicator strategy contains the following main features…
Reset pushbutton
One or two alarm indicators
Manual indicator
An optional ‘reset’ pushbutton, usually sited alongside the indicator device, can provide a manual feedback
to reset the alarm indicators. The current state of all the indicators and the reset pushbutton is available in
an ‘overview’ graphic. Please note that the ‘name’ shown in the overview is the name of the mapped I/O
device.
A similar facility of a local plant room or building indicator device exists for the ‘manual mode’ condition of
the I/O module channels. There are two varieties of manual mode that the I/O channels can be in.
Mechanical plant can be manually overridden either through the browser graphical controls, by using the
‘True’ or ‘False’ selection, or by using the hand-off-auto bypass switches that exist on the digital output and
analogue output channels of some of the Vykon HVAC I/O modules. It is important that users are alerted to
the condition of all the plant with relation to manual override because this will cause a loss of efficiency if
left in a manual mode. An indicator device output which again, could be sited in the mechanical plant room
or elsewhere in the building under control, is available such that it will be active if any I/O channel is in a
‘manual mode’. The overall alarm indicator strategy is illustrated in Figure 2.
Alarm indicator behaviour
Off after reset Off after all

alarms cleared
Urgent alarms 1 or 2
(Ack or NoAck) indicators Urgent alarm
indicator
Acknowledge
Reset Indicator
pushbutton driver
Acknowledge
External signals
NonUrgent alarms NonUrgent

(Ack or NoAck) alarm indicator
Manual
I/O module override indicator
switch status
Manual
?
I/O channel manual
override
Figure 2: Alarm indicator strategy
th
16 PAGE 38 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
When pressed, the reset pushbutton automatically ‘acknowledges’ all the alarms in both the Urgent and
NonUrgent alarm databases. Whether this reset action also switches the indicator(s) off or whether the
indicator(s) remain on until all the active alarms have cleared is determined by the ‘alarm indicator
behaviour’ selection. There are two settings for this selection and the behaviour of each is described
here…
Off after reset: The indicator will go ‘off’ after the reset pushbutton has been pressed despite the
alarm being still in an active state. By using this setting it can be clearly identified in the plant room that
if an alarm from another source occurs then the indicator will return to an ‘on’ condition to highlight that
another problem has arisen
Off after all alarms cleared: The indicator will only go ‘off’ when all the active alarms have been
cleared. This is also a very useful and simple indication to signify that there are no more alarms active
in the system (this is the default setting)
Finally, if only one indicator, (it must be the Urgent alarm indicator), is mapped then the strategy
automatically allocates the single indicator behaviour to both databases.
th
16 PAGE 39 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
The holiday schedule application
Overview
A holiday schedule enables a number of preset time periods to be configured throughout a calendar year
which affects the way that a site installation may operate as regard to occupancy. The holiday schedule
application is mainly used as an optional override for time schedule applications but it may also be used
directly in some hvac applications.
The holiday schedule application can be found in the hvacAppsGeneral module. It is also one of a number
of applications that are part of the GeneralApp which is a super application and is part of the default station
and automatically installed in every Vykon HVAC station database. It provides a holiday schedule strategy
which can be used by other applications. Figure 1 summarises the holiday schedule application:
Holiday schedule on / off Time schedule

Time & application
date and HVAC
applications
Figure 1: The holiday schedule application
Control strategy
Output from the holiday schedule application to the time schedule and hvac applications is an ‘off’ condition
unless the current time and date corresponds with its settings for an event holiday in which case an ‘on’
condition is given. The effect of the holiday schedule override on a time schedule is that if the holiday
schedule is active then the time schedule will be overridden to an ‘off’ condition. Figure 2 illustrates a
typical example.
Figure 2: The holiday schedule
th
16 PAGE 40 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Up to four holiday schedules may be created and each one has the following controls and configuration
options which are illustrated in Figure 3:
Name:
Each holiday schedule must have a unique name allocated to it. This is used to identify it when the
holiday schedule is linked to other applications
Independence:
Up to four holiday schedules (‘Holiday schedules 1, 2, 3 and 4’) may be created; However they are
independent of each other and can be individually deleted when not required without affecting the other
schedules. This is illustrated by schedules 1 and 3
Event range:
Up to 10 independent events or ‘ranges’ may be created in any one holiday schedule. Each event may
be either a ‘Single day event’ in which case only a start date is configured, or a ‘Date range’ where both
a start and end date are configured
Event description:
Each event may have an ‘Event description’ to describe the event
Each year:
Each event may be configured to repeat ‘Each year’ or be regarded as a one-off event
Auto delete expired dates:

Each holiday schedule may be configured to automatically delete any event which has not been
selected to repeat ‘Each year’ and whose date has expired
Manual override:
The current state of the holiday schedule may be overridden manually by ‘right mouse click’ on the
current status
th
16 PAGE 41 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Figure 3: Holiday schedule controls, configuration and event creation
th
16 PAGE 42 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
The time schedule application
Overview
Fundamentally, a time schedule enables a number of on and off times to be preset within a weekly period.
These are times that represent for example the occupancy of a building, floor or zone, or which may enable
the switching of lights within an exhibition hall. The Vykon HVAC time schedule application has a number
of extra features that can be added to its basic functionality. These are; holiday schedule influence,
optimisation, time extension and setpoint. Up to 16 independently operating time schedule applications
may be configured.
The time schedule application can be found in the hvacAppsGeneral module. It is also one of a number of
and automatically installed in every Vykon HVAC station database. It provides a time schedule strategy
which can be used by HVAC applications. Figure 1 summarises the time schedule application…
Time & Current state

day
Next event/value HVAC
Holiday schedule applications
Time extension
Time schedule
application
Time extension
Figure 1: The time schedule application
th
16 PAGE 43 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Control strategy
Output from the time schedule application to the HVAC applications is an ‘off’ condition unless the current
time corresponds with its schedule settings in which case an ‘on’ condition is given. Figure 2 illustrates a
typical example showing the user’s view of the schedule.
Figure 2: The time schedule
Up to sixteen time schedules may be created and each one has the following controls and configuration
options which are illustrated in Figure 3:
Name:
Each time schedule must have a unique name allocated to it. This is used to identify it when the time
schedule is linked to other applications
Independence:
Up to sixteen time schedules (‘Time schedules 1, 2, 3 thro’ 16’) may be created; However they are
independent of each other and can be individually deleted when not required without affecting the other
schedules. This is illustrated by schedules 1, 2 and 4
Period range:
Up to 4 periods or ‘ranges’ may be created in any one day of a time schedule. In addition an ‘All day’
period may be configured in which case the schedule is on for all 24 hours.
th
16 PAGE 44 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Figure 3: Time schedule controls, configuration, period creation and adjustment
th
16 PAGE 45 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Manual override:
The current state of the time schedule may be overridden manually by ‘right mouse click’ on the current
status and this is illustrated in Figure 3
Time extension:
Up to 6 external digital input signals (5 continuous and 1 pulse) may be linked to a time schedule to
give a pre-defined extension time, which has a default value of 1 hour. This provides an external
means of extending the on time of the schedule or, if it is not already on then switching it on. In
addition a manual ‘start extension’ override is provided. Figure 4 shows an example.
Figure 4: Time extension
If the time extension signal is derived from a pulse status input then there is an additional override
option whereby the pulse signal can force an immediate extension time or, if the schedule is already on,
the extension time will not start until the end of the current on period. This is illustrated in Figure 5
Figure 5: Time extension (pulse only)
Holiday override:
A holiday schedule application may be configured to override the time schedule. The holiday schedule
application is described elsewhere in this document. There are a number of settings which are specific
to the holiday schedule override influence and these are illustrated in Figure 6
Figure 6: Holiday schedule influence
th
16 PAGE 46 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Holiday schedule influence: This setting simply defines whether the linked holiday schedule will have
any influence, or override (Yes) on the time schedule or not (No)
Holiday schedule action: If the linked holiday schedule does have influence on the time schedule,
then is the override action to take place throughout the whole week (Always) or is the override action
restricted to a preset period in the week (Period)
Weekly period: If the holiday schedule override is restricted to a period during the week, then what
time (from / to) is it active and does that also include weekends (Active on weekends) or not (Inactive
on weekends)
Optimiser selection:
A time schedule application may optionally be configured to operate as either an adaptive optimiser,
using outside and controlled space air temperature, or non-adaptive optimiser, using only the outside
air temperature. The time schedule application can thereafter be regarded and used by other HVAC
applications as an optimiser schedule. The functionality of adaptive and non-adaptive optimisation,
applicable to the time schedule, is described elsewhere in this document. The default start condition of
a time schedule application is ‘None’, without optimisation
Setpoint (numeric):
A time schedule application normally by default operates with a boolean On / Off output. However the
time schedule may optionally be configured to provide a numeric setpoint during its ‘On’ condition. The
‘On’ condition setpoint value is adjusted from the period adjustment dialogue and the ‘Off’ condition
setpoint value is adjusted via the settings button and this is illustrated in Figure 7
Figure 7: Setpoint (numeric)
th
16 PAGE 47 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Setpoint (off / low / high):

A time schedule application normally by default operates with a boolean On / Off output. However the
time schedule may optionally be configured to provide an off / low / high setpoint during its ‘On’
condition. The ‘On’ condition setpoint value is adjusted from the period adjustment dialogue and the
‘Off’ condition setpoint value is adjusted via the settings button and this is illustrated in Figure 8
Figure 8: Setpoint (low/high)
Temporary disable:
For some HVAC applications such as for example a school premises, it is sometimes necessary to
temporarily disable the time schedule when for example the school is unusually closed for a short
holiday and this could occur for up to 3 days. A ‘temporary disable’ feature is available in the time
schedule settings which allows for the schedule to be disabled for off (none) one, two or three days and
this is illustrated in Figure 9
Figure 9: Temporary disable
th
16 PAGE 48 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
The outside temperature application
Overview
HVAC applications such as those that control air and heating systems require interlock signals to change
their mode of operation during conditions of low or high outside air temperature. Operation during these
conditions is often described as ‘frost protection’ and ‘summer/winter mode’. The outside temperature
application provides three interlock signals which are based upon the outside air temperature and time.
The outside temperature application can be found in the hvacAppsGeneral module and up to four may be
configured in a station. It is also one of a number of applications that are part of the GeneralApp which is a
super application and is part of the default station and automatically installed in every Vykon HVAC station
database. Figure 1 summarises the outside temperature application:
Time Frost limit

Outside
Summer condition HVAC
Outside air temperature temperature
applications
application Summer stop
Figure 1: The outside temperature application
Control strategy
Up to four outside temperature applications may be created and each one has the following controls and
configuration options which are illustrated in Figure 2:
Figure 2: Outside temperature configuration and options
Name:
Each outside temperature application must have a unique name allocated to it. This is used to identify
it when the application is linked to other applications. Note that the name is automatically given to the
application and is the same name as the outside air temperature sensor to which it is linked
th
16 PAGE 49 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Independence:
Up to four outside temperature applications (‘outside temperature 1, 2, 3 and 4’) may be created.
However they are independent of each other and can be individually deleted when not required without
affecting the other outside temperature applications. This is illustrated by applications 1 and 4
Logging:
The logging history record can be viewed as illustrated in Figure 3
Figure 3: Outside temperature logging
The Vykon HVAC outside temperature application also contains three discrete condition strategies and
provides these as individually selectable and independent interlock signals for use by HVAC applications.
The three conditions are described as follows and Figure 4 summarises the operation of all three:
Frost limit:
To indicate a condition of low outside air temperature, a ‘Frost limit’ condition interlock signal is
generated. This signal is independent of real date and time and will switch to an on condition if the
outside air temperature falls below a preset value. The condition is protected against instability which
can be caused by small fluctuations in outside temperature by virtue of an adjustable time based
hysteresis control. This ensures that the measured outside air temperature has to change by a
significant amount and be stable over a time period before a switch to the frost limit condition is made.
The default settings of frost limit on and off are 5ºC and 6ºC respectively. Typical use of this interlock is
the starting of circulation pumps and the enabling of heating systems
th
16 PAGE 50 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
late spring day early summer day mid summer day late summer day ‘end time
summer
‘start time
stop disable’
summer
9 16 9 16 9 16 9 16 .
stop disable’
. ºC
condition’
‘summer
‘outside temp. 21 On
disable summer
stop’ 18 Off
17
air temp.
Outside
limit’
‘frost
6 Off
5 On
On
Frost limit
Off
Summer On
condition Off
Summer On
stop Off
‘summer stop
enable delay’
Figure 4: Outside air temperature condition strategy
Summer condition:
To indicate a condition of high outside air temperature such as that experienced during the early to late
summer seasonal period, a ‘Summer condition’ interlock signal is generated. This signal is
independent of real date and time and will switch to an on condition if the outside air temperature rises
above a preset value. The condition is protected against instability which can be caused by small
fluctuations in outside temperature by virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control. This
ensures that the measured outside air temperature has to change by a significant amount and be
stable over a time period before a switch to the summer condition is made. The default settings of
summer condition on and off are 21ºC and 18ºC respectively. Typical use of this interlock is the
disablement of heat demand signals from room radiator control systems.
Summer stop:
To indicate that a condition of an extended duration of high outside air temperature exists such as that
experienced during the mid-summer seasonal period, a ‘Summer stop’ condition interlock signal is
generated. This signal is different from the other two in that its output is adaptive and based on what
th
16 PAGE 51 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
outside air temperature conditions were experienced on the previous day. Once it is set on, the
summer stop condition can only be reset off when the outside air temperature falls below a preset value
during the day between mid-morning and mid-afternoon. A typical use of this interlock is within an
energy saving strategy to prevent the unnecessary generation of heat to satisfy room radiator system
demand during the early morning and late afternoon. This would be a waste of energy because from
the experience of the previous day the likely rise in outside air temperature would then cause an
increased demand from the cooling systems. The summer stop condition can only asserted after the
summer condition has been on for an uninterrupted period (the default is 2 hours). The summer stop
condition is only reset when the outside air temperature falls below a preset value (the default is 17ºC)
during a time period (the default is a 7 hour period starting at 9:00)
th
16 PAGE 52 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
The average outside temperature application
Overview
There are many HVAC control strategies that require an outside air temperature value. The outside air
temperature value can simply be derived from a single outside air sensor positioned on an exterior location
of the building. The use of multiple outside air sensors, however, sited at various locations on a building
can help to provide a more sophisticated control strategy. The average outside temperature application
provides highest value, lowest value, average value, rolling average value and summer/winter mode signals
for other Vykon HVAC applications. The average outside temperature application can be found in the
hvacAppsGeneral module and up to two may be configured in a station. It is also one of a number of
and automatically installed in every Vykon HVAC station database. Figure 1 summarises the average
outside temperature application…
Time Highest
Lowest
Average outside HVAC
Outside air temperatures
Average
temperature applications
application Rolling average
Summer/Winter
Figure 1: The average outside air temperature application
Strategy
The Vykon HVAC average outside temperature application contains five discrete strategies and provides
these as individually selectable and independent signals for use by other Vykon HVAC applications. With
the exception of the summer / winter mode signal all the other signals are of the ‘outside air temperature’
object type and they automatically inherit the default logging and alarm settings of that type. It means
therefore that any Vykon HVAC application can use these signals as an alternative to an outside air
temperature sensor. The application provides for up to four independent outside air temperature sensors to
be configured and from these and with reference to real time, the application derives its five outputs. This
is all described as follows with reference to the diagram in Figure 2.
Highest and Lowest value:

Both the highest and lowest are simply two outputs which give the current highest and lowest values of
any of the configured input sensors. In order that each output value is available to other applications,
the ‘Enable…highest value, lowest value’ configuration must be set to ‘Yes’
th
16 PAGE 53 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
First
Weight
Outside air temperatures
No
Second Enable highest value Highest
Weight
Enable lowest value Lowest
Math
Third Enable average value Average
Weight
Yes
Continuous
Fourth
Weight Periodic
Period
start Enable rolling
average
No
Period
duration
External signals
Rolling
average
Math
Sample
interval
Sample
time On rolling
average
On average
Enable summer
On first /winter mode
On second S/W
On third Mode Summer
On fourth /Winter
No
Time Calendar Yes
Enable summer
No mode on calendar
Figure 2 Average outside temperature strategy
Average value:
Average is simply calculated as an instantaneous mean value of all the configured input sensors. In
order that the output value is available to other applications, the ‘Enable average value’ configuration
must be set to ‘Yes’
The average calculation can also be biased by adding a weight to one, two or any of the input values.
This provides a method of biasing the output value towards or away from one or more of the sensors.
The weight is added by means of the right mouse click on the setting sensor value as illustrated in
Figure 3
Figure 3: Weight
th
16 PAGE 54 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
To add weight to a particular sensor, simply enter any number between 1 and 10. By default, all four
sensors are at a weight of 1. Once added, the average output value (AV) will be calculated as follows:
(a x wa) + (b x wb) + (c x wc) + (d x wd) where:

AV = a, b, c & d are the sensor values
( wa + wb + wc + wd ) wa, wb, wc & wd are the weights
For example the following weighted outside air temperature sensors would give this output:
(20 x 2) + (22 x 1) + (25 x 4) + (21 x 3)
= 22.5
( 2 + 1+ 4 + 3 )
Rolling average value:

The rolling average value is calculated using the ‘average’ value which has already been described.
There are two variations of calculation of this rolling average value, Continuous and Periodic:
Continuous: Is where the rolling average value is a totalisation of samples taken at intervals over a
sample time divided by the number of samples taken. The sample time rolls along with real time so
that the rolling average value is always calculated from the most recent samples as can be seen in the
illustration in Figure 4
sample time
sample interval
sample 0’0 0’15 0’30 0’45 1’0 1’15 1’30 1’45 2’0 2’15 2’30
average 8 9 10 9 11 11 12 13 12 14 14
value
rolling 8 8.5 9 9 9.75 10.25 10.75 11.75 12 12.75 13.25

average
value
(8+9+10+9) / 4 = (9+10+9+11) / 4 = 9.75 (10+9+11+11) / 4 = 10.25
Figure 4: Continuous
Periodic: Is where the rolling average value is only calculated during a defined period of the day. This
means that, for example, the rolling average value of outside air temperature could be calculated using
only day time temperature values. This calculation ‘window’ is simply defined by ‘Period start’ and
‘Period duration’ settings. The default settings of ‘Period start’ and ‘Period duration’ are 09:00 and 8
hrs respectively. In order that the ‘rolling average’ output value is available to other applications, the
‘Enable rolling average’ configuration must be set to either ‘Continuous’ or ‘Periodic’.
th
16 PAGE 55 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Summer / winter mode:

To indicate whether applications need to operate in summer or winter mode, a summer/winter mode
signal can be generated by this application. The source outside air temperature value for this mode
can be chosen as being directly from one of the sensor values or from the average value or from the
rolling average value previously described. There are two variations of calculation of this
summer/winter mode value; with calendar and without calendar. Typical use of summer/winter
mode is for applications that require a switch-over signal such as can be found on fan coil units where
the pipe-work is delivered with hot water during the winter and chilled water during the summer:
Without calendar: This signal is independent of real date and time and will switch to summer mode if
the outside air temperature rises above a preset value. Likewise it will switch to winter mode if it falls
below a preset value. The modes are protected against instability which can be caused by small
fluctuations in outside temperature by virtue of some adjustable time based hysteresis controls. These
ensure that the measured outside air temperature has to change by a significant amount and be stable
over a time period before a mode switch-over is made. The default settings of summer mode on and
off are 19ºC and 17ºC respectively. The default settings of winter mode on and off are 13ºC and 15ºC
respectively. Note that the mode will revert to a ‘Neutral’ mode if there is a window between summer
mode and winter mode settings.
With calendar: Optionally, the summer mode can be protected against transitions into winter mode
which can be caused by sudden cold summer temperatures by the ‘Enable summer mode on calendar’
switch. By using this, summer mode will be determined only by the period that is set in the calendar for
summer time. This will override any temperature settings that may have been set for summer and
winter mode switching.
Figure 6: With calendar
In order that the ‘summer/winter mode is available to other applications, the ‘Enable’ configuration must
be set to choose a temperature sensor or value source (On first, On second… etc)
History:
The history of the output of the average outside air temperature application is accessed by left clicking
in the status buttons
Figure 5: View history
th
16 PAGE 56 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
The night purge application
Overview
“Night purge” or “night cooling” is applied to buildings to assist in offsetting the daytime heat gains that build
up thus minimising the requirement for air conditioning. Night purge is achieved by ventilating the space
using passive or mechanical ventilation or a combination of both. The Vykon HVAC air handling
applications operate fresh air and extract air dampers in association with the mechanical ventilation fans at
night time thus permitting the cool night air to flow through the building. The night purge application can be
found in the hvacAppsGeneral module. It is also one of a number of applications that are part of the
GeneralApp which is a super application and is part of the default station and automatically installed in
every Vykon HVAC station database. Figure 1 summarises the night purge application:
Time

Night purge
on / off HVAC
application
applications
Figure 1: The night purge application
Control strategy
There are two types of Vykon HVAC ‘Night purge’ application available; ‘Absolute night purge’ and ‘Night
purge’ and their selection is illustrated in Figure 2. Up to 4 of each application may be configured.
Figure 2: Night purge and Absolute night purge configuration
Both types base their application control strategy upon the value of space air temperature and if this is
above a preset value, then the night purge application switches to an on state and night purge is enabled,
providing that certain interlock signals allow. The difference between the two types of night purge
application is the determination of when night purge may be active. The ‘Absolute night purge’ application
is enabled between preset times of the week and the ‘Night purge’ application is enabled during a preset
period (maximum pre-start) before occupancy of the building, which is dependent upon the state of a linked
time schedule. Otherwise, they both have similar operational behaviours:
th
16 PAGE 57 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Night purge:
The night purge application control strategy is based upon the value of space air temperature during a
preset period (maximum pre-start) before occupancy of the building. If this is above a predetermined
maximum value then the night purge application switches to an on state and night purge is enabled.
Figure 2 illustrates the strategy.
Maximum pre-start Occupancy

ºC
Space air 23
temperature
22
21
On
Night purge
Off
2 stage on
Figure 2: Night purge control strategy (Outside air temp.15ºC)
The night purge application has a number of control interlocks as follows:
Time schedule: Night purge can only be active when the linked time schedule is in a off condition.
This night purge type uses one of the time schedule properties (time to next switch) to determine the
start of occupancy and therefore adjust its start time accordingly depending upon the preset values for
maximum pre-start and minimum run time
Difference (Space temp. – Outside temp.): To prevent night purge occurring when the outside air
temperature is above or near the space temperature a ‘difference (Space temp. – Outside temp.)’
parameter is provided. The default setting of 3ºC for example, ensures that if the space temperature is
22°C then the outside air temperature must be lower than 19ºC before this interlock is disabled
Minimum outside temperature: To prevent the ingress of air that is too cold a ‘minimum outside
temperature’ parameter is provided. The default setting of this is 10ºC
Space temperature: The application is protected against instability which can be caused by small
fluctuations in outside temperature by virtue of two hysteresis settings – ‘space temperature night purge
th
16 PAGE 58 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
on’ and ‘space temperature night purge off’ The default settings of these are 23ºC and 21ºC
respectively
2 stage night purge: If following a night purge and within the same pre-start period the space
temperature rises, then the temperature setting that a second night purge condition is enabled can be
set to a lower value than that of the first condition. This is defined in the night purge application as the
‘2 stage night purge deviation’ and its default setting is -1ºC lower than the ‘space temperature night
purge on’ setting
Minimum run time: The minimum length of time that the night purge application will be active for may
be set. Its default is 5 minutes
History:
The history of the output of the outside and space sensors is accessed by left clicking in the status
buttons
th
16 PAGE 59 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Absolute night purge:

The behaviour of the absolute night purge application control strategy is similar to the ‘night purge’
application described earlier and whilst it still depends upon the value of space air temperature being
above a predetermined maximum value, it is enabled by a weekly ‘absolute’ time and day reference.
The settings are illustrated in Figure 4.
Figure 4: Absolute night purge settings
The absolute night purge application has a number of control interlocks as follows:
Day Begin-End: Night purge can only be active between the preset ‘Begin’ and ‘End’ times on the
Weekdays, Saturday or Sunday settings
Start delay after time schedule: If a time schedule is linked then the absolute night purge application
will be ‘held off’ until after the end of the ‘start delay after time schedule’ has expired which is triggered
when the time schedule has switched to an off condition
DT (Space – Outside): To prevent night purge occurring when the outside air temperature is above or
near the space temperature a ‘DT (Space – Outside)’ temperature parameter is provided. The default
setting of 3ºC for example, ensures that if the space temperature is 22°C then the outside air
temperature must be lower than 19ºC before this interlock is disabled
st nd
1 / 2 stage space temp: The space temperature conditions necessary to determine if the absolute
st st
night purge application is enabled is set up in the ‘1 stage space temp’ setting. If, following the 1
night purge and within the same (Begin / End) period the space temperature rises, then the
temperature setting that a second night purge condition is enabled can be set to a lower value than that
nd
of the first stage. This is defined as the ‘2 stage space temp’ setting and its default setting is -2ºC
st
lower than the ‘1 stage space temp’ setting
Minimum run time: The minimum length of time that the night purge application will be active for may
be set. Its default is 10 minutes
th
16 PAGE 60 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
History:
The history of the output of the outside and space sensors is accessed by left clicking in the status
buttons
th
16 PAGE 61 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
The fire override application
Overview
The fire override application controls the way that a signal from the fire alarm system and the state of the
fireman’s override switch affect the behaviour of HVAC applications. Primarily, the affect on HVAC control
is the action that fire alarm signals have on the behaviour of the air system supply and extract fans although
it can have an effect on other applications. The fire override application can be found in the
hvacAppsGeneral module. It is also one of a number of applications that are part of the GeneralApp which
is a super application and is part of the default station and automatically installed in every Vykon HVAC
station database. Figure 1 summarises the fire override application:
Fire alarm contact

Fire alarm
Fireman’s override
Fire override Supply fan on

Supply air on Supply fan off
HVAC
Supply air auto application applications
switch
Supply air off Extract fan on

Extract air on Extract fan off
Extract air auto
Extract air off
Figure 1: The fire override application
Control strategy
The Vykon HVAC ‘Fire override’ application is configured on the ‘Miscellaneous’ tab of the ‘General’
application and is illustrated in Figure 2.
Figure 2: Fire override application configuration
The ‘name’ of the fire override application is automatically derived from the point ‘description’ of the linked
digital input fire alarm contact.
th
16 PAGE 62 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Output from the fire override application to other HVAC applications is via five boolean signals and their
operation is illustrated in Figure 3. The ‘fire control’ logic will override the normal control signals of the
connected applications and ensure that any relevant mechanical plant, such as fans and dampers, are
correctly set in the event of a fire alarm condition.
SF and EF signals are

active only while a fire
alarm condition exists
true
Fire alarm
false
SF and EF signals are
true
Supply fan on independent of each
false other
true
Supply fan off
. false SF and EF on and off
true signals are never true
Extract fan on at the same time
. false
true
Extract fan off
. false
Time
Figure 3: Fire override application output signals
The fire alarm application is fully flexible in that if either the fire alarm contact or the fireman’s override
switch is not provided in the installation then the application can still be configured to maintain override
functionality. In addition this mode of operation also allows the fireman’s switch to be used in a test fire
alarm situation without a ‘real’ fire alarm signal being raised. The control strategy can be configured in one
of three ways:
Fire alarm contact only:

The ‘Fire alarm contact’ is linked to a digital input which is providing the fire alarm contact signal. Upon
receipt of the fire alarm contact signal, the ‘Control mode’ of the fire override application can be
configured to assert either:
both supply air fans and extract fans on, or
supply air fans on and extract fans off, or
supply air fans off and extract fans on, or
both supply air fans and extract fans off
Fireman’s override switch only:

The ‘FOS supply air auto’ / on / off’ and ‘FOS extract air auto’ / on / off’ signals only are linked to
respective digital inputs from each of the Fireman’s Override Switch (FOS) positions. When the FOS is
switched to a position by the Fireman then the fire override application will be set accordingly.
Both fire alarm contact and fireman’s override switch:

There are two modes of operation possible if both sets of inputs are linked to the fire alarm contact and
the FOS and it is determined by the setting of the ‘Firemans override’ configuration:
Firemans switch depends upon fire contact: Upon receipt of the fire alarm contact signal, the fire
override application will be set by the position of the fireman’s override switch unless that switch is in a
th
16 PAGE 63 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
‘supply air auto’ or ‘extract air auto’ position, in which case the fire override application will assume the
preset configured ‘Control mode’ condition of either:
both supply air fans and extract fans on, or

supply air fans on and extract fans off, or
supply air fans off and extract fans on, or
both supply air fans and extract fans off
Firemans switch independent of fire contact: If when the FOS is switched away from either its
‘supply air auto’ or ‘extract air auto’ positions the condition of the fire override application will be set
directly by the position of the FOS switch. Note that this configuration effectively provides a fireman’s
test facility because the fire override application is set without the fire alarm contact needing to be
asserted.
Finally, a manual override control is available through the settings tab as illustrated in Figure 4:
Figure 4: Manual override
th
16 PAGE 64 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
The trace heating application
Overview
“Trace heating” is the application of heat to the surfaces of pipelines, tanks, vessels and similar items,
whether continuously or intermittently, to raise and/or regulate the temperature around and inside those
items. The most common use of the trace heating application is the protection from freeze damage to
water pipes.
The trace heating application can be found in the hvacAppsGeneral module. It is also one of a number of
and automatically installed in every Vykon HVAC station database. It provides electrical trace heating
on / off control utilising outside temperature with adjustable time based hysteresis. Figure 1 summarises
the trace heating application:
Trace heating on / off Trace heating

application system
Figure 1: The trace heating application
Control strategy
The Vykon HVAC ‘Trace heating’ application is configured on the ‘Miscellaneous’ tab of the ‘General’
application and is illustrated in Figure 2.
Figure 2: Trace heating application configuration and settings
The ‘name’ of the trace heating application is automatically derived from the point ‘description’ of the linked
digital output trace heating system.
th
16 PAGE 65 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
applications
Output from the trace heating application to the trace heating system (usually an electrical heating circuit) is
an ‘off’ condition unless the outside temperature is below the settings parameters in which case an ‘on’
condition is given. The application is protected against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations
in outside temperature by virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control. This ensures that the
measured outside air temperature has to change by a significant amount and be stable over a time period
before a switch to the output condition is made.
Finally, a manual override control is available through the settings tab as illustrated in Figure 3:
Figure 3: Manual override
th
16 PAGE 66 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
The Max 10 boilers TRIDIUM
application
The Max 10 boilers application
Overview
The Max 10 boilers application comprises monitoring and control facilities for a boiler system comprising up
to 10 packaged boiler units. The application contains options for temperature and sequence control as well
as mechanical options such as on/off or modulating boilers, individual boiler pumps with or without cut off
valves and a range of shunt pump arrangements. Applications which are utilising a combined boiler-
calorifier packaged unit are also accommodated in the Max 10 boilers application. The Max 10 boilers
application can be found in the hvacAppsHeatingPlant module. Figure 1 shows an example of a system
with 3 modulating boilers, individual boiler pumps and cut off valves and twin primary shunt pumps with cut
off valves.
Figure 1: A 3-boiler system
Up to 10 boilers may be utilised to provide hot water to the heat delivery systems which can include
secondary heating circuits using radiators, radiant panels and domestic hot water (DHW) circuits.
A transport system comprising options for shunt pumps (primary pump) and cut off valve arrangements can
be included to maintain a constant water flow rate around the primary circuit and through the boilers. The
shunt pump system, which includes control strategy options for sequencing, is shown positioned in the
return pipe work to the boilers.
The controls for the heat generation plant include a combination of the boilers’ own packaged controls
along with controls from this boiler application which are ‘overlaid’ to provide heat demand control signals,
to vary boiler flow temperature together with monitoring capabilities. The application includes strategies for
boiler staging and sequencing. Interlocks are provided by the Max 10 boiler application to prevent damage
to the boiler or associated hydraulic circuits.
th
16 PAGE 67 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Figure 2 shows the overall control strategy for the Max 10 boilers application. The individual control
strategy elements are described elsewhere in this document.
From heat delivery systems
System enablers
and interlocks
To heat delivery systems

∆T
Desired supply Boiler heat Transport

temperature and generation system
heat demand plant
strategy
Boiler Boiler Pump

sequence staging sequence
strategy strategy strategy
Figure 2: Max 10 Boilers - overall control strategy
th
16 PAGE 68 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Boiler heat generation plant

The Vykon HVAC boiler heat generation plant can support up to ten boilers and each system may comprise
a mixture of the following boiler types…
Maintained boilers: These are simple on/off enable types

Modulating boilers: These have their boiler flow temperature defined by a modulating input signal,
which also enables the boiler providing the signal is above a minimum level. A separate enable signal
can also be provided
Combination boilers with internal DHW control: These are boilers which also generate water on
demand for domestic hot water (DHW). They have internal control circuits which recognise demand
requirement, have internal demand temperature control and associated mechanical pipe work and
control valve to provide DHW and primary hot water
Combination boilers without internal DHW control: These are boilers which also generate water on
demand for DHW but their demand temperature, boiler enable and control valve arrangements are
externally provided by Vykon HVAC
High efficiency boilers: These boilers are usually high priority in a sequence control
Figure 1 shows some Vykon HVAC graphic examples of these boiler types in use…
Maintained Modulating Combination Combination

on/off and/or with internal without internal
on/off DHW controls DHW controls
Figure 1: Supported boiler types in Vykon HVAC
Combination boilers
There are various types of combination boiler, or combi boiler, and all are supported by Vykon HVAC.
Types of combination boiler are…
Combi-instantaneous: The boiler directly heats incoming cold water to supply DHW
Combi-storage: A variant on instantaneous, this boiler is designed to give a better DHW performance
by maintaining a storage of DHW. The stored water provides an improved initial DHW delivery and
once this is used then the boiler operates as an instantaneous type
Combined Primary Storage Unit (CPSU): This type incorporates a very large store of water (usually
more than 80 litres) which creates a high DHW flow rate
th
16 PAGE 69 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
System enablers, interlocks and alarms

A number of enablers, interlocks and alarms are available in this boiler application which are aimed at
providing warnings of problems and automatic protection of mechanical plant which can be caused by
adverse environmental and mechanical conditions. The boiler application has nine states which are
displayed on the graphic and these are summarised in Figure 1:
The boiler system is available for demand but is currently off because
there are no overriding demand signals active
Low water alarm The low water level switch is reporting low water level
Low pressure alarm The pressure switch is reporting low pressure
Pressure alert The pressure switch is reporting low pressure (1st warning level)
Pressure alarm The pressure sensor is reporting low pressure (2nd warning level)
System disabled One or more of the 4 alarm signals is reporting an alarm condition
Primary pump alarm One of the primary pumps is in an alarm condition
Frost protection The outside temperature application has identified a frost limit condition
and the boiler plant has been enabled on to protect the mechanical plant
Heat demand One or more of the heat delivery systems has initiated a heat demand
from the boiler plant
Figure 1: Boiler system states
Frost limit protection strategy

The frost limit condition is established from the outside temperature application which is one of a number of
general applications described elsewhere in this document. If selected the outside air application will
protect the boiler system against damage that can occur in low temperature conditions. The boiler system
is enabled on and the boilers set to a minimum demand level to prevent damage while the frost limit
condition exists.
This override condition however only becomes active providing that there are no other inhibiting interlocks
in place such as a low pressure or primary pump alarm and providing that the system is not already
enabled on with demand through another demand override.
Multiple boiler failure alarm

By default, the default alarm class of each boiler is ‘UrgentNoAck’. However if a condition occurs where
multiple boilers have simultaneously failed and are therefore in alarm, an option is available to generate an
‘UrgentNoAck alarm’ from this condition. (To maintain some hierarchy of alarms it is recommended that
the individual boiler alarms should be reclassified to NonUrgent). The quantity of boilers to be
simultaneously in alarm is set by the ‘Multiple boiler alarm threshold setting.
th
16 PAGE 70 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
System pressure and external alarm strategy

System pressure and external alarms can provide a selection of boiler control interlocks and they are all
available via a single ‘System enable’ strategy. These are summarised in Figure 2.
Figure 2: System enable
There are several system enablers/interlocks which could be configured within this overall strategy and
these are as follows:
Pressure switch
Pressure sensor
Low water level switch
Up to 4 alarm signals
Control operation of these interlocks is straightforward in that if either the pressure switch, low water level
switch or any of the alarms are in an active state then the whole boiler system will be disabled and all
controlled devices switched to an off condition. In addition a signal is sent to all connected heat distribution
applications indicating the current state of the boiler system and this is used by those systems to switch
their controlled devices to an off condition.
If the pressure switch is used then a ‘low pressure alarm’ is given when active. This pressure alarm
condition as well as raising an alarm and indicating in the graphic will also cause the whole boiler system to
be disabled and all controlled devices will be switched to an off condition.
If the pressure sensor is used then a two level warning of ‘pressure alert’ (pre-alarm) and ‘pressure alarm’
(Main alarm) is given when active. The pressure alert condition will raise an alarm and indicate the alert
state in the graphic but no other plant control action is taken. The pressure alarm condition as well as
raising an alarm and indicating in the graphic will also cause the whole boiler system to be disabled and all
controlled devices will be switched to an off condition.
The pressure alert condition is protected against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in
pressure by virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control which is more fully described in “Common
functions”. This ensures that the pressure has to change by a significant amount and be stable over a time
period before the pressure alert condition is asserted. The default settings of the pressure alert condition
on and off are 1.0 Bar/30s and 1.5 Bar/0s respectively.
The pressure alarm condition is similarly protected against instability which can be caused by small
fluctuations in pressure by virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control. The default settings of the
pressure alarm condition on and off are 0.6 Bar/5s and 0.8 Bar/0s respectively.
th
16 PAGE 71 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Modulating boiler alarm

Finally, and applying only to those modulating boilers that also have a separate digital ‘boiler enable’ and
internal ‘boiler alarm’ signals, it may be necessary to maintain the ‘enable’ signal even though the internal
‘boiler alarm’ has been activated. The alternate action of removing the ‘enable’ when the boiler alarm has
been activated can, on some boilers, cause the ‘alarm’ condition to be deactivated thereby creating
unstable operation due to oscillating control signals. Figure 3 shows this modulating boiler alarm option.
Figure 3: Modulating boiler alarm
th
16 PAGE 72 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Desired supply temperature and heat demand control strategy

The desired supply temperature and heat demand control strategy may operate in one of two ways
depending on the installation requirement. The more usual mode of operation is where only the boiler
system is used to provide heat generation for connected heat distribution applications such as radiators or
radiant panels. Alternatively the boiler system could be generating heat in association with other heat
generation sources to provide a combined heat source which may offer a more economic solution if the
alternative source is a heat pump.
There are also alternative strategies for domestic hot water (DHW) generation and these will be discussed
later. Consider, at the moment, that DHW is one of a number of Vykon HVAC connected heat distribution
applications. Figure 1 shows the two modes and the desired temperature control strategy differs depending
upon which of these is required.
heat distribution applications
Desired temperature from
TD1
DBT
TDmax
TD8
Direct on desired common flow temperature

heat distribution applications
Desired temperature from
pv
TD1 DBT Heat pump or
sp other heat
TDmax
generation
TD8 sources
Via PID calculated flow temperature
Figure 1: Desired supply temperature and heat demand control strategy – two modes of operation
Direct on desired common flow temperature

Applied only in those applications which utilise boilers with modulating boiler control, the desired boiler
temperature (DBT) value for the boilers is, in this mode, directly derived from the maximum value (TDmax)
of all the desired demand temperatures of the connected heat distribution applications. The DBT signal
which varies between 0 and 100% and directly represents a 0°C to 100 °C demand flow temperature is
provided as an analogue control signal to each of the modulating boilers.
Via PID calculated flow temperature

Again, applicable only to boilers with modulating boiler control, the control setpoint for the desired boiler
temperature (DBT) value control loop is, in this mode, derived from the maximum value (TDmax) of all the
desired demand temperatures of the connected heat distribution applications. The flow temperature of the
th
16 PAGE 73 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
final distribution circuit is used as the measured process variable (pv) such that if other sources of heat
generation, in particular those which operate at a more efficient or lower energy cost, do provide the
required heat demand then demand from the boiler system will be reduced accordingly. The DBT signal
which varies between 0 and 100% and directly represents a 0°C to 100 °C demand flow temperature is
provided as an analogue control signal to each of the modulating boilers.
Domestic hot water

The boiler heat generation plant also supports the use of combination boilers which may also generate
water on demand for domestic hot water (DHW). There are two variants of these boilers; those which have
internal control circuits which recognise demand requirement, have internal demand temperature control
and associated mechanical pipe work and control valve to provide DHW and primary hot water and those
which don’t but relies on demand and control being externally provided.
Selection of either combination boiler type has an effect on the way that the maximum value (TDmax) of all
the desired demand temperatures of the connected heat distribution applications is calculated. If the
combination boiler does not have its own internal controls then the DHW demand signal from the Vykon
HVAC DHW delivery system is used to directly control the desired boiler temperature (DBT) value and
control the on/off diverting valve for either DHW or normal primary flow. In addition the boiler becomes
unavailable for sequence control. Figure 2 shows this arrangement.
Figure 2: Combination boiler without its own DHW controls
th
16 PAGE 74 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Figure 3 however shows the arrangement for those boilers which do have their own internal DHW controls
and would be supplying their own DHW circuits which are outside of the Vykon HVAC delivery system. It is
important to note that these boilers are regarded as taking a full part of the boiler system for all other
demand requirements and are back under sequence control. Any DHW demand is therefore assumed to
be derived from other Vykon HVAC DHW delivery circuits and their demand is included as part of the
calculation of maximum value (TDmax) for the whole boiler system.
Figure 3: Combination boiler with its own DHW controls
th
16 PAGE 75 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Delta T, boiler staging and sequence control strategy

This strategy applies in all applications of boilers including on/off and modulating types. Control of the
boiler stages is via the primary flow temperature. A Delta T (∆T) value, which is the difference between the
desired boiler temperature (DBT) and the measured primary flow temperature, supplies a boiler staging
strategy to determine the number of boiler stages required for the demand condition. Finally a boiler
rotation sequence strategy defines which actual boiler load devices are enabled to make up the required
number of stages.
DBT
- ∆T
+
DBT
B1 B2 B10
Enable
Sequence
Stage
Periodic
Hours run
Fault
Manual
Figure 1: Delta T, Staging and Sequence control strategy
Delta T strategy
The calculated or desired boiler temperature (DBT) signal is provided by the ‘desired
supply temperature and heat demand control strategy’ and represents the required
primary flow temperature. This value is compared with the actual primary flow
temperature and gives a ∆T value.
Note that in the example shown in Figure 2; ∆T = -15.3 °C (40 °C – 55.3 °C) Figure 2
Boiler staging strategy

Each boiler stage is enabled in proportion to the magnitude of the ∆T value. Figure 3 shows the default
enable set points for each of the 10 possible boiler stages. Stage 1 is enabled when ∆T reaches a default
value of -3 °C. Stage 2 is enabled when ∆T reaches a default value of -6 °C. The stages continue to be
incrementally enabled until stage 10 is enabled when ∆T reaches a default value of -30 °C. As the
magnitude of ∆T reduces, each stage is enabled off in reverse sequence order.
The boiler stage enable set points incorporate a default dead band of 6 °C between enabling on and off.
The enable set points are further protected against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in
temperature by virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control which is more fully described in
“Common functions”. This timer can also be used to instigate a delay before the enabling on or off of each
th
16 PAGE 76 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
stage. The default values of these timers are zero seconds except for stages 1 to 10 which have a delay to
enable of 1 minute.
Stage 10
Stage 9
Stage 8
Stage 7
Stage 6
Stages OFF
Stages ON
Stage 5
Stage 4
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage 1
∆T °C -33 -30 -27 -24 -21 -18 -15 -11 -9 -6 -3 0 +3 +6 ∆T °C
Figure 3: Default staging strategy
Boiler sequencing strategy

A boiler rotation or sequencing strategy is employed to equalise the operating life of the boilers or burners.
Output from the staging strategy provides the boiler sequencer with a numeric value ranging from zero to
ten to indicate the quantity of boiler stages that are required to be enabled.
The sequencing strategy then rotates a lead-lag sequence after the lead boiler has operated for a defined
number of hours (the default is 100 hours). Optionally the sequence can be rotated on the anniversary of a
regular period that can be either every day or on one selected day during each week. The exact time of day
that lead-lag rotation occurs may also be adjusted. The example shown in Figure 4 is of a four boiler
system which sequences every Monday at 14:00 hrs and currently boiler 4 is the lead boiler. On the next
anniversary, the sequence will rotate to be 1-3-4-0, followed afterwards by 3-4-1-0.
Next boiler number 1

Lead boiler number 4 Lag boiler number 3
Boiler 2 is unavailable
Figure 4: Boiler sequencing example
th
16 PAGE 77 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Boilers, however, may be either available, which is the normal condition, or unavailable and an example of
an unavailable boiler (boiler 2) in a system may be seen in Figure 4. A boiler may be unavailable for
sequence control for any of the following reasons…
It is in a fault condition
It has been manually overridden on or off
It is a boiler which also provides domestic hot water (DHW), for example a ‘combination boiler’, but
does not have its own internal DHW control (It must be out of sequence control because it may be
required at any time for DHW)
If either option of rotate on running hours or rotate on period is chosen, then should a boiler become
unavailable, the sequencer will immediately rotate on the occurrence of the unavailable condition.
A ‘rotate on fault only’ option is also available and the rotation sequence may at any time be manually
stepped.
Finally, the sequence may be configured to include a boiler which is always selected as the ‘lead boiler’ and
maintains this priority regardless to the sequence of the remaining boilers. It is considered to be outside of
sequence control. This concept of a ‘Fixed’ boiler is particularly suited to those applications which are
utilising a high efficiency boiler which should always be called first. Boiler 2 in the example shown in Figure
5 is a high efficiency boiler which is fixed as the lead boiler. Boiler 4 is unavailable.
Figure 5: Fixed boiler example
th
16 PAGE 78 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Transport system and pump sequence strategy

The Vykon HVAC boiler transport system has a number of primary and individual boiler pump options to
deliver heat to the delivery systems. The primary pumps are positioned in the return pipe work to the
boilers. Each boiler system may comprise a mixture of the following transport systems…
Individual boiler pumps with or without cut off valves

Shunt pump
Single primary pump
Twin primary pumps with or without cut off valves
Figure 1 shows some Vykon HVAC graphic examples of these transport systems…
Individual boiler pump and cut off valve arrangements

Primary and shunt pump
arrangements
Figure 1: Supported boiler transport systems in Vykon HVAC
General pump control strategy

When there is no heating demand and no pump overrun the boilers and all the circulation pumps are
disabled. In general and depending on what transport system options are selected, when there is a heating
demand then the strategy for boiler enable begins by enabling the primary pump cut off valve. After the
valve has opened then the duty primary or shunt pump is enabled followed by boiler cut off valves and
individual boiler pumps. It is only after these are running the boilers are enabled according to the delta T,
boiler staging and sequence control strategy.
Three other pump control strategies are available for selection. These are…
Pump overrun
Pump prerun
Pump exercise
A pump ‘overrun’ condition starts after an operating period during which hot water has been distributed
around the primary and heat delivery systems. The purpose of pump overrun is to dissipate the heat
contained in the water of these circuits and to cool the heat exchanger surfaces of the boilers to prevent
overheat damage. The individual boiler pump and cut off valve (if used) arrangement has an adjustable
pump overrun time setting and its default value is 5 minutes. The shunt pump overrun has a default value
of 10 minutes.
th
16 PAGE 79 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Where primary pumps are used there is an additional adjustable timer called ‘prerun’ to hold off subsequent
enabling of the boilers until water flow has been established. The default times for primary pump prerun
and overrun are 10 seconds and 10 minutes respectively.
‘Pump exercise’ is a general application and is described elsewhere in this document. It may be optionally
selected for use by the boiler system pumps to protect them from becoming unavailable because they have
seized due to corrosion and precipitate build up after long periods of inactivity.
Pump sequence strategy

When twin primary pumps, either with or without cut off valves, are used a pump duty standby or
sequencing strategy is employed to equalise the operating life of the pumps.
The sequencing strategy rotates a duty standby sequence after the lead pump has operated for a defined
that duty standby changeover occurs may also be adjusted. The example shown in Figure 2 is of a twin
primary pump system which sequences every Wednesday at 10:00 hrs and currently pump 1 is the lead or
duty pump. On the next anniversary, pump 2 will become the duty pump. During the changeover, when the
duty pump changes over, a period of overrun can also be configured. The default value is 5 seconds. This
is to ensure that there is no interruption of water flow at this changeover time.
Figure 2: Duty standby sequence strategy example
Either pump, however, may be either available, which is the normal condition, or unavailable. A pump may
be unavailable for sequence control for any of the following reasons…
It has been manually overridden off
If either option of rotate on running hours or rotate on period is chosen, then should a duty pump become
unavailable, the sequencer will immediately rotate to the standby pump. Should the original duty pump
become available during the period of which it should be the duty pump, then the sequencer will rotate and
re-establish it as duty.
A ‘sequence on fault only’ option is also available and the sequence may at any time be manually toggled.
th
16 PAGE 80 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
The radiator group TRIDIUM
application
The radiator group application
Overview
The radiator group application provides a heating delivery secondary circuit comprising pump, control valve,
monitoring devices and control strategies to maintain the environmental temperature of a space which is
heated with water filled radiators. The radiator group application offers valve arrangement options for
constant volume, variable temperature and constant temperature, variable volume circuits as well as control
using supply or space temperature. The radiator group application can be found in the
hvacAppsHeatDelivery module.
A constant volume, variable temperature (CV/VT) circuit is controlled using a three port ‘mixing’ valve with
the secondary pump fitted on the load side of the bypass circuit. This CV/VT circuit with a control mode
using the supply temperature is the arrangement shown in Figure 1.
A constant temperature, variable volume (CT/VV) circuit with variable volume control controlling the flow
rate by a two port valve to restrict flow is shown in Figure 2. This CT/VV circuit has a control mode using
the space temperature.
Figure 1: CV/VT controlled on supply temperature Figure 2: CT/VV controlled on space temperature
The following mechanical plant options are available in the radiator group application…
2-port or 3-port modulating control valve

0-10v (using 4AO_3DO module) or Tri-state (using 4DO or MULTI-IO modules) modulating valve
Maintained command (on/off) secondary pump
th
16 PAGE 81 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
The following control strategy options are available in the radiator group application…
Optimisation control (Internal or external, adaptive or non adaptive)

Time schedule and timed extension occupancy control
Desired space temperature selection (internal, external, external with offset)
Space temperature compensation by outside temperature
Preheat setpoint selection (fixed, heat curve or heat curve with offset)
Control by space or supply temperature
Boiler condensation control
Desired boiler temperature demand signal
Adjustment for delivery system pipe work losses
Night setback
Night purge
Frost limit, summer condition and summer stop control
Space temperature low limit control
Pump overrun
Pump exercise
Enable from boiler system
DHW demand priority
The overall strategy can be broken down into a number of discrete parts based on the various strategy
options that are available and Figure 3 shows these parts. The main control mode choice is whether the
radiator group is controlled on supply temperature or on space temperature.
The control strategy for the radiator group is described in the following chapters and for reasons of clarity is
structured as strategies which depend on the control mode and those which are common to both modes.
Control mode
dependent
strategies
Desired
boiler
temperature
Desired
temperature
Preheat Control
method valve
Common
strategies
Space
Occupancy Optimiser temperature Pump
time mode low limit
control
Figure 3: Radiator group overall control strategy
th
16 PAGE 82 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
The radiator group application may be in one of the following states…
Occupancy The radiator group is currently in occupancy state
Time extension The radiator group is in occupancy state because of a time extension
DHW Priority The domestic hot water system currently has demanded priority on heat
Off The radiator group is off
Low space temp. limit Low space limit protection has become active
System disabled System disabled by the heat plant generating system
Night mode Night setback is active
Figure 4: Radiator group states
th
16 PAGE 83 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Common strategies
Whilst the control strategies can be described by either control on supply or space temperature there are
some strategies which are common to both. Here they are …
Occupancy time: Occupancy time for this group is determined by reference to an external time
schedule. There is also an option of occupancy being extended from the normal schedule by means of
a time extension override
Optimiser mode strategy: The optimiser mode provides the user with various options on the selection
of the type and location of optimiser which will determine the start of the preheat period for this radiator
group
Space temperature low limit control: Space temperature low limit control is usually applied during
the heating season to protect the space and prevent its temperature dropping to a freezing level
General pump control strategy: When there is no heating demand and no pump overrun the
circulation pump is disabled. In general when there is a heating demand then the strategy for circuit
enable begins by enabling the pump and then controlling the valve
DHW demand priority: When the DHW circuit has a heat demand priority active the radiator group
application will switch the circulation pump to an off condition except where a 3 port valve is configured
then the pump will remain unaffected but the valve will be set to a closed position
Occupancy time
Occupancy time for this group is determined by reference to an external time schedule. There is also an
option of occupancy being extended from the normal schedule by means of a time extension override.
The external time schedule is one of a number of overrides which control the current state of the group and
thereby control its strategies. For those applications which require a common time schedule and common
time extension it is normal to allocate a time extension to the referenced time schedule. For applications
which require individual groups to be time controlled separately, such as tenanted zones, then each group
may require its own time extension override. This option is available to this group and is summarised in
Figure 1.
Time
External signals
schedule Occupancy Current state
Time extension
(maintained)
Figure 1: Occupancy time Common
th
16 PAGE 84 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Optimiser mode strategy

The optimiser mode provides the user with various options on the selection of the type and location of
optimiser which will determine the start of the preheat period for this radiator group. Figure 2 illustrates the
optimiser mode strategy. The output from the optimiser mode is a ‘preheat command’ true/false value.
The optimiser selected may be located outside the radiator group (external preheat command) for those
applications which require that a common site-wide or building/floor-specific optimiser is used. The
external optimiser may either be adaptive or non adaptive. If an internal optimiser is selected then that also
may either be adaptive or non adaptive and will use a selected external time schedule to determine the start
of occupancy. Finally, if an internal adaptive optimiser is selected then the desired occupancy temperature
value may be provided internally or from an external source.
“Night purge” is applied to buildings to assist in offsetting the daytime heat gains that build up thus
minimising the requirement for air conditioning. However if a controlled space has been subjected to a
night purge then it may not be sensible to apply preheat to it. The night purge application which is
described elsewhere in this document, can therefore be optionally linked to this application as a ‘preheat
commend inhibit’ signal which will prohibit preheat taking place if a night purge has been active on that day.
External
optimiser
External
Internal preheat
Time & non command
non
next event adaptive
adaptive Preheat command
optimiser
External signals
Internal
Outside air adaptive
temperature adaptive
optimiser
Space
temperature
Desired space temp
Desired occupancy Desired space temp.

setpoint at occupancy
External Internal
Figure 2: Optimiser mode Common
th
16 PAGE 85 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application

Space temperature low limit control is usually applied during the heating season to protect the space and
prevent its temperature dropping to a freezing level.
The space temperature low limit control in this application passes the space temperature through control
logic to provide a true/false low limit control signal. Figure 3 illustrates the strategy. This signal is protected
against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in space temperature by virtue of an adjustable
time based hysteresis control which is more fully described in “Common functions”. This ensures that the
space temperature has to change by a significant amount and be stable over a time period before low limit
control is asserted. The default settings that the low limit control requires the space temperature to be
before it will assert on and off are 16°C /0s and 17°C/0s respectively.
There are two space temperature control options available if low limit control is active. In both cases the
low limit control signal effectively moves the distribution circuit to an occupied state, by overriding the time
schedule. The space temperature may then be controlled either to the normal setpoint, as if the time
schedule was active, or the space temperature setpoint is set as if the preheat was active.
External signals
Space low limit

temperature Low limit control
control
Figure 3: Space temperature low limit control Common
th
16 PAGE 86 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application

When there is no heating demand and no pump overrun the circulation pump is disabled. In general when
there is a heating demand then the strategy for circuit enable begins by enabling the pump and then
controlling the valve. Figure 4 illustrates the pump control strategy.
Two other pump control strategies are available for selection. These are…
Pump overrun
Pump exercise
around the secondary circuit. The purpose of pump overrun is to dissipate the heat contained in the water
of the circuit. The circulation pump has an adjustable pump overrun time setting and its default value is 5
minutes.
‘Pump exercise’ is a general application and along with the ‘pump exercise method’ configuration, is
described elsewhere in this document. It may be optionally selected for use by the circulation pump to
protect it from becoming unavailable because it has seized due to corrosion and precipitate build up after
long periods of inactivity.
Interval Duration
External signals
Pump exercise
Pump exercise Interval Interval method
Pump
Direct Pump
control
Pump overrun
Figure 4: General pump control strategy Common
DHW demand priority

When the DHW circuit has a heat demand priority active the radiator group application will switch the
circulation pump to an off condition except where a 3 port valve is configured then the pump will remain
unaffected but the valve will be set to a closed position
th
16 PAGE 87 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Control on supply temperature

Control on supply temperature (supply) is the most popular method used for the control of a secondary
circuit incorporating radiators. Control is broken down into the following parts…
Desired supply temperature strategy: The desired supply temperature is used as the setpoint of the
main heating control loop
The preheat method: The preheat method determines what preheat value is used when the system is
in preheat mode
Control valve: The modulating control valve is controlled by a PID loop whose setpoint has been
provided by the ‘preheat method’ and whose process variable is the supply temperature value
The desired boiler temperature strategy: The desired boiler temperature strategy determines the
temperature that is returned to the boiler system as a heat demand value
Desired supply temperature strategy (supply)

The desired supply temperature is used as the setpoint of the main heating control loop. The strategy
described here provides a number of options for the adjustment of this value. Initially, the desired supply
temperature may be derived from one of two sources:
Internal: from the ‘Outside air temperature’ via a compensated heat curve to give weather
compensation. Compensated water temperature control is where the flow water temperature setpoint
is varied as a function of the measured outside air temperature (weather compensation). A description
of operation of the heat curve can be found in “Common functions”.
External: from an ‘External control setpoint’ value
The desired supply temperature value may then be adjusted within preset limits (the default is +5ºC to -5ºC)
to take account of the desired and current space temperature. This desired space temperature
compensation value is derived from one of a number of internal or external sources including the
adjustment of a fixed desired space temperature by an externally provided offset. Figure 1 illustrates the
desired supply temperature strategy.
Offset +
Desired space
temperature
External signals
Internal
External
Desired space offset
temperature External
Desired space
Space temperature
temperature
Space
temperature Yes Desired supply
External control compensation temperature
setpoint
No
Space
External
temperature
compensation
Outside air heat
temperature curve Control setpoint
Internal
(On supply temperature only)
Figure 1: Desired supply temperature Control on supply temperature
th
16 PAGE 88 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Preheat method (supply)

The preheat method determines what preheat value is used when the system is in preheat mode. The
heating setpoint value for the main control loop is determined by whether the system is in a normal
occupancy mode or is in preheat before occupancy starts. The ‘optimiser mode’ strategy provides a
preheat command which switches the heating setpoint value from the normal occupancy desired supply
temperature value to a potentially different and higher preheat value. This preheat value can be provided
by one of three sources. These can be the normal heat curve derived desired supply temperature value (by
using this, the preheat value will therefore be the same as the occupancy value) or the normal value with a
fixed offset or another fixed preheat value. The control logic contains protection against the effect of a
sudden step change of setpoint value, which can occur from this switching strategy, by a setpoint change
delay timer (default 1s/0.1°C). Further details of the setpoint change delay timer can be found in “Common
functions”. Figure 2 illustrates the preheat method.
Desired supply
temp. during
preheat
Heat curve Fixed Preheat

Offset supply + offset
Add method
temp. during
preheat
Heat
Heating setpoint
curve
Desired supply
temperature
Preheat command
(from optimiser
Figure 2: Preheat method Control on supply temperature
th
16 PAGE 89 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Control valve (supply)

The modulating control valve is controlled by a PID loop whose setpoint has been provided by the ‘preheat
method’ and whose process variable is the supply temperature value.
If the heating plant is monitoring return water temperature and is protecting against boiler condensation,
then when this is active, the heating plant will give a ‘demand limit’ percentage signal and ask the heat
distribution circuits to lower their demand for heat to be no more than the requested maximum limit. The
‘Max10boilers’ application does not provide a boiler condensation limit signal. It can however be generated
with external logic using the ‘Boiler condensation control’ object. The response that this heat distribution
circuit gives to the boiler system request, in conditions of boiler condensation control, can be configured to
be either…
None (ignore- no action) or,

Limit the control valve position to the demand limit signal (fully responsive to the limit) or
Go to a preset fixed maximum control valve position value if the demand limit signal is lower than a
preset value
Figure 3 illustrates the valve control strategy with optional boiler condensation control. Note that the ‘max.
valve position control’ switch to enable the ‘fixed’ maximum valve position is protected against instability
which can be caused by small fluctuations in value by virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control
which is more fully described in “Common functions”. This ensures that the demand limit value has to
change by a significant amount and be stable over a time period before the fixed maximum value (default
65%) is asserted. The default settings that the maximum valve position control requires the demand limit
signal to be before it will assert on and off are 60%/0s and 70%/0s respectively.
Heating setpoint sp
(from preheat method) PID Control
Supply pv loop valve
temperature <
None (100%) 0% = closed

(100%)
External signals
Fixed 100%= open
Max. valve
position Variable Boiler
0% = full AB
condensation
mix BAB
control B
100% = full A
max valve
flow A AB
position
control
Demand
limit signal
Figure 3: Control valve Control on supply temperature
th
16 PAGE 90 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Desired boiler temperature strategy (supply)

The desired boiler temperature strategy determines the temperature that is returned to the boiler system as
a heat demand value. The heat plant and heat delivery applications are designed such that it is the
responsibility of each heat distribution circuit to request its own heat demand temperature. Each circuit is
allocated to a specific heating plant and the heating plant system will produce heated water to satisfy the
maximum value of all its supported distribution circuits. In the heating system the desired boiler
temperature (DBT) value for the boilers is derived from the maximum value (TDmax) of all the desired heat
demand temperatures of the connected heat distribution circuits.
The radiator circuit, controlled on supply temperature, fundamentally uses the heating setpoint as the basis
for its heat demand or desired boiler temperature. However there are three potential modifiers; Night
setback, Frost control or Transport loss, to the heating setpoint before the signal is output to the heating
plant system and these are illustrated in Figure 4
Correction at 100%
valve position Transport loss
Outside heat correction
air temp curve Transport loss
Night heat correction threshold No
Yes
curve (valve%)
Night
External signals
Desired night Fixed

supply temp. setback Desired
boiler
Offset
Night setback
- temperature
None
> Transport
loss
Heating setpoint
(from preheat method)
None Calculated
Minimum supply Minimum supply temp. supply
temp. at frost limit temperature
Heat curve Frost control
heat
curve
Figure 4: Desired boiler temperature Control on supply temperature
Night setback:
Night setback is the condition of the system when the configured time schedule is not in occupancy,
that is when occupancy is off (normally during the night), and also when the system is not in preheat or
in frost limit. During night setback the heating setpoint can be reduced by a number of degrees either
to a fixed preset value (default 40ºC), or an offset reduction (default 20K) from the normal value, or to a
value derived from an outside air temperature heat curve.
Frost control:
Frost control is another optional interlock protection made to the heating setpoint and if selected then
when the configured frost limit application becomes active the heating setpoint (supply temperature) will
be limited to a fixed preset minimum value (default 30ºC) or to a value derived from an outside air
temperature heat curve.
Transport loss:
‘Transport loss’ provides a means of adjusting the calculated supply temperature value to take account
of the temperature loss which will occur in the pipe work between the heating plant system and the
distribution circuit. The calculated supply temperature is adjusted and this new value is then the
desired boiler temperature signal which is sent to the heating plant. There are two options available to
th
16 PAGE 91 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
calculate the transport loss, one a fixed value and one a corrected value which can vary depending
upon the position of the control valve. This is illustrated in Figure 5:
Transport loss: Without any correction, a fixed preset transport loss (default 5K) is added to the
calculated supply temperature
Transport loss correction: A transport loss correction value is added to the fixed preset transport loss
which is then added to the calculated supply temperature. The correction value is variable and
depends upon the position of the control valve. The correction value is zero until the valve reaches a
fixed preset ‘Transport loss correction threshold (valve%)’ (default 90%). As the valve increases
towards 100% a proportional correction value is added which is determined by a linear ratio between
the ‘threshold’ and a ‘Correction at 100% valve position’ value (default 5K)
10
Transport
loss (K) 5
0 20 40 60 80 90 100
Valve position (%)

current valve position
Figure 5: Transport loss
th
16 PAGE 92 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Control on space temperature

Control on space temperature (space) is the second method used for the control of a secondary circuit
incorporating radiators. Control is broken down into the following parts…
Desired space temperature strategy: The desired space temperature is used as the setpoint of the
in preheat mode
provided by the ‘preheat method’ and whose process variable is the space temperature value
Desired space temperature strategy (space)

The desired space temperature is used as the setpoint of the main heating control loop. The strategy
described here provides a number of options for the adjustment of this value.
This desired space temperature value is derived from one of a number of internal or external sources
including the adjustment of a fixed desired space temperature by an externally provided offset. Figure 1
illustrates the desired space temperature strategy.
Offset Add
External signals
Desired space
temperature
Internal
External
Desired space External offset
temperature
Desired space
temperature
Desired space
temperature
Figure 1: Desired space temperature Control on space temperature
th
16 PAGE 93 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Preheat method (space)

preheat command which switches the heating setpoint value from the normal occupancy desired space
by one of three sources. These can be the normal desired space temperature value (by using this, the
preheat value will therefore be the same as the occupancy value) or the normal value with a fixed offset or
another fixed preheat value. The control logic contains protection against the effect of a sudden step
change of setpoint value, which can occur from this switching strategy, by a setpoint change delay timer
(default 1s/0.1°C). Further details of the setpoint change delay timer can be found in “Common functions”.
Figure 2 illustrates the preheat method.
Desired space
temp. during
preheat

Offset space + offset
Add method
temp. during
preheat
Heat
Heating setpoint
curve
Desired space
temperature
Preheat command
(from optimiser mode)
Figure 2: Preheat method Control on space temperature
th
16 PAGE 94 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Control valve (space)

method’ and whose process variable is the space temperature value.
be either…

Go to a fixed maximum control valve position if the demand limit signal is lower than a preset value
Figure 3 illustrates the valve control strategy with optional boiler condensation and frost control.
Boiler condensation control includes a ‘max. valve position control’ switch to enable the ‘fixed’ maximum
valve position and is protected against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in value by
virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control which is more fully described in “Common functions”.
This ensures that the demand limit value has to change by a significant amount and be stable over a time
period before the fixed maximum value (default 65%) is asserted. The default settings that the maximum
valve position control requires the demand limit signal to be before it will assert on and off are 60%/0s and
70%/0s respectively.
Frost control is an optional protection and if selected then when the configured frost limit application
becomes active the control signal to the valve will be limited to a fixed minimum value. The default is 10%.
Heating setpoint
(from preheat
method) sp
PID
Space pv loop
temperature
Minimum Frost
Minimum valve position control Control
valve position > valve
at frost limit <
External signals
None
0% = closed
None (100%) 100%= open
(100%)
Fixed
Max. valve 0% = full AB
mix BAB
condensation B
control
100% = full A
max valve flow A AB
position
control
Demand
limit signal
Figure 3: Control valve Control on space temperature
th
16 PAGE 95 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Desired boiler temperature strategy (space)

Figure 4 illustrates the desired boiler temperature control strategy.
Correction at 100%
correction
Transport loss
correction threshold No
Yes
(valve%)
External signals
Desired boiler
heat temperature
Outside air Transport
temperature curve losses
Calculated
heat curve
temperature
Figure 4: Desired boiler temperature Control on space temperature
Fundamentally the desired boiler temperature is derived from the outside air temperature via a
compensated heat curve to give weather compensation. Compensated temperature control is where the
temperature setpoint is varied as a function of the measured outside air temperature (weather
compensation). A description of operation of the heat curve can be found in “Common functions”. There is,
however one potential modifier to this ‘calculated boiler supply temperature’ called ‘Transport loss’ before
the signal is output to the heating plant system
Transport loss:
‘Transport loss’ provides a means of adjusting the calculated boiler supply temperature value to take
account of the temperature loss which will occur in the pipe work between the heating plant system and
the distribution circuit. The calculated boiler supply temperature is adjusted and this new value is then
the desired boiler temperature signal which is sent to the heating plant. There are two options available
to calculate the transport loss, one a fixed value and one a corrected value which can vary depending
calculated boiler supply temperature
which is then added to the calculated boiler supply temperature. The correction value is variable and
th
16 PAGE 96 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
10
Transport
loss (K) 5
0 20 40 60 80 90 100
Valve position (%)

th
16 PAGE 97 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
th
16 PAGE 98 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
The radiant panels TRIDIUM
application
The radiant panels application
Overview
The radiant panels application provides a heating delivery secondary circuit comprising pump, control valve,
monitoring devices and control strategies to maintain the environmental temperature of a space which is
heated with water filled radiant panels. The radiant panels application offers valve arrangement options for
constant volume, variable temperature and constant temperature, variable volume circuits as well as control
using supply or space temperature. The radiant panels application can be found in the
The following mechanical plant options are available in the radiant panels application…

th
16 PAGE 99 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
The following control strategy options are available in the radiant panels application…
Optimisation control (Internal or external, adaptive or non adaptive)

Space temperature compensation by outside temperature
Night purge
Pump overrun
Pump exercise
DHW demand priority
radiant panels is controlled on supply temperature or on space temperature.
The control strategy for the radiant panels is described in the following chapters and for reasons of clarity is
structured as strategies which depend on the control mode and those which are common to both modes.
Control mode
dependent
strategies
Desired
boiler
temperature
Desired
temperature
Preheat Control
method valve
Common
strategies
Space
Occupancy Optimiser temperature Pump
time mode low limit
control
Figure 3: Radiant panels overall control strategy
th
16 PAGE 100 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
The radiant panels application may be in one of the following states…
Occupancy The radiant panels are currently in occupancy state
Time extension The radiant panels are in occupancy state because of a time extension
Off The radiant panels are off
Low space temp. limit Low space limit protection has become active
System disabled System disabled by the heat plant generating system
Figure 4: Radiant panels states
th
16 PAGE 101 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Common strategies
some strategies which are common to both. Here they are …
a time extension override
Optimiser mode strategy: The optimiser mode provides the user with various options on the selection
of the type and location of optimiser which will determine the start of the preheat period for this radiant
panels application
Space temperature low limit control: Space temperature low limit control is usually applied during
the heating season to protect the space and prevent its temperature dropping to a freezing level
General pump control strategy: When there is no heating demand and no pump overrun the
circulation pump is disabled. In general when there is a heating demand then the strategy for circuit
DHW demand priority: When the DHW circuit has a heat demand priority active the radiant panels
Occupancy time
Figure 1.
Time
External signals
Time extension
(maintained)
Figure 1: Occupancy time Common
th
16 PAGE 102 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Optimiser mode strategy

The optimiser mode provides the user with various options on the selection of the type and location of
optimiser which will determine the start of the preheat period for this radiant panels application. Figure 2
illustrates the optimiser mode strategy. The output from the optimiser mode is a ‘preheat command’
true/false value.
The optimiser selected may be located outside the radiant panels application (external preheat command)
for those applications which require that a common site-wide or building/floor-specific optimiser is used.
The external optimiser may either be adaptive or non adaptive. If an internal optimiser is selected then that
also may either be adaptive or non adaptive and will use a selected external time schedule to determine the
start of occupancy. Finally, if an internal adaptive optimiser is selected then the desired occupancy
temperature value may be provided internally or from an external source.
“Night purge” is applied to buildings to assist in offsetting the daytime heat gains that build up thus
minimising the requirement for air conditioning. However if a controlled space has been subjected to a
night purge then it may not be sensible to apply preheat to it. The night purge application which is
described elsewhere in this document, can therefore be optionally linked to this application as a ‘preheat
commend inhibit’ signal which will prohibit preheat taking place if a night purge has been active on that day.
External
optimiser
External
Internal preheat
Time & non command
non
next event adaptive
adaptive Preheat command
optimiser
External signals
Internal
Outside air adaptive
temperature adaptive
optimiser
Space
temperature
Desired space temp
Desired occupancy Desired space temp.

setpoint at occupancy
External Internal
Figure 2: Optimiser mode Common
th
16 PAGE 103 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application

logic to provide a true/false low limit control signal. Figure 3 illustrates the strategy. This signal is protected
against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in space temperature by virtue of an adjustable
time based hysteresis control which is more fully described in “Common functions”. This ensures that the
space temperature has to change by a significant amount and be stable over a time period before low limit
control is asserted. The default settings that the low limit control requires the space temperature to be
before it will assert on and off are 16°C /0s and 17°C/0s respectively.
schedule. The space temperature may then be controlled either to the normal setpoint, as if the time
schedule was active, or the space temperature setpoint is set as if the preheat was active.
External signals
Space low limit

temperature Low limit control
control
Figure 3: Space temperature low limit control Common
th
16 PAGE 104 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application

When there is no heating demand and no pump overrun the circulation pump is disabled. In general when
there is a heating demand then the strategy for circuit enable begins by enabling the pump and then
Pump overrun
Pump exercise
around the secondary circuit. The purpose of pump overrun is to dissipate the heat contained in the water
of the circuit. The circulation pump has an adjustable pump overrun time setting and its default value is 5
minutes.
Interval Duration
External signals
Pump exercise
Pump
Direct Pump
control
Pump overrun
DHW demand priority

When the DHW circuit has a heat demand priority active the radiant panels application will switch the
unaffected but the valve will be set to a closed position
th
16 PAGE 105 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application

Control on supply temperature (supply) is the most popular method used for the control of a secondary
circuit incorporating radiant panels. Control is broken down into the following parts…
Desired supply temperature strategy: The desired supply temperature is used as the setpoint of the
in preheat mode
provided by the ‘preheat method’ and whose process variable is the supply temperature value
Desired supply temperature strategy (supply)

The desired supply temperature is used as the setpoint of the main heating control loop. The strategy
described here provides a number of options for the adjustment of this value. Initially, the desired supply
temperature may be derived from one of two sources:
The desired supply temperature value may then be adjusted within preset limits (the default is +5ºC to -5ºC)
to take account of the desired and current space temperature. This desired space temperature
adjustment of a fixed desired space temperature by an externally provided offset. Figure 1 illustrates the
desired supply temperature strategy.
Offset +
Desired space
temperature
External signals
Internal
External
Desired space offset
temperature External
Desired space
Space temperature
temperature
Space
temperature Yes Desired supply
External control compensation temperature
setpoint
No
Space
External
temperature
compensation
Outside air heat
temperature curve Control setpoint
Internal
(On supply temperature only)
Figure 1: Desired supply temperature Control on supply temperature
th
16 PAGE 106 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Preheat method (supply)

preheat command which switches the heating setpoint value from the normal occupancy desired supply
by one of three sources. These can be the normal heat curve derived desired supply temperature value (by
using this, the preheat value will therefore be the same as the occupancy value) or the normal value with a
fixed offset or another fixed preheat value. The control logic contains protection against the effect of a
sudden step change of setpoint value, which can occur from this switching strategy, by a setpoint change
delay timer (default 1s/0.1°C). Further details of the setpoint change delay timer can be found in “Common
functions”. Figure 2 illustrates the preheat method.
Desired supply
temp. during
preheat

Add method
temp. during
preheat
Heat
Heating setpoint
curve
Desired supply
temperature
Preheat command
Figure 2: Preheat method Control on supply temperature
th
16 PAGE 107 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Control valve (supply)

method’ and whose process variable is the supply temperature value.
be either…

Go to a preset fixed maximum control valve position value if the demand limit signal is lower than a
preset value
Figure 3 illustrates the valve control strategy with optional boiler condensation control. Note that the ‘max.
valve position control’ switch to enable the ‘fixed’ maximum valve position is protected against instability
which can be caused by small fluctuations in value by virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control
which is more fully described in “Common functions”. This ensures that the demand limit value has to
change by a significant amount and be stable over a time period before the fixed maximum value (default
65%) is asserted. The default settings that the maximum valve position control requires the demand limit
signal to be before it will assert on and off are 60%/0s and 70%/0s respectively.
Heating setpoint sp
(from preheat method) PID Control
Supply pv loop valve
temperature <
None (100%) 0% = closed

(100%)
External signals
Fixed 100%= open
Max. valve
0% = full AB
condensation
mix BAB
control B
100% = full A
max valve
flow A AB
position
control
Demand
limit signal
th
16 PAGE 108 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Desired boiler temperature strategy (supply)

The radiant panels circuit, controlled on supply temperature, fundamentally uses the heating setpoint as the
basis for its heat demand or desired boiler temperature. However there are three potential modifiers; Night
setback, Frost control or Transport loss, to the heating setpoint before the signal is output to the heating
plant system and these are illustrated in Figure 4
Correction at 100%
Outside heat correction
air temp curve Transport loss
Night heat correction threshold No
Yes
curve (valve%)
Night
External signals
Desired night Fixed

supply temp. setback Desired
boiler
Offset
Night setback
- temperature
None
> Transport
loss
Heating setpoint
(from preheat method)
None Calculated
Minimum supply Minimum supply temp. supply
temp. at frost limit temperature
Heat curve Frost control
heat
curve
Figure 4: Desired boiler temperature Control on supply temperature
Night setback:
in frost limit. During night setback the heating setpoint can be reduced by a number of degrees either
to a fixed preset value (default 40ºC), or an offset reduction (default 20K) from the normal value, or to a
value derived from an outside air temperature heat curve.
Frost control:
Frost control is another optional interlock protection made to the heating setpoint and if selected then
when the configured frost limit application becomes active the heating setpoint (supply temperature) will
be limited to a fixed preset minimum value (default 30ºC) or to a value derived from an outside air
temperature heat curve.
Transport loss:
‘Transport loss’ provides a means of adjusting the calculated supply temperature value to take account
of the temperature loss which will occur in the pipe work between the heating plant system and the
distribution circuit. The calculated supply temperature is adjusted and this new value is then the
desired boiler temperature signal which is sent to the heating plant. There are two options available to
calculate the transport loss, one a fixed value and one a corrected value which can vary depending
th
16 PAGE 109 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
calculated supply temperature
which is then added to the calculated supply temperature. The correction value is variable and
10
Transport
loss (K) 5
0 20 40 60 80 90 100
Valve position (%)

th
16 PAGE 110 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application

Control on space temperature (space) is the second method used for the control of a secondary circuit
incorporating radiant panels. Control is broken down into the following parts…
Desired space temperature strategy: The desired space temperature is used as the setpoint of the
in preheat mode
provided by the ‘preheat method’ and whose process variable is the space temperature value
Desired space temperature strategy (space)

The desired space temperature is used as the setpoint of the main heating control loop. The strategy
described here provides a number of options for the adjustment of this value.
This desired space temperature value is derived from one of a number of internal or external sources
including the adjustment of a fixed desired space temperature by an externally provided offset. Figure 1
illustrates the desired space temperature strategy.
Offset Add
External signals
Desired space
temperature
Internal
External
Desired space External offset
temperature
Desired space
temperature
Desired space
temperature
Figure 1: Desired space temperature Control on space temperature
th
16 PAGE 111 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Preheat method (space)

preheat command which switches the heating setpoint value from the normal occupancy desired space
by one of three sources. These can be the normal desired space temperature value (by using this, the
preheat value will therefore be the same as the occupancy value) or the normal value with a fixed offset or
another fixed preheat value. The control logic contains protection against the effect of a sudden step
change of setpoint value, which can occur from this switching strategy, by a setpoint change delay timer
(default 1s/0.1°C). Further details of the setpoint change delay timer can be found in “Common functions”.
Figure 2 illustrates the preheat method.
Desired space
temp. during
preheat

Offset space + offset
Add method
temp. during
preheat
Heat
Heating setpoint
curve
Desired space
temperature
Preheat command
Figure 2: Preheat method Control on space temperature
th
16 PAGE 112 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Control valve (space)

method’ and whose process variable is the space temperature value.
be either…

Go to a fixed maximum control valve position if the demand limit signal is lower than a preset value
Figure 3 illustrates the valve control strategy with optional boiler condensation and frost control.
Boiler condensation control includes a ‘max. valve position control’ switch to enable the ‘fixed’ maximum
valve position and is protected against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in value by
virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control which is more fully described in “Common functions”.
This ensures that the demand limit value has to change by a significant amount and be stable over a time
period before the fixed maximum value (default 65%) is asserted. The default settings that the maximum
valve position control requires the demand limit signal to be before it will assert on and off are 60%/0s and
70%/0s respectively.
Heating setpoint
(from preheat
method) sp
PID
Space pv loop
temperature
Minimum Frost
Minimum valve position control Control
valve position > valve
at frost limit <
External signals
None
0% = closed
None (100%) 100%= open
(100%)
Fixed
Max. valve 0% = full AB
position Variable Boiler mix BAB
condensation B
control
100% = full A
max valve flow A AB
position
control
Demand
limit signal
th
16 PAGE 113 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Desired boiler temperature strategy (space)

Figure 4 illustrates the desired boiler temperature control strategy.
Correction at 100%
correction
Transport loss
Yes
(valve%)
External signals
Desired boiler
heat temperature
Outside air Transport
temperature curve losses
Calculated
heat curve
temperature
Figure 4: Desired boiler temperature Control on space temperature
Fundamentally the desired boiler temperature is derived from the outside air temperature via a
compensated heat curve to give weather compensation. Compensated temperature control is where the
compensation). A description of operation of the heat curve can be found in “Common functions”. There
is, however one potential modifier to this ‘calculated boiler supply temperature’ called ‘Transport loss’
before the signal is output to the heating plant system
Transport loss:
‘Transport loss’ provides a means of adjusting the calculated boiler supply temperature value to take
the distribution circuit. The calculated boiler supply temperature is adjusted and this new value is then
the desired boiler temperature signal which is sent to the heating plant. There are two options available
to calculate the transport loss, one a fixed value and one a corrected value which can vary depending
calculated boiler supply temperature
which is then added to the calculated boiler supply temperature. The correction value is variable and
th
16 PAGE 114 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
10
Transport
loss (K) 5
0 20 40 60 80 90 100
Valve position (%)

th
16 PAGE 115 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
th
16 PAGE 116 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
The heating delivery TRIDIUM
system application
The heating delivery system application
Overview
The delivery system application provides a general purpose secondary circuit for the delivery of heated
water. It comprises maintained or modulating, single or twin pump arrangements, restricting or diverting
control valve, monitoring devices and control strategies to maintain the supply temperature and pressure of
any connected secondary circuits. The delivery system is responsive to the demand of any secondary
circuits that are connected to it as well as being able to communicate with the heat generating system for
boiler demand temperature and boiler demand limiting. The delivery system application can be found in the
One or more delivery system applications may be used to distribute heated water from a heat generation
plant to a variety of heating load applications. Each delivery system will respond to its load demand and
pass that on to the heat generation plant. A typical application is shown in Figure 1 where two delivery
systems distribute heated water from the boiler system to an air handling application and to a manifold, or
header, which serves to divide the heated water flow into several routes for various low temperature hot
water (LTHW) loads.
LTHW
supply
Manifold
Fan coil
units
Air
Handling Air
Unit curtains
Heat Heat
demand demand
signals signals
Boiler heated
water generation
Delivery system Delivery system
Boiler enable, temperature demand and demand limit signals
Figure 1: Delivery system applications
th
16 PAGE 117 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
system application
In the delivery system example shown in Figure 2, a constant volume, variable temperature (CV/VT)
delivery system is controlling the supply temperature using a three port ‘mixing’ valve with the secondary
pump fitted on the load side of the bypass circuit. The twin pump arrangement also offers sequence control
strategies.
In an alternative arrangement, a delivery system maintaining the delivered heated water at a constant
temperature and with differential pressure control using variable speed pumps and a modulating ‘mixing’
valve, is shown in Figure 3.
Figure 2: CV/VT controlled on supply temperature Figure 3: Pressurised supply
The following mechanical plant options are available in the delivery system application…

Maintained command (on/off) single or twin secondary pumps with or without cut off valves
Variable speed pumps
th
16 PAGE 118 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
system application
The following control strategy options are available in the delivery system application…
External adaptive or non adaptive optimisation control

Time schedule occupancy control
Differential pressure control
Responsive to heat demand from connected loads
Power load value to boiler system
Pump prerun
Pump overrun
Pump exercise
Pump sequence control
DHW demand priority
The application has two main optional control choices; temperature control and pressure control and either
or both may be selected to create an application. If temperature control is required then either a 3-port or
2-port control valve may be selected. If required, pump control is available to both these main options.
The overall strategy can be broken down into a number of discrete parts based on the various options that
are available and Figure 4 shows these parts. The control strategy for the delivery system is described in
the following chapters.
Pump and
pressure
control
Boiler
requirement
Desired
supply Preheat Control
temperature method valve
Figure 4: Delivery system overall control strategy
th
16 PAGE 119 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
system application
The delivery system application may be in one of the following states…
The delivery system has a connected load which is demanding a supply of

Enabled
heated water
Ready The delivery system does not have any current demand but it is not in a
disabled state
Frost limit The outside temperature application is in a frost limit state
Boiler condensation control The boiler system has condensation control active and the delivery
system is reacting accordingly
Failure There has been a failure of either the pumps or the cutoff valves
Figure 5: Delivery system states
th
16 PAGE 120 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
system application
Control strategy
The control strategy for the delivery system is broken down into the following parts…
Desired supply temperature strategy: The desired supply temperature (calculated supply
temperature) is used as the setpoint of the supply control loop.
Preheat method: The preheat method determines what preheat value is used when the system is in
preheat mode and is active when the ‘temperature control’ option is selected.
provided by the ‘preheat method’ and whose process variable is the supply temperature value.
Boiler requirement strategy: The boiler requirement strategy determines the temperature that is
returned to the boiler system as a heat demand value. The boiler requirement strategy also enables a
‘power load’ value to be returned to the boiler system.
Pump and pressure control strategy: The pump and pressure control contains strategies for
maintained and modulating single or twin pump control for sequenced duty standby rotation control,
boiler condensation control, pressure control, pump exercise, pump prerun and pump overrun.
DHW demand priority: When the DHW circuit has a heat demand priority active the delivery system
Desired supply temperature strategy

Figure 1 illustrates the desired supply temperature strategy. The desired supply temperature (calculated
supply temperature) is used as the setpoint of the supply control loop and is active only when the
‘temperature control’ option is selected. The strategy described here provides a number of options for the
provision of this value. One of the following sources can be selected…
The desired supply temperature can be derived from the outside air temperature via a compensated heat
curve to give weather compensation. Compensated water temperature control is where the flow water
compensation). A description of operation of the heat curve can be found in “Common functions”.
The desired supply temperature can be derived from an external heat demand value from a load which is
supplied by this application.
The desired supply temperature can be the highest of the heat curve and external values or finally it can be
from a fixed internal value.
desired supply
temperature
Outside air heat

External signals
temperature curve Calculated

Heat curve Internal desired supply
temperature
highest
Highest of external
Heat demand or heat curve External
value
Figure 1: Desired supply temperature Temperature control
th
16 PAGE 121 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
system application
Preheat method
The preheat method determines what preheat value is used when the system is in preheat mode and is
active only when the ‘temperature control’ option is selected. The setpoint value for the supply control loop
is determined by whether the system is in a normal occupancy mode or is in preheat before occupancy
starts. A ‘preheat command’ signal, derived from an external optimiser, provides a command which
switches the supply control setpoint value from the normal occupancy desired supply temperature value
(the calculated desired supply temperature) to a potentially different and higher preheat value. This preheat
value can be provided by one of two sources. These can be the calculated desired supply temperature with
an additional fixed offset or another fixed preheat value. The control logic contains protection against the
effect of a sudden step change of setpoint value, which can occur from this switching strategy, by a setpoint
change delay timer (default 1s/0.1°C). Further details of the setpoint change delay timer can be found in
“Common functions”. Figure 2 illustrates the preheat method.
Desired supply
temp. during
preheat
supply temp. Fixed Preheat

Add method
temp. during
preheat
None
Supply setpoint
Calculated desired supply

temperature
External signals
Preheat command
Figure 2: Preheat method Temperature control
th
16 PAGE 122 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
system application
Control valve
method’ and whose process variable is the supply temperature value. It is active only when the
‘temperature control’ option is selected.
Figure 3 illustrates the valve control strategy with optional frost control.
Supply setpoint
(from preheat
method) 0% = full AB
sp mix BAB
External signals
B
PID
Supply pv loop 100% = full A
temperature flow A AB
Minimum Frost Control

Minimum valve position valve
control
valve position
at frost limit
>
None 0% = closed
100%= open
Figure 3: Control valve Temperature control
th
16 PAGE 123 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
system application
Boiler requirement strategy

The boiler requirement strategy determines the temperature that is returned to the boiler system as a heat
demand value and is active only when the ‘temperature control’ option is selected. The heat plant and heat
delivery applications are designed such that it is the responsibility of each heat distribution circuit to request
its own heat demand temperature. Each circuit is allocated to a specific heating plant and the heating plant
system will produce heated water to satisfy the maximum value of all its supported distribution circuits. In
the heating system the desired boiler temperature (DBT) value for the boilers is derived from the maximum
value (TDmax) of all the desired heat demand temperatures of the connected heat distribution circuits.
The boiler requirement strategy also enables a ‘power load’ value to be returned to the boiler system.
The distribution system, controlled on supply temperature, uses the heating setpoint as the basis for its
heat demand or desired boiler temperature. However this can be modified before the signal is output to the
heating plant system by a ‘transport loss option.
Figure 4 illustrates the boiler requirement strategy with optional transport loss.
Correction at 100%
correction
Transport loss
Yes
(valve%)
Desired boiler
Supply setpoint temperature
Transport
(from preheat method) loss
Desired supply
temperature
Power load
Zone power to boilers
load
Figure 4: Boiler requirements Temperature control
Zone power load:

The zone power load is a preset internal value which has a default of 50 kW and is also returned to the
heating plant
Transport loss:
‘Transport loss’ provides a means of adjusting the heating setpoint value to take account of the
temperature loss which will occur in the pipe work between the heating plant system and the
distribution circuit. The heating setpoint is adjusted and this new value is then the desired boiler
temperature signal which is sent to the heating plant. There are two options available to calculate the
transport loss, one a fixed value and one a corrected value which can vary depending upon the position
of the control valve. This is illustrated in Figure 5:
heating setpoint value
th
16 PAGE 124 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
system application
which is then added to the heating setpoint value. The correction value is variable and depends upon
the position of the control valve. The correction value is zero until the valve reaches a fixed preset
‘Transport loss correction threshold (valve%)’ (default 90%). As the valve increases towards 100% a
proportional correction value is added which is determined by a linear ratio between the ‘threshold’ and
a ‘Correction at 100% valve position’ value (default 5K)
10
Transport
loss (K) 5
0 20 40 60 80 90 100
Valve position (%)

th
16 PAGE 125 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
system application
Pump and pressure control strategy

The pump and pressure control contains strategies for maintained and modulating single or twin pump
control for sequenced duty standby rotation control, boiler condensation control, pressure control, pump
exercise, pump prerun and pump overrun.
When there the boiler system enable is false or there is no supply demand and no pump overrun all the
secondary pumps are disabled. In general and depending on what transport system options are selected,
when there is a supply demand then the strategy begins by enabling the duty pump cut off valve. After the
valve has opened then the duty secondary pump is enabled. Figure 5 illustrates the pump and pressure
control strategy.
Interval Duration
Pump exercise
Interval
method
Pump exercise Interval
Direct None
Single pump
System enable System
state
Twin Twin pumps
pumps
with cut off
Prerun Pump valves
prerun and
Overrun overrun
Periodic
External signals
Hours run Sequence

control
Fault
Desired Manual
differential
pressure
sp
PID
Differential
pv loop
<
pressure
None (100%)
(100%)
Fixed
Max. pump
speed when Boiler
Variable
active condensation
control
max speed
control
Demand limit signal
Figure 5: Pump and pressure control strategy Temperature and pressure control
Pump overrun
Pump prerun
Pump exercise
th
16 PAGE 126 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
system application
around the delivery system. The purpose of pump overrun is to dissipate the heat contained in the water of
these circuits and to cool the heat exchanger surfaces of the boilers to prevent overheat damage. The
pump and cut off valve (if used) arrangement has an adjustable pump overrun time setting and its default
value is 5 minutes.
There is an additional adjustable timer called ‘prerun’ to hold off subsequent enabling of boiler demand until
water flow has been established. The default time for pump prerun is 10 seconds
described elsewhere in this document. It may be optionally selected for use by the delivery system pumps
to protect them from becoming unavailable because they have seized due to corrosion and precipitate build
up after long periods of inactivity.

When twin secondary pumps, either with or without cut off valves, are used a pump duty standby or
secondary pump system which sequences every Wednesday at 10:00 hrs and currently pump 1 is the lead
or duty pump. On the next anniversary, pump 2 will become the duty pump. During the changeover, when
the duty pump changes over, a period of overrun can also be configured. The default value is 5 seconds.
This is to ensure that there is no interruption of water flow at this changeover time.
th
16 PAGE 127 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
system application
Pressure control strategy

If pressure control is required then a modulating signal is provided by a pressure control PID loop which
references the differential pressure sensor as its process variable. Setpoint of the loop is provided by an
internal fixed ‘desired differential pressure’ value which is initially set as a default of 50 bar.
Boiler condensation control strategy

be either…

Limit the pump speed to the demand limit signal (fully responsive to the limit) or
Go to a preset fixed maximum pump speed value if the demand limit signal is lower than a preset value
Note that the ‘max. speed control’ switch to enable the ‘fixed’ maximum speed is protected against
instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in value by virtue of an adjustable time based
hysteresis control which is more fully described in “Common functions”. This ensures that the demand limit
value has to change by a significant amount and be stable over a time period before the fixed maximum
value (default 65%) is asserted. The default settings that the maximum speed control requires the demand
limit signal to be before it will assert on and off are 60%/0s and 70%/0s respectively.
DHW demand priority

When the DHW circuit has a heat demand priority active the delivery system application will switch the
unaffected but the valve will be set to a closed position.
th
16 PAGE 128 of 284
The heating non PARTNER INFORMATION
controlled group TRIDIUM
application
The heating non controlled group application
Overview
The non controlled group application provides a simple secondary circuit for the delivery of heated water to
heating devices. It contains no pumps nor controlled valve. Its primary use is an un-controlled delivery
system which can communicate with the heat generating system for boiler demand temperature. The non
controlled group application can be found in the hvacAppsHeatDelivery module.
The non controlled group application may be used to distribute heated water from a heat generation plant to
a variety of heating loads. A typical application is shown in Figure 1 where the non controlled group
application is distributing primary pumped low temperature hot water (LTHW) from the boiler system via a
manifold to, in this example, some air curtains.
Air
curtains
Boiler heated
water generation
Non controlled
group
Boiler enable and temperature demand signals
Figure 1: Non controlled group applications
th
16 PAGE 129 of 284
application
The following control strategy options are available in the non controlled group application…
External adaptive or non adaptive optimisation control

Night setback
Night purge
Space temperature compensation control
The non controlled group application may be in one of the following states…
Occupancy The non controlled group is demanding a supply of heated water
Frost limit The outside temperature application is in a frost limit state
Figure 2: Non controlled group states
th
16 PAGE 130 of 284
application
Control strategy
The control strategy for the non controlled group is broken down into the following parts…
Occupancy strategy: Occupancy time for this group is determined by reference to an external time
a time extension override. Space temperature low limit control can also override the occupancy
strategy
Calculated supply temperature strategy: The calculated supply temperature strategy determines the
temperature that is returned to the boiler system as a heat demand value.
Occupancy strategy
Space temperature low limit control can also override the occupancy strategy.
thereby control its strategies. Figure 1 illustrates the occupancy strategy including time extension and
space temperature low limit control.
Space low limit To calculated supply

temperature control temperature
External signals
Time
Time extension
(maintained)
Figure 1: Occupancy time
For those applications which require a common time schedule and common time extension it is normal to
allocate a time extension to the referenced time schedule. For applications which require individual groups
to be time controlled separately, such as tenanted zones, then each group may require its own time
extension override. This option is available to this group.
logic to provide a true/false low limit control signal. This signal is protected against instability which can be
th
16 PAGE 131 of 284
application
caused by small fluctuations in space temperature by virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control
which is more fully described in “Common functions”. This ensures that the space temperature has to
change by a significant amount and be stable over a time period before low limit control is asserted. The
default settings that the low limit control requires the space temperature to be before it will assert on and off
are 16°C /0s and 17°C/0s respectively.
schedule. The calculated supply temperature value may then be defined as either the normal one, as if the
time schedule was active, or as if the preheat was active.
th
16 PAGE 132 of 284
application
Calculated supply temperature strategy

The calculated supply temperature strategy determines the temperature that is returned to the boiler
system as a heat demand value. The heat plant and heat delivery applications are designed such that it is
the responsibility of each heat distribution circuit to request its own heat demand temperature. Each circuit
is allocated to a specific heating plant and the heating plant system will produce heated water to satisfy the
demand temperatures of the connected heat distribution circuits. Figure 2 illustrates the calculated supply
temperature strategy.
Desired supply temp.

during preheat
Fixed
Heat curve
Preheat
Offset supply temp.
during preheat
+ + offset
None
heat
curve Night heat
Desired night supply temp. curve
Night
Fixed setback
External signals
Night setback - Offset

None
Control setpoint Calculated

(On supply temperature only) No supply
External control max temperature
External
setpoint Space
Outside air temperature (Desired boiler
temperature heat compensation Yes temperature)
curve Internal Space temp.
Space compensation
temperature
Desired space
temperature
Desired space External
temperature
External
Internal offset
Desired space
temperature
Desired space
temperature
+
offset
heat
Heat
curve curve
Minimum supply
temp. at frost limit Minimum supply temp.
Frost control
None
Figure 2 Calculated supply temperature strategy
th
16 PAGE 133 of 284
application
The strategy described here provides a number of options for the adjustment of this heat demand value.
Fundamentally, and certainly if no option is selected to modify it, the calculated supply temperature ‘Control
Setpoint’ is derived from one of two sources:
There are four optional interlocks that can also affect the calculated supply temperature value. The
maximum of all these is used as this value:
Preheat:
Preheat determines what preheat value is used when the system is in preheat mode. The calculated
supply temperature value is determined by whether the system is in a normal occupancy mode or is in
preheat before occupancy starts.
An external optimisation schedule provides a preheat command which switches the calculated supply
temperature value from the normal heat curve derived value to a potentially different and higher preheat
value. This preheat value can be provided by one of three sources. These can be the normal heat
curve value (by using this, the preheat value will therefore be the same as the occupancy value) or the
normal value with a fixed offset or another fixed preheat value.
The control logic contains protection against the effect of a sudden step change of setpoint value,
which can occur from this switching strategy, by a setpoint change delay timer (default 1s/0.1ºC).
Further details of the setpoint change delay timer can be found in “Common functions”.
Night setback:
in frost limit or under time extension.
During night setback the calculated supply temperature can be reduced either to a fixed preset value
(default 40ºC), or an offset reduction (default 20K) from the normal value, or to a value derived from an
outside air temperature heat curve.
Like the preheat change of value, this control logic contains protection against the effect of a sudden
step change of setpoint value, which can occur from this switching strategy, by a setpoint change delay
timer (default 1s/0.1ºC).”.
Space temperature compensation:

The calculated supply flow temperature may be adjusted within preset limits (the default is +5ºC to -
5ºC) to take account of the desired and current space temperature. This desired space temperature
adjustment of a fixed desired space temperature by an externally provided offset
Frost control:
Frost control is an optional interlock protection made to the calculated supply temperature and if
selected then when the configured frost limit application becomes active the calculated supply
temperature will be limited to a fixed minimum value (default 30ºC) or to a value derived from an
outside air temperature heat curve.
th
16 PAGE 134 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
The domestic hot water TRIDIUM
(DHW) application
The domestic hot water (DHW) application
Overview
The domestic hot water (DHW) application provides for a comprehensive range of mechanical equipment,
control and protection strategies for the distribution of tap water. Heat supply for the final DHW circuit may
be supplied by electricity, gas or indirectly from a boiler system with or without a heat exchanger.
Temperature protection strategies are available for both the calorifier and DHW circuit as well as a ‘high
heat’ strategy specifically designed for Legionella prevention. The DHW application is able to communicate
with the heat generating system for boiler demand temperature and boiler demand limiting. In addition the
DHW application can also communicate with other heat distribution circuits to request DHW preference
priority for heat supply. The domestic hot water (DHW) application can be found in the
A typical DHW application is shown in Figure 1 where a boiler heat plant is supplying a DHW application
using controlled indirect heat and heat exchanging calorifier. The DHW circuit is pumped.
Boiler heated
water generation
DHW preference signal to
other distribution circuits
DHW
application
Boiler enable, temperature demand and demand limit signals

Figure 1: DHW application
The following mechanical plant options are available in the DHW application…
2-port or 3-port modulating control valve for indirect heating control

On/off valve or 0-10v modulating valve or Tri-state (using 4DO or MULTI-IO modules) modulating
valve for indirect heating control
Maintained command (on/off) pumps for DHW supply circuit, indirect heating and heat exchanger load
Heat exchanger
Calorifier
Electric heater
Gas heater
Thermostat and sensor devices for monitoring and control
th
16 PAGE 135 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(DHW) application
The following control strategy options are available in the DHW application…

Time schedule DHW pump control
Control on indirect supply temperature
Power load value to boiler system
DHW preference priority to other distribution circuits
Pump exercise and pump overrun
DHW over temperature protection
DHW high heat for Legionella prevention
Control and protection monitoring by sensors or thermostat devices
Electric heater on/off control
Gas heater on/off control
System states and enablers

The DHW application can be in one of a number of prioritised states. These are listed in Figure 2. Some
of these states are determined by optional external enable signals and these are summarised in Figure 3.
Enabled The DHWS is enabled and under normal controlled conditions
Ready The DHWS is currently not enabled but is not in any fault or high heat
condition
Time extension The DHWS is enabled by a time extension
High heat active The DHWS is currently undertaking a high heat cycle
The DHWS has been disabled because the DHW protection has been
DHW cutout thermostat
triggered by the DHW cutout thermostat
System disabled The DHWS has been disabled by an external plant condition
Figure 2: Domestic hot water system states
Boiler system
DHWS
External signals
enabled state
DHW enable
Time External system
schedule signals enable
No external
signals
Time extension system

(maintained) enable Note:
If no external signals are
configured then the DHWS
Figure 3: DHW external enable signals system is always enabled
th
16 PAGE 136 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(DHW) application
Control strategy
The control strategy for the domestic hot water (DHW) application is broken down into the following parts…
Control valve strategy: The control valve is positioned in the indirect supply circuit and it controls the
heat supplied to the heat exchanging coil of the calorifier or if fitted a separate heat exchanger.
Boiler condensation control strategy: If the heating plant is monitoring return water temperature and
is protecting against boiler condensation, it will give a ‘demand limit’ percentage signal and ask the heat
DHW circuit to lower its demand for heat to be no more than the requested maximum limit.
High heat strategy: The high heat strategy is designed to prevent and kill Legionella by maintaining a
higher than normal temperature in the DHW circuit for a period of time.
Boiler requirement strategy: The boiler requirement strategy determines the temperature that is
returned to the boiler system as a heat demand value. The DHW application can also be allocated a
higher priority than other distribution circuits for the supply of heated water. The boiler requirement
strategy also enables a ‘power load’ value to be returned to the boiler system.
Pump control strategy: This strategy is essentially a boolean control system whereby the on/off
pumps and direct gas or electric heat sources are switched on or off by a control circuit which is
determined by temperature sensors or control thermostats in the DHW application.
Over-temperature protection strategy: To prevent over-temperature of the DHW supply and the
consequent risk of scalding, over-temperature protection is provided in the DHWS application.
Control valve strategy

The control valve is located in the indirect supply circuit and it controls the heat supplied to the heat
exchanger coil of the calorifier. If a separate heat exchanger is fitted then this same control valve regulates
the heat supplied to this heat exchanger which in turn supplies heat to the calorifier via a separately
pumped load circuit. The control valve strategy is illustrated in Figure 4 and its configuration and settings
can be found in the ‘Indirect heated DHW’ circuit tab of the DHW application.
The control valve position is set by the output from a PID loop whose process variable is derived from one
of three temperature sources which in turn is determined by a ‘control’ configuration setting. Control may
be either on the DHW temperature or the calorifier temperature or the supply temperature from the
incoming boiler distribution circuit (which will be the load temperature if an indirect heat exchanger is fitted).
In conjunction with the process variable, the setpoint of the control valve PID loop, the desired DHW temp,
will be derived from one of the same three sources. However this may be one of two value settings from
the selected source. If the high heat strategy has requested a high heat condition then the ‘Desired DHW
temp. (high heat)’ value is used as the setpoint or alternatively if a high heat condition is not active then the
‘Desired DHW temp. (Normal)’ value is used.
Optionally the control valve PID loop can be enabled depending upon the temperature of the water in the
supply circuit from the boiler system. This can prevent the DHW calorifier from being cooled by low
temperature supply water. By default, if this ‘Enable on supply temp’ option is selected, then the
temperature of the supplied water from the boiler (as monitored by the boiler system common flow
temperature sensor) must be greater than the desired temperature by at least 1°C. If the supply water
temperature becomes lower than the desired temperature by 5°C or more then the PID loop is disabled and
the control valve closed. This function is achieved by means of an adjustable time based hysteresis
control. This ensures that this differential temperature value has to change by a significant amount and be
stable over a time period before the PID loop enable changes state.
th
16 PAGE 137 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(DHW) application
DHW return DHW return temp Protection

sensor temperature
External protection Day of week
temperature for High heat
External
High Heat
Command Start time
None
Duration (maximum)
External
Internal
Control HH
Boiler common
flow temp.
Indirect Desired DHW temp (Normal)

Power load
heated
DHW to boilers
DHW Desired DHW temp (High heat)
power load
Desired boiler
Desired DHW temp (Normal) temperature
Calorifier Transport
Desired DHW temp (High heat) losses
External signals
DHW Desired DHW temp (Normal)

circuit
Desired DHW temp (High heat)
Yes No
Heat demand
Enable on
supply temp.
DHW type selection
Indirect with HE
Indirect without HE &
Load with HE
Enable
temperature
pumps
CH supply Enable
On supply/load sp
temperature without HE temp
PID Control
Calorifier Control pv valve
sensor. (top) On calorifier
loop
<
temp
DHW supply On DHW
sensor temp 0% = closed
100%= open
Demand limit Boiler condensation control
signal
0% = full AB
mix BAB
B
100% = full A
flow A AB
Figure 4: Control valve, condensation control, high heat and boiler requirement
th
16 PAGE 138 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(DHW) application
Boiler condensation control strategy

distribution circuits to lower their demand for heat to be no more than the requested maximum limit. This is
illustrated in Figure 4. The ‘Max10boilers’ application does not provide a boiler condensation limit signal. It
can however be generated with external logic using the ‘Boiler condensation control’ object. The response
that this DHW circuit gives to the boiler system request, in conditions of boiler condensation control is to
limit the control valve position to the demand limit signal, thereby being fully responsive to the limit.
High heat strategy

Legionella is a bacterium that causes legionellosis or Legionnaires' disease. Legionella are known to live
within amoebae and can be found in many locations which tap into a public water supply, such as cooling
towers and domestic hot water systems. It is further known that temperature affects the survival of
Legionellae. Between temperatures of 20°C and 50°C Legionellae can multiply and grow but as the
temperature rises they can be killed. At 55°C Legionellae die within 5 to 6 hours, at 60°C they die within 32
minutes and at 66°C they die within 2 minutes. 70°C to 80°C is regarded as a disinfection range. There
are many treatment regimes involved in the control of Legionella such as flushing of the pipework and
biocide treatments and not least the design of the pipework system which has an effect on their survival.
The DHW application has a ‘High Heat’ strategy which is designed to prevent and kill Legionella by
maintaining a higher than normal temperature in the DHW circuit for a period of time. This strategy can be
programmed to take place over a period either every day or on one selected day during each week. High
heat can also be activated and deactivated by an external boolean switch which could be generated by a
custom external logic strategy. For practical and safety reasons, it is usual for high heat to occur in a DHW
system during an unoccupied time such as the early morning. A check is included in the strategy so that an
alarm is raised if the ‘protection temperature’ has not been continuously maintained at high heat for a
period during the programmed high heat time. The high heat strategy is illustrated in Figure 4.
‘Protection temperature’ is the source and temperature value which is monitored for high heat status and
this can be either,
a temperature sensor located in the return leg of the DHW circuit or…
an external signal providing or representing the DHW water temperature value
Two values of desired DHW temperature are used in the DHW application. Specifically these are ‘Desired
DHW temp (normal)’ and ‘Desired DHW temp (high heat)’. These two values are presented to the control
valve PID loop by the settings of the chosen control strategy which can be ‘On DHW temp’, ‘On calorifier
temp’ or ‘On supply/load temp’. When high heat is active, the setpoint of the control loop is raised to the
selected control strategies ‘high heat’ setting in order to provide the necessary higher water temperature in
the calorifier for high heat to be produced in the DHW circuit. When high heat is inactive, the loop setpoint
returns to the ‘normal’ setting.
When high heat is controlled and monitored internally, high heat is programmed to be active on a day of the
week or on every day. The default setting for high heat is every Tuesday at 2 am in the morning. A
‘Duration maximum’ setting, default 3 hours, gives the DHW system a 3 hour window of opportunity during
which it must achieve a continuous period of high heat. A time based hysteresis control manages and
monitors the high heat temperature and checks the length of time that the ‘protection temperature’ is at a
continuous high heat value. By default the high heat temperature must be at, or above a value of 66°C for
20 minutes. When this has been achieved, high heat becomes inactive and is only active again at the next
programmed day and time. If, however the protection temperature fails to meet the high heat criteria within
the maximum duration time, an alarm is raised to annunciate failure.
th
16 PAGE 139 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(DHW) application
The example in Figure 5 illustrates two separate day’s operation of high heat. On day 1, high heat is active
at 02:00 and the calorifier control loop setpoint is raised to 70 °C. The DHW temperature rises and when it
has it reached and maintained at least 66 °C for 20 minutes then high heat is deactivated, the control loop
setpoint is returned to normal and a successful high heat has taken place. In contrast on day 2, high heat
is active again at 02:00 but although 66 °C is reached it is not maintained. At the end of the high heat
duration, the control loop setpoint is returned to normal but a ‘protection failure alarm’ is annunciated.
Day 1 Day 2
20 mins >20 mins
Protection true
failure alarm false
Off 66
Protection
temperature
. On 63
°C
Desired high heat 70
DHW temp normal 60
true
High heat
status false
.
‘duration (max)’
3 hours 3 hours
‘start time’ 02:00 02:00
.
Figure 5: High heat strategy example
If, alternatively an external boolean switch is used to enable the high heat strategy instead of day and time,
then all control, monitoring and alarming of the high heat status and temperature must be carried out
completely by the external application.
Boiler requirement strategy

The boiler requirement strategy determines the temperature that is returned to the boiler system as a heat
demand value and is active only when the DHW application is not directly heated by gas or electricity. This
strategy is illustrated in Figures 4 and 6.
The heat plant and heat delivery applications are designed such that it is the responsibility of each heat
distribution circuit to request its own heat demand temperature. Each circuit is allocated to a specific
heating plant and the heating plant system will produce heated water to satisfy the maximum value of all its
supported distribution circuits. In the heating system the desired boiler temperature (DBT) value for the
boilers is derived from the maximum value (TDmax) of all the desired heat demand temperatures of the
connected heat distribution circuits.
th
16 PAGE 140 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(DHW) application
In addition, this strategy returns a ‘heat demand’ signal which, as well as being used by the boiler system to
indicate demand, is used in association with a ‘DHW preference’ setting such that the DHW application can
have a higher priority over other heat distribution circuits for the supply of heated water. The ‘DHW
preference’ signal can be used by other heat distribution circuits to close their supply valve and hence
remove their demand for heat. This can be done for example where there is insufficient boiler capacity to
supply all the connected loads at any one time.
The DHW application uses the DHW ‘desired supply temperature’ setpoint as the basis for its heat demand
or desired boiler temperature. However this can be modified before the signal is sent to the heating plant
system by a ‘transport losses option.
‘Transport losses’ provides a means of adjusting the DHW desired supply temperature value to take
account of the temperature loss which will occur in the pipe work between the heating plant system and this
DHW circuit. The DHW desired supply temperature is adjusted by a fixed value and this new value is then
the ‘desired boiler temperature’ signal which is sent to the heating plant.
The boiler requirement strategy also enables a preset ‘power load’ value to be returned to the boiler
system. It has a default value of 50 kW.
th
16 PAGE 141 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(DHW) application
Interval Duration Load (charge)

pump
Pump exercise
Indirect
withHE
Direct Indirect
w/out HE
Domestic hot water type
CH
circulation
Direct Direct pump
electrical gas
Cold water Heat demand

sensor (Monitoring only)
&
Calorifier sensor
(top)
Gas heated DHW
Calorifier sensor
(bottom) 2 calorifier Electric heated DHW
temp.sensors
HH
Calorifier control Calorifier control thermostat Calorifier
thermostat temperature
1 calorifier control
Calorifier temp.sensor
sensor
From DHW
circuit
HH
External signals
Calorifier
sensor None
Calorifier
protection
Calorifier cutout Calorifier cutout thermostat
thermostat
From DHW circuit
DHW cutout DHW cutout thermostat None
thermostat
DHW circuit
protection
DHW supply
sensor
DHW supply
DHW supply sensor
sensor
None
HH
DHW control DHW circuit
thermostat DHW control thermostat control
System
enable
or
Always DHW pump
on
Enable
HH Enable DHW
Time
or On separate time pump
schedule schedule
Figure 6: Pump control and over-temperature protection
th
16 PAGE 142 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(DHW) application
Pump control strategy

This strategy is essentially a boolean control system whereby the on/off pumps and direct gas or electric
heat sources are switched on or off by a control circuit which is determined by temperature sensors, control
thermostats or cutout thermostats in the DHW application. There are three pumps and two direct heating
supplies controlled by this strategy which is illustrated in Figure 6:
DHW pump: The ‘DHW pump’ may be configured to be always on, switched from a time schedule,
or switched directly from the overall system enable of the application
CH circulation pump: The ‘CH circulation pump’ is located in the boiler supply circuit of the calorifier
and is switched on whenever there is a demand from the configured temperature sources which may
either be from the calorifier or from the DHW supply circuit.
Load pump: If a separate heat exchanger is fitted in addition to the calorifier, then the on/off ‘Load
pump’ is switched in the same manner as the ‘CH circulation pump’
Gas or electric heated DHW: If the domestic hot water is provided directly by a gas or electrically
heated calorifier then control of the switching signal for those devices is identical to the CH circulation
and Load pumps described above.
Whenever sensors are used to provide a temperature input into this strategy the signals are each
conditioned by means of a ‘thermostat’ function which generates an on or off boolean signal from the
analogue value. In the example shown in Figure 7, the ‘Calorifier temperature control’ is set to ‘1 calorifier
temp. sensor’ and the sensor is returning a value which is converted to a thermostat function by means of
an adjustable time based hysteresis control. This ensures that the calorifier sensor temperature has to
change by a significant amount and be stable over a time period before the thermostat changes state.
Note:
The measured temperature
from the ‘calorifier sensor’
input is 59 °C which in this
example is currently
satisfying the heat demand
[minus1°C = (59°C - 60°C)]
Note:
Heat demand is off
Figure 7: Calorifier 1-sensor – thermostat example
There are also two potential settings for the ‘Desired DHW’ value. These are ‘normal’ or ‘high heat’ and this
is switched by the High Heat (HH) control signal which is generated by the ‘high heat’ strategy. This HH
switch affects each of the sensor input options that can provide calorifier temperature control, that is ‘1 or 2
calorifier temp. sensors’ or the ‘DHW supply sensor’. In the example shown in Figure 7, the desired
condition is ‘normal’ but clearly when a high heat condition exists, the calorifier heat demand will switch on
with a new Dt value of minus 10 °C (59 °C – 69 °C).
th
16 PAGE 143 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(DHW) application
When two calorifier sensors are used (top and bottom) the thermostat function works in a similar manner
except that the value from the top sensor determines the ‘on’ demand condition and the bottom sensor
value determines the ‘off’ demand condition. An example of this is illustrated in Figure 8.
Note:
Heat demand is switched
on by the ‘Top’ sensor
(current value = 58 °C)
Dt = minus 2 = (58 – 60)
Note:
Heat demand is switched
off by the ‘Bottom’ sensor
(current value = 61 °C)
Dt = 1 = (61 – 60)
Figure 8: Calorifier 2-sensor – thermostat example
Pump overrun (CH pump and Load pump)

Pump exercise
If a 3-port control valve (in supply or in return) has been selected then a pump ‘overrun’ time can be
programmed for the CH pump or the load pump. The purpose of this is to allow the pumps a short time to
continue to distribute water around the system after the time when it has been switched off. Each pump
has an adjustable pump overrun time setting and its default value is zero.
To protect the pumps from becoming unavailable because they have seized due to corrosion and
precipitate build up after long periods of inactivity, they can be exercised by a signal from ‘Pump exercise’
which is a general application and along with the ‘pump exercise method’ configuration, is described
elsewhere in this document.
Over-temperature protection strategy

To prevent over-temperature of the DHW supply and the consequent risk of scalding, over-temperature
protection is provided in the DHW application and this is illustrated in Figure 6. The pump and direct heat
supplies will be switched off if a protection high limit signal is generated from the over temperature
protection device which could be from one of the calorifier or DHW circuit sensors or the cutout
thermostats.
th
16 PAGE 144 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
The Max 4 chillers TRIDIUM
application
The Max 4 chillers application
Overview
The Max 4 chillers application comprises monitoring and control facilities for a chiller system comprising up
to 4 packaged chiller units. The application contains options for temperature and sequence control as well
as mechanical options such as on/off chillers, single or twin primary pumps and individual chiller pumps
with or without cut off valves. The Max 4 chillers application can be found in the hvacAppsCoolingPlant
module. Figure 1 shows an example of a system with 4 on/off chillers and twin primary pumps with cut off
valves.
Figure 1: A 4-chiller system
Up to 4 chillers may be utilised to provide chilled water to the cooling delivery systems which can include
secondary cooling circuits using AHU coolers, fan coil units and other chilled water loads.
A transport system comprising options for primary pumps and shut off valve arrangements can be included
to maintain a constant water flow rate around the primary circuit and through the chillers. The primary
pump system, which includes control strategy options for sequencing, is shown positioned in the return pipe
work to the chillers.
The controls for the chilled water generation plant include a combination of the chillers’ own packaged
controls along with controls from this chiller application which are ‘overlaid’ to provide cooling demand
control signals, to vary chilled water flow temperature together with monitoring capabilities. The application
includes strategies for chiller staging and sequencing. Interlocks are provided by the Max 4 chiller
application to prevent damage to the chiller or associated hydraulic circuits.
th
16 PAGE 145 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Cooling plant
The Vykon HVAC cooling plant can support up to four packaged chillers and each system may comprise a
mixture of the following chiller types…
Maintained chillers: These are simple on/off enable types

High efficiency maintained chillers: These on/off chillers can be allocated a high priority in sequence
control
Figure 2 shows some Vykon HVAC graphic examples of these chiller types…
Maintained Maintained
on/off on/off with
DP switch
Figure 2: Supported chiller types in Vykon HVAC
th
16 PAGE 146 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Figure 3 shows the overall control strategy for the Max 4 chillers application. The individual control strategy
elements are described elsewhere in this document.
From cooling delivery systems
System enablers
and interlocks
To cooling delivery
Desired supply
temperature and
systems
cooling demand Transport
strategies: Chiller system
Direct plant
On supply temp
On load power
Staged externally
Chiller Chiller Pump

sequence staging sequence
strategy strategy strategy
Figure 3: Max 4 chillers - overall control strategy

A number of enablers, interlocks and alarms are available in this chiller application which are aimed at
adverse environmental and mechanical conditions. The chiller application has nine states which are
displayed on the graphic and these are illustrated in Figure 4:
The chiller system is available for demand but is currently off because
there are no overriding demand signals active or the time schedule is
off
Low water switch The low water level switch is reporting low water level
Low pressure switch The pressure switch is reporting low water pressure
Pressure alert The pressure switch is reporting low pressure (1st warning level)
Pressure alarm The pressure sensor is reporting low pressure (2nd warning level)
System disabled One or more of the 4 alarm signals is reporting an alarm condition
Primary pump alarm One of the primary pumps is in an alarm condition
Frost protection The outside temperature application has identified a frost limit condition
and the pumps in the chiller plant have been enabled on
Cooling demand One or more of the cooling delivery systems has initiated a chilled water
demand from the chiller plant
Figure 4: Chiller system states
th
16 PAGE 147 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
External signals
In normal operation, when no fault, alarm or frost condition exists, the chiller plant is enabled and disabled
by external signals from the time schedule and the linked chilled water distribution circuits. The chiller plant
time schedule and its associated override controls have a higher priority than that of the distribution circuits.
Figure 5 summarises the external enable signals of the chiller plant.
Chilled water Cooling temperature demand

distribution Cooling demand
circuits External
Cooling load power demand
External signals
signals Chiller plant

Chiller enable
Time plant
schedule enable
Time extension
(maintained) Note:
If no time schedule or time extension signals are
configured then the chiller plant is always enabled
Figure 5: Chiller plant external enable signals
If a chiller plant time schedule is not configured then the chillers are automatically enabled and the plant will
respond to the cooling demand from the configured linked distribution circuits through ‘cooling temperature
demand’, ‘cooling load power demand’ or boolean ‘cooling demand’ values.
If a time schedule is configured then whilst it is in an ‘on’ condition the chiller plant behaves as previously
described. However when the chiller plant time schedule or its associated controls are in an ‘off’ condition
then the chiller plant is set to a ‘Ready’ condition with the chillers switched to off regardless of any cooling
demand from the distribution circuits.
Frost limit protection strategy

The frost limit condition is established from the outside temperature application which is one of a number of
general applications described elsewhere in this document. If selected the outside air application will
protect the chiller system against damage that can occur in low temperature conditions. The configured
pumps in the chiller system are enabled to an ON condition to circulate the water around the system when
the frost condition exists
This override condition however only becomes active providing that there are no other inhibiting interlocks
in place such as a low pressure or primary pump alarm and providing that the system is not already
enabled on with demand through another demand override.
Chiller protection
To avoid damage, there should always be a maintained flow of water through an enabled chiller. To
monitor this, a differential pressure (DP) switch may be fitted to measure the pressure difference across the
chiller inlet and outlet terminals. In normal operating conditions, therefore, this DP switch should be in an
‘on’ or ‘true’ condition. If the DP switch indicates otherwise the chiller should be disabled. This chiller
protection option protection is available for each chiller by simply configuring the chiller DP switch and the
chiller will be interlocked to an off condition when the DP switch is not on.
th
16 PAGE 148 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
System pressure and external alarm strategy

System pressure and external alarms can provide a selection of chiller control interlocks and they are all
available via a single ‘System enable’ strategy. These are illustrated in Figure 6.
Note:
In this example the chiller system is
enabled because none of the water or
pressure conditions are active
Figure 6: System enable
There are several system enablers/interlocks which could be configured within this overall strategy and
these are as follows:
Pressure switch
Pressure sensor
Low water level switch
Up to 4 alarm signals
Control operation of these interlocks is straightforward in that if either the pressure switch, low water level
switch or any of the alarms are in an active state then the whole chiller system will be disabled and all
controlled devices switched to an off condition. In addition a signal is sent to all connected distribution
applications indicating the current state of the chiller system and this is used by those systems to switch
their controlled devices to an off condition.
If the pressure switch is used then a ‘low pressure alarm’ is given when active. This pressure alarm
condition as well as raising an alarm and indicating in the graphic will also cause the whole chiller system to
be disabled and all controlled devices will be switched to an off condition.
If the pressure sensor is used then a two level warning of ‘pressure alert’ and ‘pressure alarm’ is given
when active. The pressure alert condition will raise an alarm and indicate the alert state in the graphic but
no other plant control action is taken. The pressure alarm condition as well as raising an alarm and
indicating in the graphic will also cause the whole chiller system to be disabled and all controlled devices
will be switched to an off condition.
The pressure alert condition is protected against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in
pressure by virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control which is more fully described in “Common
functions”. This ensures that the pressure has to change by a significant amount and be stable over a time
period before the pressure alert condition is asserted. The default settings of the pressure alert condition
on and off are 1.0 Bar/30s and 1.5 Bar/0s respectively.
The pressure alarm condition is similarly protected against instability which can be caused by small
fluctuations in pressure by virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control The default settings of the
pressure alarm condition on and off are 0.6 Bar/5s and 0.8 Bar/0s respectively.
th
16 PAGE 149 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Outside temperature interlock

Outside air temperature may be configured to influence the total number of chiller stages loaded and can
be used to prevent the full chiller system being run during conditions of low outside air temperature. This is
illustrated in Figure 7. It is a particularly useful interlock when used in conjunction with the ‘Chiller staging
and sequence control on direct strategy’ as it can offer some degree of control on the number of stages
running.
Note:
In this example the chiller system will only
enable up to 3 stages of chiller. This is
because the stage 4 interlock is on due to
the current outside air temperature value
Figure 7: Outside temperature interlock
Each chiller stage has a separate interlock condition set up using an adjustable time based hysteresis
control which is more fully described in “Common functions”. This ensures that the outside air temperature
has to change by a significant amount and be stable over a time period before the stage interlock condition
is asserted. The default settings of each stage interlock on and off are:
Stage 1: 14 °C/0s (interlock on) 16 °C/0s (interlock off)

th
16 PAGE 150 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Chiller alarm
Finally, and applying only to those chillers that also have a separate digital ‘chiller enable’ and internal
‘chiller alarm’ signals, it may be necessary to maintain the ‘enable’ signal even though the internal ‘chiller
alarm’ has been activated. The alternate action of removing the ‘enable’ when the chiller alarm has been
activated can, on some chillers, cause the ‘alarm’ condition to be deactivated thereby creating unstable
operation due to oscillating control signals. Figure 8 shows this chiller alarm option.
Figure 8: Behaviour on chiller alarm
th
16 PAGE 151 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Chiller staging and sequence control on direct strategy

This strategy applies to those applications of chillers where the method of chiller enable has been selected
as being ‘Direct’. It is illustrated in Figure 9. Control of the chiller stages is simply determined by a chiller
demand and each chiller stage is started in a time delayed sequence until either all of the available chillers
are started or the chiller demand has been removed in which case all the stages are stopped. This strategy
may be usefully implemented when the ‘outside temperature interlock’ is also used. The outside air
temperature interlock will determine the number of stages required to be run and this strategy will
sequentially run each stage, after a programmed delay.
Finally a chiller rotation sequence strategy defines which actual chiller load devices are enabled to make up
the required number of stages.
Select ‘Chiller enable Direct’

for this strategy
Link values
Cooling demand
(Cooling demand OR
zone 6 to zone 10)
C1 C2 C3 C4
Enable
* * * *
Sequence
Stage
Periodic
Hours run
Fault
Manual
Figure 9: Staging and sequence control strategy
th
16 PAGE 152 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Cooling demand (on direct)

‘Cooling demand’ may be enabled by the condition of any of the linked ‘Cooling demand’ signals being
‘True’. Figure 10 illustrates some examples of ‘cooling demand’.
Note: Note:
The chiller plant is in a ‘Ready’ condition The chiller plant is in a ‘Cooling demand’
because the time schedule is OFF condition because of at least one of the linked
distribution circuits
Figure 10: Cooling demand examples
Chiller staging strategy (on direct)

Each chiller stage is enabled in time sequence. Figure 11 shows the default enable time set points for each
of the 4 possible chiller stages. Stage 1 is enabled 30 seconds after ‘Cooling demand’ has been asserted.
Stage 2 is enabled after a 5 minute delay. The stages continue to be incrementally enabled until stage 4 is
enabled 5 minutes after the previous stage. The stages are all switched off together when the chiller plant
exits a ‘Cooling demand ’condition.
Stage 4
Stages OFF
Stages ON
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage 1
00:30
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15
Time (min)
th
16 PAGE 153 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Chiller sequencing strategy (on direct)

A chiller rotation or sequencing strategy is employed to equalise the operating life of the chillers. Output
from the staging strategy provides the chiller sequencer with a numeric value ranging from zero to 4 to
indicate the quantity of chiller stages that are required to be enabled.
The sequencing strategy then rotates a lead-lag sequence after the lead chiller has operated for a defined
that lead-lag rotation occurs may also be adjusted. The example shown in Figure 12 is of a four chiller
system which sequences every Monday at 14:00 hrs and currently chiller 4 is the lead chiller. On the next
anniversary, the sequence will rotate to be 1-3-4-0, followed afterwards by 3-4-1-0.
Next chiller number 1

Lead chiller number 4 Lag chiller number 3
Chiller 2 is unavailable
Figure 12: Chiller sequencing example
Chillers, however, may be either available, which is the normal condition, or unavailable and an example of
an unavailable chiller (chiller 2) in a system may be seen in Figure 12. A chiller may be unavailable for
If either option of rotate on running hours or rotate on period is chosen, then should a chiller become
stepped as illustrated in Figure 13.
right mouse click the sequence

button to manually step the sequence
Figure 13: Manual sequence
Finally, the sequence may be configured to include a chiller(s) which are always selected as the ‘lead
chiller’ or ‘Fixed primary chiller’ and maintains this priority regardless to the sequence of the remaining
chillers. It is considered to be ‘outside’ of sequence control.
th
16 PAGE 154 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
This concept of a ‘Fixed’ chiller is particularly suited to those applications which are utilising a high
efficiency chiller which should always be called first. Chiller 2 in the example shown in Figure 14 is a high
efficiency chiller which is fixed as the lead chiller. Chiller 1 is unavailable.
Figure 14: Fixed chiller example
To further extend the ‘fixed chiller’ feature, there is another option which allows you to configure a second
‘next’ chiller in addition to the first which can also be prioritised as the lead chiller if the first chiller becomes
unavailable. Chiller 4 in the example shown in Figure 15 is a second high efficiency chiller which is fixed as
the ‘next’ chiller if the primary chiller (chiller 2) becomes unavailable as it has done in the example.
Figure 15: Fixed ‘next’ chiller example
th
16 PAGE 155 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Chiller staging and sequence control on supply temperature strategy

as being ‘On supply temperature’. It is illustrated in Figure 16. Control of the chiller stages thereafter is
determined by the desired control setpoint which is based upon either a fixed internal common flow
temperature value, the minimum value of the external ‘link values’ or the minimum of these two. ‘Link
values’ are derived from the cooling distribution circuits that have been configured as ‘Desired temperature
zone (1-5)’ which this cooling plant must supply.
A Delta T (∆T) value, which is the difference between the desired control setpoint and the measured
common flow temperature, supplies a chiller staging strategy to determine the number of chiller stages
required for the demand condition. Finally a chiller rotation sequence strategy defines which actual chiller
load devices are enabled to make up the required number of stages.
Select ‘Chiller enable on

supply temperature’ for this
strategy
Link values
(Desired temperature Minimum
Minimum value
zone 1 to zone 5) Desired common (link/fixed)
flow temperature Desired control setpoint
Fixed value - ∆T
Link values
+
C1 C2 C3 C4
Enable
* * * *
Sequence
Stage
Periodic
Hours run
Fault
Manual
Delta T strategy (on supply temperature)

The calculated or desired control setpoint signal represents the required
primary flow temperature. This value is compared with the actual primary actual
flow temperature and gives a ∆T value.
desired
Note that in the example shown in Figure 17; ∆T = 0.5°C (6.5°C – 6.0°C)
Figure 17
th
16 PAGE 156 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Chiller staging strategy (on supply temperature)

Each chiller stage is enabled in proportion to the magnitude of the ∆T value. Figure 18 shows the default
enable set points for each of the 4 possible chiller stages. Stage 1 is enabled when ∆T reaches a value of
+3 °C. Stage 2 is enabled when ∆T reaches a value of +5 °C. The stages continue to be incrementally
enabled until stage 4 is enabled when ∆T reaches a value of +9 °C. As the magnitude of ∆T reduces, each
stage is enabled off in reverse sequence order.
Each chiller stage enable set points incorporate a default dead band of 4 °C between enabling on and off.
stage. The default value of all these timers is 1 minute.
Stage 4
Stages OFF
Stages ON
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage 1
∆T °C -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 ∆T °C
Chiller sequencing strategy (on supply temperature)

A chiller rotation or sequencing strategy is employed to equalise the operating life of the chillers and it
operates in the same manner as for the ‘chiller staging and sequence control on direct strategy’ to which
you are referred for more details.
th
16 PAGE 157 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Chiller staging and sequence control on load power strategy

as being ‘On load power’. It is illustrated in Figure 19. Control of the chiller stages thereafter is determined
by the desired load power from the cooling distribution circuits that have been configured as ‘Load power
zone (1-10)’ which this cooling plant must supply.
A desired load power value (%), which is the total load value (kW) proportion of the total available power
(kW), supplies a chiller staging strategy to determine the number of chiller stages required for the demand
condition. Finally a chiller rotation sequence strategy defines which actual chiller load devices are enabled
to make up the required number of stages.
Select ‘Chiller enable on load

power’ for this strategy
Linked load
Zone 1
power values
Zone 2
Sum
Zone 10
Desired load power (percent)
Math
Total available
power
C1 C2 C3 C4
Enable
* * * *
Sequence
Stage
Periodic
Hours run
Fault
Manual
Desired load power strategy (on load power)

The desired load power (%) is calculated as: (Total demand load power / Total available power * 100%).
th
16 PAGE 158 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Chiller staging strategy (on load power)

Each chiller stage is enabled in proportion to the magnitude of the desired load power value. Figure 20
shows the default enable set points for each of the 4 possible chiller stages.
Stage 4
Stages OFF
Stages ON
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage 1
Desired load power % 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Desired load

power %
Stage 1 is enabled when the desired load power reaches a value of 10%. Stage 2 is enabled when the
desired load power reaches a value of 25%. The stages continue to be incrementally enabled until stage 4
is enabled when the desired load power reaches a value of 75%. As the magnitude of the desired load
power reduces, each stage is enabled off in reverse sequence order.
Each chiller stage enable set points incorporate a default dead band of 5% between enabling on and off.
stage. The default value of all these timers is 30 seconds.
th
16 PAGE 159 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
The example illustrated in Figure 21 shows how two linked distribution circuit loads demand chilled water
from the chiller plant which has an available power capacity. The total load power is translated, by the
strategy in this application into a staged chiller supply:
The total power which is available from

the chiller system is configured here
These two distribution circuit zones are

currently demanding chilled water
The desired load power (%) is the proportion that

demand load power is compared to the total
available power
The
The desired
desired load
load power
power determines
determines the
the number
number
of
of stages
stages of
of chiller
chiller that
that are
are loaded
loaded
Figure 21: Chiller staging on load power example
Chiller sequencing strategy (on load power)

th
16 PAGE 160 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Chiller staging and sequence control staged externally strategy

as being ‘Staged externally’. It is illustrated in Figure 22. Control of the chiller stages is determined directly
by the boolean cooling demand signals from an external distribution strategy that has been configured as
st nd rd th
‘1 stage, 2 stage, 3 stage and 4 stage’ which this cooling plant must supply.
Finally a chiller rotation sequence strategy defines which actual chiller load devices are enabled to make up
the required number of stages.
This method of chiller control is intended to be of use to those who wish to create an external cooling
distribution circuit strategy with custom control logic rather than use the ‘cooling delivery’ super applications
provided in Vykon HVAC. In such an example, the custom logic would output up to four boolean cooling
demand signals, each demanding a chiller stage. The strategy described here simply converts those
boolean demands into sequenced chiller control via the sequence control strategy.
Select ‘Chiller enable staged

externally’ for this strategy
Linked individual chiller stage –
external cooling demand
1st stage
2nd stage
3rd stage
4th stage
C1 C2 C3 C4
Enable
* * * *
Sequence
Stage
Periodic
Hours run
Fault
Manual
th
16 PAGE 161 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Chiller staging strategy (staged externally)

Each chiller stage is enabled directly by an external boolean cooling demand signal
The example illustrated in Figure 23 shows how four linked cooling demand signals demand individual
stages of the chiller plant. Each load is controlling the switching of each one of the stages:
The four chiller stages are each

separately allocated to individual
external cooling demand signals
The current state of each cooling demand is

each enabling its own chiller stage
Each stage is enabled or

disabled accordingly
Figure 23: Chiller staging on external demand example
Chiller sequencing strategy

th
16 PAGE 162 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Transport system and pump sequence strategy

The Vykon HVAC chiller transport system has a number of primary and individual chiller pump options to
deliver chilled water to the delivery systems. The primary pumps are positioned in the return pipe work to
the chillers. Each chiller system may comprise a mixture of the following transport systems…
Individual chiller pumps with or without cut off valves

Single primary pump
Twin primary pumps with or without cut off valves
Figure 24 shows some Vykon HVAC graphic examples of these transport systems…
Individual chiller pump and cut off valve arrangements Primary pump
arrangements
Figure 24: Supported chiller transport systems in Vykon HVAC

When there is no cooling demand and no pump overrun, the chillers and all the circulation pumps are
disabled. In general and depending on what transport system options are selected, when there is a cooling
demand then the strategy for chiller enable begins by enabling the primary pump cut off valve. After the
valve has opened then the duty primary pump is enabled followed by chiller cut off valves and individual
chiller pumps. It is only after these are running the chillers are enabled according to the staging and
sequence control strategy.
Three pump control strategies are available for selection. These are…
Pump overrun
Pump prerun
Pump exercise
A pump ‘overrun’ condition starts after an operating period during which cold water has been distributed
around the primary and chilled water delivery systems. The purpose of pump overrun is to dissipate the
cooled water of these circuits to a consistent temperature throughout and to prevent chiller damage. The
individual chiller pump and cut off valve (if used) arrangement has an adjustable pump overrun time setting
and its default value is 5 minutes.
th
16 PAGE 163 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Where primary pumps are used there is an additional adjustable timer called ‘prerun’ to hold off subsequent
enabling of the chillers until water flow has been established. The default times for primary pump prerun
and overrun are 30 seconds and 10 minutes respectively.
described elsewhere in this document. It may be optionally selected for use by the chiller system pumps to
protect them from becoming unavailable because they have seized due to corrosion and precipitate build

When twin primary pumps, either with or without cut off valves, are used a pump duty standby or
primary pump system which sequences every Wednesday at 10:00 hrs and currently pump 1 is the lead or
duty pump. On the next anniversary, pump 2 will become the duty pump. During the changeover, when the
duty pump changes over, a period of overrun can also be configured. The default value is 5 seconds. This
is to ensure that there is no interruption of water flow at this changeover time.

A ‘sequence on fault only’ option is also available and the sequence may at any time be manually stepped.
th
16 PAGE 164 of 284
Cooling delivery PARTNER INFORMATION
The delivery system TRIDIUM
application
Cooling delivery - The delivery system application
Overview
The delivery system application provides a general purpose secondary circuit for the delivery of chilled
water. It comprises maintained or modulating, single or twin pump arrangements, restricting or diverting
control valve, monitoring devices and control strategies to maintain the supply temperature and pressure of
any connected secondary circuits. The delivery system is responsive to the demand of any secondary
circuits that are connected to it as well as being able to communicate with the chiller system for chilled
water demand temperature. The delivery system application can be found in the hvacAppsCoolingDelivery
module.
One or more delivery system applications may be used to distribute chilled water from a chiller plant to a
variety of cooling load applications. Each delivery system will respond to its load demand and pass that on
to the chiller plant. A typical application is shown in Figure 1 where two delivery systems distribute chilled
water from the chiller system to an air handling application and to a manifold, or header, which serves to
divide the chilled water flow into several routes for various chilled water (CHW) loads.
CHW
supply
Manifold
Fan coil
units
Air
Handling Chilled
Unit ceilings
Cooling Cooling
demand demand
signals signals
Chilled water generation
Delivery system Delivery system
Chiller enable, power and temperature demand signals
Figure 1: Delivery system applications
th
16 PAGE 165 of 284
application
In the delivery system example shown in Figure 2, a constant volume, variable temperature (CV/VT)
delivery system is controlling the supply temperature using a three port ‘mixing’ valve with the secondary
pump fitted on the load side of the bypass circuit. The twin pump arrangement also offers sequence control
strategies.
In an alternative arrangement, a delivery system maintaining the delivered chilled water at a constant
temperature and with differential pressure control using variable speed pumps and a modulating ‘mixing’
valve, is shown in Figure 3.
Figure 2: CV/VT controlled on supply temperature Figure 3: Pressurised supply
The following mechanical plant options are available in the delivery system application…

Maintained command (on/off) single or twin secondary pumps with or without cut off valves
Variable speed pumps
th
16 PAGE 166 of 284
application
The following control strategy options are available in the delivery system application…

Differential pressure control
Responsive to cooling demand from connected loads
Desired chiller temperature demand signal
Power load value to chiller system
Frost protection control
Pump prerun
Pump overrun
Pump exercise
Pump sequence control
Enable from chiller system
The application has two main optional control choices; temperature control and pressure control and either
or both may be selected to create an application. If temperature control is required then either a 3-port or
2-port control valve may be selected. If required, pump control is available to both these main options.
The overall strategy can be broken down into a number of discrete parts based on the various options that
are available and Figure 4 shows these parts. The control strategy for the delivery system is described in
the following chapters.
Pump and
pressure
control
Chiller
requirement
Desired
supply Control
temperature valve
Figure 4: Delivery system overall control strategy
th
16 PAGE 167 of 284
application
The delivery system application may be in one of the following states…
The delivery system has been disabled

System disabled
Failure There has been a failure of either the pumps or the cut off valves
Flow Water flow has been established
Enabled The delivery system has a connected load which is demanding a supply
of chilled water
Frost protection The delivery system is overridden by the frost limit application
Ready The delivery system does not have any current demand but it is not in a
disabled state
Figure 5: Delivery system states
th
16 PAGE 168 of 284
application
Control strategy
The control strategy for the delivery system is broken down into the following parts…
Desired supply temperature strategy: The desired supply temperature (calculated supply
temperature) is used as the setpoint of the supply control loop.
provided by the ‘desired supply temperature strategy’ and whose process variable is the supply
temperature value.
Frost protection strategy: The frost protection strategy ensures that the delivery system, if it is not
already in an operational mode, will enable the circulation pump to circulate the water.
Chiller requirement strategy: The chiller requirement strategy determines the temperature that is
returned to the cooling plant as a chilled water demand value. The chiller requirement strategy also
enables a ‘power load’ value to be returned to the cooling plant system.
Pump and pressure control strategy: The pump and pressure control contains strategies for
maintained and modulating single or twin pump control for sequenced duty standby rotation control,
pressure control, pump exercise, pump prerun and pump overrun.
Desired supply temperature strategy

Figure 6 illustrates the desired supply temperature strategy. The desired supply temperature (calculated
supply temperature) is used as the setpoint of the supply control loop and is active only when the
‘temperature control’ option (either ‘2-port control valve’ or ‘3-port control valve’) is selected. The strategy
described here provides a number of options for the provision of this value. One of the following sources
can be selected…
The desired supply temperature can be derived from the outside air temperature via a compensated heat
curve to give weather compensation. Compensated water temperature control is where the flow water
compensation). A description of operation of the heat curve can be found in “Common functions”.
The desired supply temperature can be derived from an external cooling demand value from a load which is
supplied by this application.
The desired supply temperature can be the lowest of the heat curve and external values or finally it can be
from a fixed internal value.
desired supply
temperature
Outside air heat

External signals
temperature curve Calculated

Heat curve Internal (desired) supply
temperature
lowest
Lowest of external
Cooling demand or heat curve External
value
Figure 6: Desired supply temperature Temperature control
th
16 PAGE 169 of 284
application
Control valve
The modulating control valve is controlled by a PID loop whose setpoint has been provided by the ‘desired
supply temperature strategy’ and whose process variable is the supply temperature value. It is active only
when the ‘temperature control’ option (either ‘2-port control valve’ or ‘3-port control valve’) is selected.
Figure 7 illustrates the valve control strategy.
0% = full AB
mix BAB
B
100% = full A
desired supply temperature flow A AB
(from desired supply
temperature strategy)
sp Control
External signals
PID valve
Supply pv loop
temperature
0% = closed
100%= open
Figure 7: Control valve Temperature control
Frost protection strategy

The frost protection strategy ensures that the delivery system, if it is not already in an operational mode, will
enable the circulation pump to circulate the water. Frost protection is simply configured by linking ‘Frost
limit’ to an appropriate ‘outside temperature’ application. Once linked and under active frost limit
conditions, the pump (or the duty pump if two pumps are configured) will be switched to an active state. If
cut off valves are used then the pump enable will wait until the corresponding valve is opened before the
pump is enabled. A default time of 2 minutes is allowed as the stroke time for the valve and only after this
has expired, the pump will be enabled.
Figure 8 illustrates the frost protection strategy.
Figure 8: Frost protection
th
16 PAGE 170 of 284
application
Chiller requirement strategy

The chiller requirement strategy determines the temperature that is returned to the cooling plant as a
cooling demand value and is active only when the ‘temperature control’ option (either ‘2-port control valve’
or ‘3-port control valve’) is selected. The cooling plant and cooling delivery applications are designed such
that it is the responsibility of each cooling distribution circuit to request its own cooling demand temperature.
Each circuit is allocated to a specific cooling plant and the cooling plant system will produce chilled water to
satisfy the minimum value of all its supported distribution circuits.
The chiller requirement strategy also enables a ‘power load’ value to be returned to the cooling plant.
The distribution system, controlled on supply temperature, uses the desired supply setpoint as the basis for
its cooling demand or desired chilled water temperature. However this can be modified before the signal is
output to the cooling plant system by a ‘transport losses option.
Figure 9 illustrates the chiller requirement strategy with optional transport losses.
Transport losses provides a means of adjusting the calculated supply temperature value to take account of
the temperature gain which will occur in the pipe work between the cooling plant system and the distribution
circuit. The calculated supply temperature is adjusted by a fixed value and this new value is then the
desired chilled water temperature signal which is sent to the cooling plant.
The zone power load is a preset internal value which has a default of 10 kW and is also returned to the
cooling plant.
Desired chilled
desired supply temperature water temperature
(from desired supply Transport
temperature strategy) losses
Power load
Zone power to chillers
load
Figure 9: Chiller requirements Temperature control
th
16 PAGE 171 of 284
application
Pump and pressure control strategy

The pump and pressure control contains strategies for maintained and modulating single or twin pump
control for sequenced duty standby rotation control, pressure control, pump exercise, pump prerun and
pump overrun.
When there the cooling plant enable is false or there is no supply demand and no pump overrun all the
secondary pumps are disabled. In general and depending on what transport system options are selected,
when there is a supply demand then the strategy begins by enabling the duty pump cut off valve. After the
valve has opened then the duty secondary pump is enabled. Figure 10 illustrates the pump and pressure
control strategy.
Interval Duration
Pump exercise
Interval
method
Pump exercise Interval
Direct None
Single pump
System enable System
state
Twin Twin pumps
pumps
with cut off
Prerun Pump valves
prerun and
Overrun overrun
Periodic
External signals
Hours run Sequence

control
Fault
Desired Manual
differential
pressure
sp
PID
pv loop
Differential
pressure
Figure 10: Pump and pressure control strategy Temperature and pressure control
Pump overrun
Pump prerun
Pump exercise
A pump ‘overrun’ condition starts after an operating period during which chilled water has been distributed
around the delivery system. The purpose of pump overrun is to dissipate the chilled energy contained in
the water of these circuits. The pump and cut off valve (if used) arrangement has an adjustable pump
overrun time setting and its default value is 5 minutes.
There is an additional adjustable timer called ‘prerun’ to hold off subsequent enabling of cooling demand
until water flow has been established. The default time for pump prerun is 10 seconds
described elsewhere in this document. It may be optionally selected for use by the delivery system pumps
to protect them from becoming unavailable because they have seized due to corrosion and precipitate build
th
16 PAGE 172 of 284
application

When twin secondary pumps, either with or without cut off valves, are used a pump duty standby or
secondary pump system which sequences every Wednesday at 10:00 hrs and currently pump 1 is the lead
or duty pump. On the next anniversary, pump 2 will become the duty pump. During the changeover, when
the duty pump changes over, a period of overrun can also be configured. The default value is 5 seconds.
This is to ensure that there is no interruption of water flow at this changeover time.
Pressure control strategy

If pressure control is required then a modulating signal is provided by a pressure control PID loop which
references the differential pressure sensor as its process variable. Setpoint of the loop is provided by an
internal fixed ‘desired differential pressure’ value which is initially set as a default of 50 bar.
th
16 PAGE 173 of 284
application
th
16 PAGE 174 of 284
The pre controlled group TRIDIUM
application
Cooling delivery - The pre-controlled group application
Overview
The cooling delivery pre-controlled group application provides a chilled water delivery secondary circuit
comprising pump, control valve, monitoring devices and control strategies to maintain the chilled water
(CHW) demand of a zone of mechanical equipment such as fan coil units (FCU) or chilled ceilings. The
pre-controlled group application offers valve arrangement options for constant volume, variable
temperature and constant temperature, variable volume circuits as well as control using supply or space
temperature. The pre-controlled group application can be found in the hvacAppsCoolingDelivery module.
The following mechanical plant options are available in the pre-controlled group application…

th
16 PAGE 175 of 284
application
The following control strategy options are available in the pre-controlled group application…
Time schedule, optimiser and timed extension occupancy control

Desired chiller temperature demand signal
Adjustment of load power
Frost limit control
Outside air temperature condition control
Dew point protection control
Pump overrun
Pump exercise
Enable from chiller system
pre-controlled group is controlled on supply temperature or on space temperature.
The control strategy for the pre-controlled group is described in the following chapters and for reasons of
clarity is structured as strategies which depend on the control mode and those which are common to both
modes.
Control mode
dependent
strategies
Cooling
Setpoint
demand
source
temperature
selection
Desired
temperature
Dew point Control

control valve
Common
strategies
Zone load Dew point Pump
power control
Occupancy Outside air Frost limit

time temperature
condition
Figure 3: Pre-controlled group overall control strategy
th
16 PAGE 176 of 284
application
The pre-controlled group application may be in one of the following states:
Off The pre-controlled group is off
Frost protection Frost protection override is active
Enabled The pre-controlled group is currently in an enabled state
Time extension The time extension override is active
Dew point protection Dew point protection has become active
Failure An alarm is active
System disabled System disabled by the chiller plant
Figure 4: pre-controlled group states
th
16 PAGE 177 of 284
application
Common strategies
some strategies whose operation is identical to both. Here they are …
a time extension override or internal adaptive optimiser
Total zone load power: A fixed value can be entered for the ‘Total zone load power’ for this cooling
delivery circuit
General pump control strategy: When there is no cooling demand and no pump overrun the
circulation pump is disabled. In general when there is a cooling demand then the strategy for circuit
Dewpoint control strategy: Reset of the chilled water flow temperature to maintain it above the room
temperature dewpoint by a small temperature differential
Outside temperature condition: Outside temperature condition is a simple energy saving strategy
which can prevent the controlled cooling zone from being enabled during times of low outside air
temperature
Occupancy time
option of occupancy being extended from the normal schedule by means of a time extension override or
reference to an internal adaptive optimiser to determine the optimum start time based on the space
temperature value
Figure 1.
Time extension
(maintained)
Current state
External signals
Time & Occupancy

next event
Outside air
adaptive
temperature
optimiser
Space
temperature
Desired space temperature

at occupancy
Figure 1: Occupancy Common
Total zone load power

One of the control options of the cooling plant application (Max 4 chillers) is to control the chiller stages by
the desired load power from the cooling distribution circuits. A fixed value (default 50 KW) can therefore be
entered for the ‘Total zone load power’ for this cooling delivery circuit
th
16 PAGE 178 of 284
application

When there is no cooling demand and no pump overrun the circulation pump is disabled. In general when
there is a cooling demand then the strategy for circuit enable begins by enabling the pump and then
Pump overrun
Pump exercise
Frost protection
A pump ‘overrun’ condition starts after an operating period during which cold water has been distributed
around the secondary circuit. The purpose of pump overrun is to dissipate the cooling energy contained in
the water of the circuit. The circulation pump has an adjustable pump overrun time setting and its default
value is 5 minutes.
Under conditions of frost limit the pump may be set to either an on or an off condition.
On cooling demand Start circulation

pump
On enable
Off On
Interval Duration
External signals
Pump
exercise
Interval Off On
Pump exercise Interval method
Circulation pump at
Direct Pump frost limit
control
Pump overrun
Frost limit
Pump
th
16 PAGE 179 of 284
application
Dewpoint control strategy

For some HVAC applications such as the control of chilled ceilings, it is necessary to anticipate the
formation of condensation on a chilled surface. The ceiling panel and associated pipework run several
degrees below room temperature and condensation will form if the coldest surface, typically the incoming
chilled water flow pipe, falls below the local air dewpoint. The control of such applications must ensure that
no condensation is formed which could drip into the occupied space. Condensation is prevented either by:
Control of the zone air dewpoint by dehumidification of ventilation air

Reset of the chilled water flow temperature to maintain it above the room temperature dewpoint by a
small temperature differential, typically 2 K
The dewpoint is the temperature to which a given volume of air must be cooled (at constant pressure) for
water vapour to condense in the air. The condensed water is called ‘dew’ and the dewpoint is the
saturation point of the air. The dewpoint is associated with relative humidity (RH) of the space air. A high
RH indicates that the dewpoint is closer to the current air temperature. An RH of 100% indicates that the
dewpoint equals the air temperature.
The following simple equation (which is accurate to ±1 °C at RH>50%) illustrates the relationship between
dewpoint (Td), dry bulb temperature (T) and relative humidity (RH):
For every 1 °C difference in the dew point and dry bulb temperatures, the
Td = T – (100 – RH)
relative humidity decreases by 5%, starting with RH=100% when the dew point
5 equals the dry bulb temperature.
Both types of control mode operation (on supply or space temperature) contain an optional dewpoint
protection control strategy. Note that the dewpoint control option will only be available if a ‘space relative
humidity’ sensor has first been configured. The dewpoint calculation and the associated dewpoint offset, to
allow for a safe differential temperature above the room temperature dewpoint, are illustrated alongside the
dewpoint control settings tab in Figure 7:
Calculated dewpoint
External signals
Space
temperature
Dewpoint
Space calculation
humidity
Dewpoint
offset add
Desired safe
supply
temperature
Figure 7: Dewpoint calculation
th
16 PAGE 180 of 284
application
There are two control variants for dewpoint protection control. These are:
Adjustment of supply temperature setpoint

With a dewpoint PID control loop
Adjustment of the supply temperature setpoint is a straightforward technique where the supply temperature
control loop is provided with either the ‘desired supply temperature’ setpoint or the ‘desired safe supply
temperature’ setpoint, the later being provided from the dewpoint calculation. It is illustrated in Figure 8.
The maximum value of either of these is selected as the supply temperature setpoint and this therefore
ensures a ‘safe’ setpoint value. Note that this control variant is only available if the control mode selected is
‘control on supply temperature’.
Desired supply
temperature
Space
temperature
Dewpoint
Space calculation
External signals
humidity
Dewpoint sp
add max PID loop
offset
(cooling
Supply pv mode) (control valve)
temperature
Figure 8: Setpoint adjustment Control on supply temperature
The second control variant for dewpoint protection control utilises an extra ‘Dewpoint PID’ control loop
which, in difference to the basic cooling PID loop, is configured in a ‘heating’ mode. This variant is available
for both ‘control on space and control on supply temperature’ modes and is illustrated in Figure 9. In
summary the basic cooling PID loop and the ‘Dewpoint PID’ loop are engineered to operate in opposition to
one another and the resulting control valve output is generated by subtracting the dewpoint PID output (B)
from the cooling PID output (A).
sp
PID loop
Space or supply (cooling
temperature pv mode)
Space
temperature A
Dewpoint
Space calculation A-B
External signals
humidity (control valve)

B
Dewpoint sp
offset add
PID loop
(heating
Supply pv mode)
temperature
Figure 9: With dewpoint PID Control on space or supply temperature
th
16 PAGE 181 of 284
application
A description of the operation of the dewpoint PID is best illustrated by the examples shown in Figure 10
(control on supply temperature) and Figure 11 (control on space temperature). Both behave in a similar
manner.
The ‘control on supply temperature’ example illustrates how, while the ‘desired safe supply temperature’
remains lower than the ‘actual supply temperature’, the control valve directly follows the output of the
‘cooling PID’ (A) because the ‘dewpoint PID’ (B) has no effect in the (A-B) calculation.
When the dewpoint of the space increases and the ‘desired safe supply temperature’ becomes greater than
the ‘actual supply temperature’, the ‘dewpoint PID’ will start to take effect. The control valve will be closed
in proportion to the magnitude of the ‘dewpoint PID’ output via the (A-B) calculation. The control valve will
be fully closed and remain closed if the output from the ‘dewpoint PID’ is equal to or greater than the output
from the ‘cooling PID’.
Actual supply temperature

°C
Desired safe supply temperature
Desired supply temperature
%
PID (cooling mode) output (A)
Dewpoint PID (heating mode) output (B)

0
Control valve (A-B output)
Figure 10: Dewpoint PID operation Control on supply temperature
th
16 PAGE 182 of 284
application
Just like the ‘control on supply temperature’ example, the ‘control on space temperature’ example illustrates
how, while the ‘desired safe supply temperature’ remains lower than the ‘actual supply temperature’, the
control valve directly follows the output of the ‘cooling PID’ (A) because the ‘dewpoint PID’ (B) has no effect
in the (A-B) calculation.
When the dewpoint of the space increases and the ‘desired safe supply temperature’ becomes greater than
the ‘actual supply temperature’, the ‘dewpoint PID’ will start to take effect. The control valve will be closed
in proportion to the magnitude of the ‘dewpoint PID’ output via the (A-B) calculation. The control valve will
be fully closed and remain closed if the output from the ‘dewpoint PID’ is equal to or greater than the output
from the ‘cooling PID’. Although the output from the ‘cooling PID’ in this example represents space
temperature control, the overall effect of the dewpoint PID is the same as the ‘control on supply
temperature’ example.
°C
Actual space temperature
Actual supply temperature

°C
Desired safe supply temperature
%
PID (cooling mode) output (A)
Dewpoint PID (heating mode) output (B)

0
Control valve (A-B output)
Figure 11: Dewpoint PID operation Control on space temperature
th
16 PAGE 183 of 284
application
Outside air temperature condition

Outside temperature condition is a simple energy saving strategy which can prevent the controlled cooling
zone from being enabled during times of low outside air temperature.
The outside air temperature is monitored by a hysteresis control which can be set such that if the outside
air temperature is below a certain value then the cooling distribution circuit is disabled. Figure 12 illustrates
the strategy. The signal is protected against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in outside
air temperature by virtue of an adjustable time based hysteresis control. This ensures that the outside air
temperature has to change by a significant amount and be stable over a time period before the control is
switched. The default settings that the outside air temperature condition requires the outside air
temperature to be before it will assert disable and enable are 15°C /1s and 17°C/1s respectively.
External signals
Outside air Hysteresis

temperature Enable / Disable
Figure 12: Outside air temperature condition Common
th
16 PAGE 184 of 284
application

A modulating control valve is controlled by a cooling mode PID loop whose setpoint has been provided from
one of various sources and whose process variable is the supply temperature value. The control valve
strategy is illustrated in Figure 13 and it comprises the following:
Setpoint source selection

Valve position setting at frost limit or pump exercise
Cooling mode PID loop control on supply temperature
Dewpoint protection by setpoint adjustment or dewpoint PID
Cooling demand temperature value output to chiller plant
Frost limit
Interval Duration
Or
Interval Pump exercise

Pump exercise Interval method Valve at frost
limit/ pump
Direct Fixed setting exercise
Valve setting 0
Closed
External
setpoint External
Fixed Desired supply
Outside air heat
temperature curve Outside temperature
temperature
Setpoint
heat curve
Cooling
demand
temperature
Min. supply
temp.
limit
Max.
supply max
Control
No valve
With sp
External signals
dewpoint PID PID loop

0 max (cooling
Yes pv mode) No Yes
Setpoint Dewpoint
adjustment control
A
A-B
Space B
temperature Dewpoint
Dewpoint control type
Space calculation 0% = closed
humidity 0 100%= open
Setpoint With
adjustment dewpoint
Dewpoint sp PID
add 0% = full AB
offset
PID loop mix BAB
(heating B
Supply pv mode) 100% = full A
temperature
flow A AB
th
16 PAGE 185 of 284
application
Setpoint source selection (supply)

The source of the setpoint for the main cooling PID loop can be derived from one of three places:
Fixed: A fixed setpoint value can be configured. The default is 6 °C

External: The setpoint can be derived from an externally connected circuit
Outside temperature heat curve: The setpoint can be derived from the outside air temperature via a
compensated heat curve to give weather compensation. Compensated water temperature control is
where the flow water temperature setpoint is varied as a function of the measured outside air
temperature (weather compensation). A description of operation of the heat curve can be found in
“Common functions”.
Regardless of whichever source is selected for the setpoint, its value is further range checked by a limit
protection control to ensure that the setpoint does not exceed either an upper or lower boundary. This
control has minimum and maximum default values of 6 °C and 20 °C respectively.
Valve position setting at frost limit or pump exercise (supply)

The valve position can be selected as being closed or open to a fixed setting to enable a water flow if a frost
limit condition occurs or the pump exercise application is active. The default fixed setting value of the valve
position is 30%. If either a frost limit condition or pump exercise condition occurs whist the delivery circuit is
in an operational mode and providing the valve position value is higher than that of the frost or pump
exercise setting then the valve will drive to the higher value position.
Pump exercise
described elsewhere in this document.
Cooling mode PID loop control on supply temperature (supply)

In its simplest configuration without any dewpoint protection control selected, the modulating control valve
position is set by the output of the main cooling PID loop. The process variable of the loop is the supply
flow temperature.
Dewpoint protection by setpoint adjustment or dewpoint PID (supply)

Dewpoint protection may be provided by one of two optional control variants, setpoint adjustment or
dewpoint PID. A description of operation of the dewpoint protection control can be found in the ‘Common
strategies’ section of this application.
Cooling demand temperature value output to chiller plant (supply)

Control of the chiller stages in the cooling plant can be determined by a desired control setpoint which is
based upon either a fixed internal common flow temperature value, the minimum value of the external ‘link
values’ or the minimum of these two. ‘Link values’ are derived from the cooling distribution circuits that
have been configured as ‘Desired temperature zone (1-5)’ which the cooling plant must supply.
The ‘link value’ from this cooling delivery circuit is the processed setpoint value of the cooling PID loop.
th
16 PAGE 186 of 284
application

A modulating control valve is controlled by a cooling mode PID loop whose setpoint has been provided from
one of various sources and whose process variable is the space temperature value. The control valve
strategy is illustrated in Figure 14 and it comprises the following:
Setpoint source selection

Valve position setting at frost limit or pump exercise
Cooling mode PID loop control on space temperature
Dewpoint protection by dewpoint PID
Frost limit
Interval Duration
Or
Interval Pump exercise

Pump exercise Interval method
Valve at frost limit/
Direct Fixed setting pump exercise
Valve setting 0
Closed
External
setpoint External Setpoint
adjustment Desired space

Internal temperature
External signals
External max
adjustment Control
sp valve
PID loop
(cooling
pv mode) No Yes
Dewpoint
Space control
temperature A
Dewpoint
Space calculation A-B
humidity
B
Dewpoint 0% = closed
add sp 100%= open
offset
PID loop
(heating
Supply pv mode) 0% = full AB
temperature mix BAB
B
100% = full A
flow A AB
Setpoint source selection (space)

The source of the setpoint for the main cooling PID loop can be derived from one of three places:
Internal: A fixed setpoint value can be configured. The default is 20 °C

External: The setpoint can be derived from an externally connected circuit
External adjustment: The externally derived setpoint can be modified with a fixed adjustment
th
16 PAGE 187 of 284
application
Valve position setting at frost limit or pump exercise (space)

The valve position can be selected as being closed or open to a fixed setting to enable a water flow if a frost
limit condition occurs or the pump exercise application is active. The default fixed setting value of the valve
position is 30%. If either a frost limit condition or pump exercise condition occurs whist the delivery circuit is
in an operational mode and providing the valve position value is higher than that of the frost or pump
exercise setting then the valve will drive to the higher value position.
Pump exercise
described elsewhere in this document.
Cooling mode PID loop control on space temperature (space)

In its simplest configuration without any dewpoint protection control selected, the modulating control valve
position is set by the output of the main cooling PID loop. The process variable of the loop is the space
temperature.
Dewpoint protection by dewpoint PID (space)

Dewpoint protection may be provided by a dewpoint PID. A description of operation of the dewpoint
protection control can be found in the ‘Common strategies’ section of this application.
Note that the control on space temperature mode strategy does not provide a cooling demand temperature
value to the cooling plant. However both control mode strategies do provide a boolean demand (true/false)
status to the cooling plant which represent the enabled or disabled condition of the distribution circuit.
th
16 PAGE 188 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
The air handling unit TRIDIUM
application
The Air Handling Unit application
Overview
The air handling unit application comprises mechanical systems for ventilation, heat recovery,
humidification and methods for heating and cooling the supply air.
Figure 1 shows an example of an air handling system with dampers, filters, supply and extract fans, heater,
humidification along with a number of heat recovery options.
Heat recovery options

Heat wheel
Run
around coil PHE
modulating PHE Open
Close Mixing
dampers
Figure 1: An air handling system application
The ventilation system in the air handling unit application comprises six mechanical devices, the outside air
damper, exhaust air damper, extract air filter, supply air filter, extract fan and supply fan. Filtration of
outside air is required to remove contaminants from the air supply and protect the mechanical plant. The
ventilation system includes options for the monitoring of filter differential pressure levels to warn of
blockages and dirty filters. Supply and extract fans form the final part of the ventilation system. Various
control options are provided within the application to support different types of fan motor configurations.
Heat recovery is a mechanical ventilation system that recovers energy from exhausted indoor air and
transfers it to incoming air. There are various different methods for achieving this and four popular types,
the thermal wheel, run-around coil, mixing dampers and the fixed plate heat exchanger are available as
options of the heat recovery system. The mixing damper control strategy includes options for ‘comfort’ or
‘economy’ control.
th
16 PAGE 189 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
To be comfortable, people require a certain level of ambient humidity and the Vykon HVAC air handling unit
application provides a means of regulating the humidity via mechanical humidification equipment.
Humidification is achieved using liquid atomisers which distribute moisture to incoming air, coupled with
accurate sensors which measure ambient relative humidity (RH). Humidification control is provided using
supply, space or return RH.
Heating of the air in the air handling unit application uses a low temperature hot water (LTHW) coil. Water
temperature is controlled in the coil using a pump and modulating 2 or 3 port valves which can be
mechanically positioned in supply or return pipework. The heating coil is used when the measured supply
air temperature is less than the setpoint and any heat recovery has been fully utilised.
Cooling of the air in the air handling unit application uses either a chilled water (CHW) cooling coil or up to
four stages of direct expansion (DX) cooling coils. CHW temperature is controlled in the coil using a pump
and modulating 2 or 3 port valves which can be mechanically positioned in supply or return pipework. The
CHW or DX coil cools the supply air to provide the required air temperature setpoint based on space, return
or supply air after any free cooling available from a mixing damper system has been fully utilised.
Application selection
The content of the AHU application is available in several Vykon HVAC AHU super applications which are
summarised in the table below. Every one of these AHU super applications contains the ventilation,
heating, cooling and humidification but the method of heat recovery is restricted to one option. Therefore
when selecting an AHU super application the choice is dependent upon whether heat recovery is required
and then which type is used.
Heat recovery wheel
(modulating bypass)
(open/close bypass)
Ventilation system
Mixing dampers
Run around coil
exchanger
exchanger
Humidifier
Plate heat
Plate heat
Heater
Cooler
Application name
AHU_H_C_H
AHU_HeatWheel
AHU_RunAroundCoil
AHU_PHE_Modulating
AHU_PHE_OpenClose
AHU_MixingDampers
AHU application selection
th
16 PAGE 190 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application

A number of enablers, interlocks and alarms are available in this AHU application which are aimed at
adverse environmental and mechanical conditions. The AHU application has a number of prioritised states
which are displayed on the graphic and are illustrated in Figure 2:
Emergency shut down This is the highest priority override
Smoke alarm A smoke alarm active
Fire interlock The fire application active
Frost A frost condition from the water based heater or cooler is active
Alarm A general alarm condition is active
Delayed start-up Delayed start up is in progress
Night purge The night purge application is active
Time extension A time extension is active
Preheat An optimiser preheat condition is active
Enabled The AHU is enabled and running normally
Pump overrun A pump overrun condition is active in the water based heater or cooler
Off The AHU is switched off. This is the lowest priority of override
Figure 2: AHU system states
th
16 PAGE 191 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Control strategy overview

The AHU application is built from a number of separate control strategies which are summarised in
Figure 3.
Delayed start-up method: The delayed start-up method strategy controls the start-up of the AHU.
With its two output signals, ‘Enable’ and ‘Delayed start-up’, it controls the start-up of AHU components
in order to protect the whole air system and the building fabric from the effects of the immediate
introduction of low temperature outside air into the space
Supply temperature: This strategy determines the supply temperature value which will be used as a
setpoint for the various air system heating and cooling components
Heating and cooling staging: This strategy provides an output signal to enable any of the four
sources of heating and cooling in the air system, namely the heater, the cooler and in the heat recovery
unit (HRU), the HRU heater or the HRU cooler
Low / High fan speed control: This strategy provides selection of the control options for two speed
(Low / High) supply and extract fans. The Low / High fans can either be those configured to the
dedicated 2-HILO module or those configured to separate digital output channels on other output
modules
Filters Extract fan
Delayed
start-up
Run around coil
Heat recovery wheel

(modulating bypass)
Plate heat exchanger Low/High Fan
(open/close bypass) fan speed modulating
control control
Mixing dampers
Supply
temperature
Chilled water
Heating &
cooling
Heater Supply fan Humidifier
DX chiller
Figure 3: AHU control strategy summary showing major dependencies
th
16 PAGE 192 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Fan modulating control: This strategy provides a modulating control signal for each of the supply and
extract fans and is used to control either the modulating or on / off-modulating fan types that are
configured in the ‘supply fan control strategy’ and ‘extract fan control strategies’
Filters: This strategy controls the configuration and the monitoring of the inlet and extract filters. Each
filter circuit provides two command signals, ‘filter dirty’ and ‘flow failure’
Supply fan control: This strategy provides selection of the following mechanical plant ventilation
options with respect to the supply of air; supply fan, outside air damper and supply air flow detection. It
also caters for the supply fan interlocks for flow failure, outside air damper, fire override and overrun
after a cooling demand as well as automatically responding to control from the delayed start-up method
Extract fan control: This strategy provides selection of the following mechanical plant ventilation
options with respect to the extract of air; extract fan, exhaust air damper and extract air flow detection.
It also caters for the extract fan interlocks for flow failure, exhaust air damper and fire override as well
as automatically responding to control from the delayed start-up method
Heater control: This is the control strategy for the water based heater component within the AHU. It
provides the following output signals; modulating valve control, on/off signal to the heater circulation
pump and heat demand signal to the heating plant which specifies the desired boiler temperature
Chilled water cooler control: This is the control strategy for the chilled water cooler component within
the AHU. It provides the following output signals; modulating valve control, on/off signal to the cooler
circulation pump and cooling demand signal to the chiller plant
DX chiller control: This is the control strategy for the DX chiller component within the AHU. Up to 4
DX chiller stages may be configured
Humidifier control: This is the control strategy for the humidifier component within the AHU. The
strategy provides both on/off and modulating signals to suit a variety of humidifier products
Heat recovery run around coil: This is the control strategy for the heat recovery run around coil
component within the AHU. Both cooling and reheating energy is saved by the run around coil and in
this AHU application it is used to pre-cool or pre-heat incoming outside air with extract air from the
conditioned space
Heat recovery wheel control: This is the control strategy for the heat recovery wheel component
within the AHU. Both cooling and reheating energy is saved by the heat wheel and in this AHU
application it is used to pre-cool or pre-heat incoming outside air with extract air from the conditioned
space
Heat recovery plate heat exchanger (modulating bypass): This is the control strategy for the heat
recovery fixed plate heat exchanger (modulating bypass) component within the AHU. The control
strategy for modulating the rate of heat transfer is to control the ‘face’ and ‘bypass’ air dampers which
are arranged in the inlet air stream and these regulate the amount of fresh air passing over the fixed
plates
Heat recovery plate heat exchanger (open / close bypass): This is the control strategy for the heat
recovery fixed plate heat exchanger (open / close bypass) component within the AHU. In this strategy
the bypass damper is controlled by an open / close signal:
Heat recovery mixing dampers: This is the control strategy for the heat recovery mixing dampers
component within the AHU. Depending on mechanical configuration, each air damper set may be
controlled separately or with combined signals. In this strategy the mixing dampers are controlled by a
choice of modulating signals
th
16 PAGE 193 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Delayed start-up method strategy

The delayed start-up method strategy controls the start-up of the Air Handling Unit. With its two output
signals, ‘Enable’ and ‘Delayed start-up’, it controls the start-up of AHU components in order to protect the
whole air system and the building fabric from the effects of the immediate introduction of low temperature
outside air into the space. If selected and when initiated, signals from the delayed start-up method logic will
delay the starting of the supply fan and heat recovery components until the system has established a safe
working temperature and is able then to deal with the thermal shock caused by the introduction of low
temperature outside air.
Specifically, the water based heater coil is at risk from low temperature outside air before it attains a
manageable working temperature and the heat recovery equipment should also be given time to reach
temperature before the introduction of outside air.
In addition, the logic of the delayed start-up method protects against problems caused by the air system
restarting after being shut down due to an equipment failure. Upon clearing of the failure, which may have
caused the air system to be off for a prolonged period of time, the delayed start-up method will reinstate the
start-up delay to enable the air system to restart in a safe and organised manner.
It is important to note that when a delayed start-up method is chosen, each air system component must
also be configured, to behave appropriately to the action of the delayed start-up signals
Figure 1 illustrates the logic strategy of the delayed start-up method. . The logic provides two main signals
to the air system namely, ‘Enable’ and ‘Delayed start-up’. It also provides a ‘Space temp limit’ command
signal to the ‘supply temperature strategy’. Providing that the system should be enabled by either a time
schedule, time extension, optimiser, space temperature limit or by an external signal and that there are no
outstanding failure signals such as from flow failure alarms, thermal overloads or frost-stat, these two
output signals are controlled. There are three methods of operation namely, none, on time duration or on
heater return temperature and the operation of each method is illustrated by the timing diagrams in figures
2, 3 and 4.
Space temp limit

Time
Delayed start-up
schedule
method
Time extension (maintained)
External enable Or
O/S temp
Duration
No
External signals
Yes
Optimised
No Yes Enable
time Delay
schedule Space &
temp. limit
τ
Optimiser (combined)
Space air
Delay
temperature &
Outside air τ Delayed
temperature start-up
Heater return O/S temp

temperature
Return temp
Any failure
Figure 1: Delayed start-up method strategy
th
16 PAGE 194 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
true
Enable
. false
true
Delayed start-up
. false
Heater return
temperature 25
Don’t care
ºC
Outside air Don’t care
temperature 5
true
Failure
. false
Time schedule,
Time extension, true
Optimiser, Space false
limit or External
. Time
Figure 2: Delayed start-up method = None
Figure 2 illustrates the operation of the delayed start up method if it is not chosen to operate by choice of
the ‘None’ selection. The Enable signal simply operates in synchronism with the overall system enable
signal which is derived from either, the time schedule, a time extension, an optimiser, the space
temperature limit or an external enable signal. The outside air and heater return temperatures are not
relevant. If a system failure occurs then the Enable signal returns to a ‘false’. Note that the ‘Delayed start-
up signal does not operate in this method.
th
16 PAGE 195 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
true
Enable
. false
true
Delayed start-up
. false
Heater return
temperature 25
Don’t care
ºC
Outside air
temperature 5

true
Failure
. false
Time schedule,
true
Time extension,
limit or External
5 mins Time
.
‘Duration of
delayed start-up’
Figure 3: Delayed start-up method = On time duration
Figure 3 illustrates the operation of the delayed start up method if the ‘On time duration’ is selected. Please
note that this method option is only available if a heater return temperature sensor has been configured.
The heater return temperature is not relevant but the outside air temperature is. If the outside air
temperature is above a preset value (default 5ºC) (indicated 1 in the diagram) then the Enable signal simply
operates in synchronism with the overall system enable signal which is derived from either the time
schedule, a time extension, an optimiser, the space temperature limit or an external enable signal. If a
system failure occurs then the Enable signal returns to a ‘false’. Note that the ‘Delayed start-up signal does
not operate at this time.
If, on the other hand, the outside air temperature is below the preset value (indicated 2 in the diagram)
when the overall system enable signal operates, then the ‘Delayed start-up’ signal goes ‘true’ which is used
by air system components to switch on whilst those components operating from the ‘Enable’ signal are held
off. The ‘Delayed start-up’ signal will remain in this ‘true’ condition for a time set by the ‘Duration of delayed
start-up’ preset (default 5 min), regardless of any subsequent change to the value of the outside air
temperature. After At the expiry of the delayed start-up’ preset time, the ‘Delayed start-up’ signal goes
‘false’ and the ‘Enable’ signal goes ‘true thereby switching on the remaining air system components.
The logic is protected against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in outside temperature
by virtue of an adjustable time based ‘hysteresis lag’ setting (default 10 s). The outside air temperature
value must be maintained for the duration of the ‘hysteresis lag’ before the logic will operate.
th
16 PAGE 196 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
true
Enable
. false
true
Delayed start-up
. false
Heater return
temperature 25
ºC
Outside air
temperature 5

true
Failure
. false
Time schedule,
Time extension, true
limit or External
. Time
Figure 4: Delayed start-up method = On heater return temp.
Figure 4 illustrates the operation of the delayed start up method if the ‘On heater return temp.’ is selected.
If the outside air temperature is above a preset value (default 5ºC) (indicated 1 in the diagram) then the
Enable signal simply operates in synchronism with the overall system enable signal which is derived from
either the time schedule, a time extension an optimiser, the space temperature limit or an external enable
signal. If a system failure occurs then the Enable signal returns to a ‘false’. Note that the ‘Delayed start-up
signal does not operate at this time.
when the overall system enable signal operates, then the ‘Delayed start-up’ signal goes ‘true’ and is used
by air system components to switch on, whilst those components operating from the ‘Enable’ signal are
held off. The ‘Delayed start-up’ signal will remain in this ‘true’ condition for as long as it takes for the heater
return temperature value to reach a preset value (default 25ºC) (indicated 3 in the diagram) whereupon the
‘Delayed start-up’ signal goes ‘false’ and the ‘Enable’ signal goes ‘true thereby switching on the remaining
air system components.
The logic is protected against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in outside air or heater
return temperatures by virtue of adjustable time based ‘hysteresis lag’ settings (default 10 s). The
temperature values must be maintained for the duration of the ‘hysteresis lag’ before the logic will operate.
th
16 PAGE 197 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Supply temperature strategy

This strategy determines the supply temperature value which will be used as a setpoint for the various air
system heating and cooling components. It has many options for its source and adjustment. Figure 8
illustrates the logic of the supply temperature strategy.
Desired supply
temperature
Outside heat
air temp curve
Extract heat
air temp curve
Space heat Supply temperature

air temp curve calculation method
Desired
PID
External signals
Desired
PID
Desired
supply temp. Supply temp.
Desired
Internal compensation
Desired External compensator
extract temp.
Extract temp.
+ Compensated
setpoint (base) External extract temp. value
adjustment
Internal
Desired
Limit
Desired External compensator
space temp.
Space temp.
+ Compensated
setpoint (base) External space temp. value
adjustment
Maximum
Compensation factor supply
temperature
Outside compensator
temperature
heat On outside temp. heat curve

curve
Minimum supply Fixed value
Minimum supply
temperature
temperature
Supply temp. at As
space temp. limit normal
Supply temp. during preheat
Supply temp. at No adjustment to
space temp. Fixed value desired supply temp.
limit
Supply temp. during
Calculated
Increase during + Increase desired
delayed start-up
supply
preheat
supply temp. No adjustment to temperature
Setpoint during Fixed desired supply temp. desired supply temp.
preheat
Increase during + Increase desired
Space temp limit delayed start-
supply temp.
Setpoint during
Optimiser (preheat) delayed start-up Fixed desired
supply temp.
Delayed start-up
Figure 8: Supply temperature strategy
th
16 PAGE 198 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
The starting point is the configuration of a ‘supply temperature calculation method’ multi-selector to
determine which temperature value will be used as a primary source for the supply temperature. There are
three main types of supply temperature calculation method which can be configured:
Simple fixed internal or external value:

The supply temperature value can simply be supplied from an external source or from a fixed preset
temperature (default 18°C).
Heat curve adjusted value:

The supply temperature value can be derived from a heat-curve adjustment of either the outside,
extract or space temperatures.
Value from a PID control loop:

The supply temperature value can be provided by the output of a PID control loop. The extract or
space temperature value provides the measured value input of the PID loop which has a preset control
setpoint.
The supply temperature value from the ‘supply temperature calculation method’ may be further adjusted by
a selection of appropriate compensation temperature options. Note that certain combinations of
compensation and supply temperature method are unavailable (for example extract temperature
compensation with extract temperature methods): Please note also that the choice of compensation option
available depends upon the sensor first being linked.
Extract or space temperature:

If either extract or space temperature compensation is selected then the compensation logic gives a
choice as to whether compensation is based upon a fixed internal preset value, an externally supplied
value or using the external supplied value to adjust a fixed internal preset value.
+ (Compensated value or Compensation limit)

Compensated desired supply temp =
Offset + (Desired - Actual)
Compensation limit (min)

Error (Not displayed ) =
Compensated value =
Desired supply temp

Space temp (actual)
Offset (lower)
Gain (lower)
Error x Gain
Units C C C C C C C C
Case 1 24.0 18.0 20.0 0.5 -1.5 1.0 -1.5 -5 22.5
Case 2 24.0 17.0 20.0 0.0 -3.0 2.0 -6 -5 19.0
Figure 9: Lower compensated desired supply temperature
th
16 PAGE 199 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Figure 9 and 10 illustrate the operation of the compensation logic and its settings with 4 different cases.
The configuration of each case is of a fixed internal supply temperature method (preset to 24°C) with
internally supplied space temperature compensation. Note that operation of the compensator is the
same if internally supplied extract temperature compensation is chosen and also if the compensated
space or extract temperature value is an externally supplied value or uses the external supplied value
to adjust a fixed internal preset value.
Imagine a case (case 2), where the desired space temperature is preset to 17°C. The actual space
temperature is high at 20°C thereby giving a -3°C error to compensate low. Two settings which
determine how much weighting or ‘gain’ to put on both a lower (-) or a raise (+) error are available and
set, in this case as 2.0 for any low error. A simple calculation (error * gain (lower)) gives a
compensation adjustment of -6°C which should be applied to the supply temperature. However two
compensation ‘limit’ settings (min/max) are designed to limit the change allowed from the compensator
and in this case the compensation limit (min) of -5°C will override to give a compensated desired supply
temperature of 19°C (24°C -5°C).
The compensator logic also allows for a simple offset to be included in the calculation. This is
particularly useful for creating a ‘dead band’ type of function around the desired space or extract
temperature. An offset (lower) of 0.5°C is set in case 1 which ensures that the error will accrue only
when the actual space temperature is over 18.5°C.
Cases 3 and 4 illustrate operation if the actual space temperature is lower than the desired space
temperature thereby requiring a raised supply temperature compensated value.

Compensation limit (max)

Compensated value =
Desired supply temp

Space temp (actual)
Offset (raise)
Error x Gain
Gain (raise)
Case 3 24.0 23.0 17.0 0.0 6.0 1.0 6 5 29.0
Case 4 24.0 24.0 20.0 -1.0 3.0 1.5 4.5 5 28.5
Figure 10: Raised compensated desired supply temperature
th
16 PAGE 200 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Outside temperature:
If outside temperature compensation is selected then the operation and settings of the compensation
logic is simpler than that of the compensation with extract or space temperature. Figure 11 illustrates
this with 2 more cases.
An outside temperature compensation limit setting determines whether and by how much a
compensated adjustment is made to the supply temperature value so that if the outside air temperature
is low then the supply temperature can be increased. When the actual outside temperature is higher
than the compensation limit setting therefore, as illustrated in case 5, no compensation adjustment is
made. However as the outside temperature decreases past the compensation limit setting then the
supply temperature is raised by an adjustment depending on its magnitude and the compensation
factor multiplier as illustrated in case 6:
outside temperature compensation limit – actual outside temperature * compensation factor

= compensation value (10.0°C – 7.0°C) * 0.1 = 0.3°C
Case 5 Case 6
Figure 11: Outside air compensated desired supply temperature
Returning to the strategy illustrated in figure 8, the adjusted supply temperature value is conditioned by a
maximum and minimum limit protection. The maximum and minimum values that the supply temperature
can reach are preset fixed values but alternatively, the minimum supply temperature can be calculated via a
heat curve from the outside air temperature.
Finally the supply temperature value can be adjusted depending upon whether (if configured) an override
condition exists from either the space temperature limit (delayed start-up strategy), a preheat (optimiser
time schedule) or a delayed start-up (delayed start-up strategy). The value to which the supply temperature
is set to under these override conditions can be as the normal value, a fixed preset adjustment from the
normal value or a new fixed preset value.
The control logic contains protection against the effect of a sudden step change of calculated supply
temperature value, which can occur when switching between normal and override conditions, by a setpoint
change delay timer (default 1s/0.1°C). Further details of the setpoint change delay timer can be found in
th
16 PAGE 201 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Heating and cooling staging strategy

This strategy provides a boolean output signal to enable any of the four sources of heating and cooling in
the air system, namely the heater, the cooler and in the heat recovery unit (HRU), the HRU heater or the
HRU cooler. It is illustrated in Figure 12.
A Delta T (∆T) value, which is the difference between the calculated supply temperature and the measured
supply temperature, supplies a staging strategy to determine which sources of heat are required for the
demand condition. A ‘demand and offer’ strategy controls the use of the air system’s HRU components so
as to maximise their contribution in providing energy efficient heating or cooling. A number of other
‘efficiency interlocks’ associated with this, as well as ‘night purge’ and ‘supply fan’ interlocks, are included in
the strategy.
Supply
air temp
∆T
Calculated supply
-
temperature
HRU heating
Enable Enable HRU heater
Night purge & Demand & offer

Heater heat
Supply fan
running Enable heater
HRU cooling
Heating (only) based
External signals
on demand & offer 0 Enable HRU cooler

&
Function Demand & offer cool
1 Cooler
Heating or cooling based
on demand & offer
Enable cooler
Demand
& offer
Inlet
temp ∆TD&O
Extract
temp
Heat
Space recovery
temp function
Outside
temp
Figure 12: Heating and cooling staging strategy
th
16 PAGE 202 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Delta T strategy
A Delta T (∆T) value, which is the difference between the calculated air supply temperature and the
measured air supply temperature, supplies a staging strategy to determine which source of heat, namely
heater, cooler or either of these in combination with the HRU components, is required for the demand
condition.
The calculated supply temperature signal represents the required supply air temperature. This value is
compared with the actual supply temperature and gives a ∆T value. Note that in the example shown in
Figure 13; ∆T = 2.5°C
Figure 13: Delta T heating, cooling and HRU
th
16 PAGE 203 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Staging strategy
Each heat source stage is enabled in proportion to the magnitude and sign of the ∆T value. Figure 14
shows the default enable set points for each of the 4 possible heat sources. As ∆T rises, the heater is
disabled when ∆T reaches a value of 0°C. The cooler is enabled when ∆T reaches a value of 2°C.
Meanwhile if the HRU can usefully supply heat, which is determined by the ‘demand and offer’ strategy,
then the HRU will be enabled to supply HRU heating until ∆T reaches a value of 0.5°C. At this point, and
again if it can usefully supply cooling, HRU cooling will be enabled.
As ∆T decreases, the cooler is disabled when ∆T reaches a value of 0°C. The heater is enabled when ∆T
reaches a value of -1°C. Meanwhile if the HRU can usefully supply cooling, which is determined by the
‘demand and offer’ strategy, then the HRU will be enabled to supply HRU cooling until ∆T reaches a value
of -0.5°C. At this point, and again if it can usefully supply heating, HRU heating will be enabled.
The enable set points are protected against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in
heat source. The default value of all these timers is zero with the exception of the cooler-on which is set to
1 minute.
HRU heating HRU cooling
Heater Cooler
HRU heating HRU cooling
Heater Cooler
-3.5 -3.0 -2.5 -2.0 -1.5 -1.0 -0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
∆T = supply temp. – calculated supply temp.
th
16 PAGE 204 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Demand and offer strategy

The principle of the ‘demand and offer’ strategy in this air handling unit application, is to control the use of
the air system’s heat recovery components so as to maximise their contribution in providing energy efficient
heating or cooling. In short there is a ‘demand’ and the strategy determines whether it can ‘offer’ any useful
heat from the HRU. The basis of the strategy is therefore a calculation as to whether the HRU can ‘usefully
offer’ heat (either heating or cooling) allowing it then to be enabled accordingly by the staging strategy.
This calculation is made by looking at the differential between two measured temperatures creating, in
D&O
effect, another Delta T (∆T ) value, and it is illustrated in Figure 12. A combination of two from the inlet,
D&O
extract, space and outside air temperatures are selected to provide the ∆T value. Figure 15 shows the
D&O
default enable set points for the ∆T value which is then used to determine the status of the HRU to be
‘useful as a heater’, ‘useful as a cooler’ or ‘neutral’.
D&O D&O
When ∆T reaches a value of -2°C the HRU is ‘useful as a heater’ and when ∆T reaches a value of
D&O
+2°C it is ‘useful as a cooler’. If the value of ∆T is between the two preset settings then the status of the
HRU is ‘neutral’ and no heat value can be gained by its introduction.
HRU useful as a heater HRU Neutral HRU useful as a cooler
-3.5 -3.0 -2.5 -2.0 -1.5 -1.0 -0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
∆TD&O = (for example) inlet temp. – extract temp.
Figure 15: Demand and offer status
The heating and cooling staging strategy has an HRU ‘function’ option which allows the HRU contribution to
be selected only for its ‘useful as heater’ or for both ‘useful as heater’ and ‘useful as a cooler’.
Heat recovery control output

There are several mechanical methods available for heat recovery and they are described individually
elsewhere but Figure 16 shows a summary of the output control condition of each method:
Output Heat recovery wheel Run around coil PHE (open/close) PHE (modulating) Mixing dampers
True=100% 100%=Full recovery Open valve=Full recovery True=Full bypass 100%=Full bypass 100%=Full fresh air
False=0% 0%=No recovery Closed valve=No recovery False=Full recovery 0%=Full recovery 0%=Full recirculation
Figure 16: Control output conditions for heat recovery methods
th
16 PAGE 205 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Heat control operation

Figure 17 illustrates the heat operation of the heating and cooling staging strategy. Cooling operation is
similar and the full operation of heating and cooling is illustrated in figure 18. A number of efficiency
interlocks are embedded within this strategy to ensure that the maximum efficiency of heating and cooling
staging is maintained. These interlocks are:
Disable heat source interlock:

Before any heat source can be disabled, its associated PID loop must be at a minimum value of 0%.
Heater enable interlock:

The heater will only be enabled if the cooler is at 0% AND only when ∆T ≤ -1.0 (preset setting) AND
HRU heating (useful as heater) = 100%
HRU heating interlock:

The HRU heating PID control loop will be forced to a maximum of 100% when the heater is enabled
and it stays forced at 100% until the heater is disabled.
Summer limit interlock:

The heater will not be enabled if the summer limit condition is active. HRU heating (useful as heater)
can however be enabled in this condition.
Comfort/economy interlock:
If the configured HRU are mixing dampers, then the sequenced enabling of the heater and HRU (useful
as heater) may be altered.
Cooler enable interlock:

The cooler will only be enabled if the heater is at 0% AND only when ∆T > 2.0 (preset setting) AND
HRU cooling (useful as cooler) = 100%.
HRU cooling interlock:

The HRU cooling PID control loop will be forced to a maximum of 100% when the cooler is enabled and
it stays forced at 100% until the cooler is disabled.
Outside air temperature interlock:

The cooler will only be enabled if the outside air temperature is at or above the value set within the
‘cooler control strategy’.
The HRU heating loop will be forced to

100% until ∆T ≥ 0.5 AND Heater = 0%
100%
Control output
Actual slopes will depend

upon the measured supply
temperature and the gain and
operation of the PID loops
-3.5 -3.0 -2.5 -2.0 -1.5 -1.0 -0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Heating ∆T Cooling
The heater is enabled ONLY when

Figure 17: Heat control operation ∆T ≤ -1.0 AND HRU heating = 100%
th
16 PAGE 206 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
-3.5 -3.0 -2.5 -2.0 -1.5 -1.0 -0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Figure 18: Full control operation
Other interlocks
A number of other interlocks are included in the heating and cooling control strategy:
Night purge interlock:

The heating and cooling strategy contains an interlock to disable all the heating and cooling sources if
the air handling unit is in a night purge condition.
Supply fan interlock:

It is important that before any heating and cooling sources are enabled, the supply fan is running. An
interlock is therefore included which disables the heating and cooling sources until status confirmation
of ‘supply fan running’ has been received.
th
16 PAGE 207 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Low / High fan speed control strategy

This strategy provides selection of the control options for two speed (Low / High) supply and extract fans.
The Low / High fans can either be those configured to the dedicated 2-HILO module or those configured to
separate digital output channels on other output modules.
The logic of this strategy provides a number of choices as to the type and source of the ‘high speed’
command signal, for example time schedule, temperature, relative humidity and air quality, which will then
switch the fan to high speed if the input is at a certain value. It also gives a choice of override action that
delayed start-up, night purge and fire condition has on the ‘high’ fan speed condition for both fans.
Figure 19 illustrates the logic of the low/high fan speed control strategy and the supply and extract fan
speed control signals are indicated as ‘high speed’ signals to each of the fans.
High speed during fire mode

N High
command
Fire contact N
Y
Y Or
Night purge High speed during
night purge
High speed
Time Supply fan
schedule
Outside
temperature
Space
temperature
Extract
temperature
External signals
Space RH
Extract RH Low/High
command
Space
air quality

Extract
air quality =
High speed
& Extract fan
External High speed
External High speed (SF) Or

&
External High speed (EF)
High
N command
Delayed Extract fan during
start-up Y delayed start-up – High speed ?
Figure 19: Low / High fan speed control strategy
th
16 PAGE 208 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
At its heart is the ‘Low / High command’ multi-way selection where a decision as to the source of control is
made. This is a boolean function and a time schedule is one of its selection options. However when a
sensor is used to provide the source of control into this strategy the signal is conditioned by means of a
‘thermostat’ function which generates an on or off boolean signal from the analogue value. (The default
settings for each thermostat function are Off at 15 °C/%/ppm and On at 17 °C/%/ppm).
An external boolean signal can alternatively be used to command the low / high function and if this is
chosen then it has two further options. Either a single external signal ‘External (common SF & EF)’ will
determine the high command of both fans or two separate external signals ‘External (separate SF & EF)’
will control each fan.
If a delayed start-up method has been selected then its ‘Enable’ signal may be selected as an override
signal on the extract fan high speed. Two other selection options, ‘high speed during fire mode’ and ‘high
speed during night purge’ may also be selected to force a high speed during these conditions.
th
16 PAGE 209 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Fan modulating control strategy

This strategy provides a modulating control signal for each of the supply and extract fans and is used to
control either the modulating or on/off-modulating fan types that are configured in the ‘supply fan control
strategy’ and ‘extract fan control strategies’
The value of the modulating control signal, which is required for each fan, is derived from a selection of
sensors and external sources within the air system. In addition, each fan control signal will respond
appropriately to the action of override commands from fire and night purge applications and the air system
delayed start-up strategy. Figure 20 illustrates the logic of the fan modulating control strategy.
Fire override
Night purge
Night purge
Night purge
percentage SF Max
percentage Fixed value Control value
during fire override
Supply fan
control
As during limit
occupancy
Fixed
percentage
SF Min
Supply Desired
pressure
PID
Desired
Space RH PID
External signals
Extract RH Desired
PID Modulating
supply fan
Space Desired
air quality PID
Extract Desired
air quality PID
SF external
percentage
Extract fan
following supply fan
Offset from heat
offset Curve from
supply fan Offset from curve
supply fan supply fan
Extract Desired External

PID pressure
pressure
Follows supply fan

EF external
percentage External percentage
Modulating EF Max
extract fan
Control value
during fire override
Extract fan
EF
control
As during Off
limit
occupancy
Extract fan during EF On

delayed start-up Fixed Extract fan EF Min
EF control at at delayed
delayed start-up start-up
Delayed start-up
Figure 20: Fan modulating control strategy
th
16 PAGE 210 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Supply fan
The value of the supply fan modulating control signal has protection against it going to an inappropriate
level by preset minimum and maximum values (default 0% and 100%) These provide the highest priority of
override on the signal. It is advisable to set the minimum value (for example 20%) to enable some air flow
to occur whenever the fan is enabled.
The supply fan control signal can be selected from one of a number of sources of control such as, a fixed
percentage value, supply pressure, space and extract humidity or space and extract air quality and also
from an external source. Each sensor selection has an integrated PID loop which will control its output to a
preset setting of the desired control value.
Normal control can be interrupted by the action from two other override signals, fire and night purge. The
fire override signal, derived from the fire override application comprising fire contact and fireman’s override
switch, gives a boolean command which switches the supply fan to a preset ‘control value during fire
override’ (default 75%) If a night purge application has been created and its signal has been selected by
the air system, then its boolean command will switch the supply fan on and modulate it to either a ‘fixed
value’ (default 80%) or a value derived from the same source ‘as during occupancy’.
The control logic contains protection against the effect of a sudden step change of supply fan modulating
value, which can occur when switching between normal and override conditions, by a setpoint change delay
timer (default 1%/1s). Further details of the setpoint change delay timer can be found in “Common
functions”.
Extract fan
The value of the extract fan modulating control signal has protection against it going to an inappropriate
level by preset minimum and maximum values (default 0% and 100%) These provide the highest priority of
override on the signal. It is advisable to set the minimum value (for example 20%) to enable some air flow
to occur whenever the fan is enabled.
The source of the extract fan control signal can be selected from either extract pressure, an external source
or a modulating value which ‘follows’ the value of the supply fan. The extract pressure sensor selection has
an integrated PID loop which will control its output to a preset setting of the desired control value.
During conditions of occupancy, when the extract fan is ‘following the supply fan’, the fan’s modulating
value can be adjusted either by a preset ‘offset’ value (default -5%) or by a ‘heat curve’ based upon the
value of the supply fan signal.
Normal control can be interrupted by the action from two other override signals, fire and delayed start-up.
The fire override signal, derived from the fire override application comprising fire contact and fireman’s
override switch, gives a boolean command which switches the extract fan to a preset ‘control value during
fire override’ (default 75%). If the ‘delayed start-up method’ has been configured in the air system then its
boolean command can be used to set the extract fan to a modulating value when delayed start-up is active.
This will switch the extract fan on during the delayed start up period whilst the supply fan is held off. As
long as the ‘extract fan at delayed start-up’ has been selected as being ‘extract fan on’, then the ‘delayed
start-up’ signal will switch the fan on and modulate it to either a ‘fixed’ value (default 80%) or to a value
derived from the same source ‘as during occupancy’.
The control logic contains protection against the effect of a sudden step change of extract fan modulating
value, which can occur when switching between normal and override conditions, by a setpoint change delay
functions”.
th
16 PAGE 211 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Filters strategy
This strategy controls the configuration and the monitoring of the inlet and extract filters. Figure 21
illustrates the logic of the filters strategy. There are two identical circuits, one for the inlet air filter and one
for the extract air filter.
Each filter circuit provides two boolean command signals, ‘filter dirty’ and ‘flow failure’. Each signal
generates an alarm but the inlet and extract flow failure signals are also used by the supply fan and extract
fan control strategies respectively for their ‘air flow detection’ (‘from filter’) logic.
A configuration selection option on the inlet and extract air filters offers a choice as to the source of the
monitoring the performance of the filter. When a filter becomes clogged the air pressure across the filter
increases and this change can be monitored by either a differential pressure switch or a differential
pressure sensor. If a sensor is used then this provides the additional benefit of acting as an air flow proving
device.
The air filter DP sensor signal is compared to a preset ‘filter dirty alarm differential pressure’ settings value
(default 210 Pa).and when it exceeds the preset value, a ‘filter dirty’ alarm signal is raised.
The air filter DP sensor signal is also compared to a preset ‘flow alarm differential pressure’ settings value
(default 10 Pa). If the fan is on and the sensor signal has not exceeded this preset value after a preset ‘fan
start alarm inhibit time’ (default 1 min) then the ‘flow failure’ signal indicates to the fan control strategy that
air flow has failed.
A configuration option ‘symbol only’ does just that and only the filter is displayed in the air handling graphic
and no monitoring is configured.
Inlet air filter

None
DP switch Inlet air filter
DP switch
Inlet air filter DP sensor
DP sensor ≥ Filter dirty
Filter dirty alarm
differential pressure
DP sensor with Symbol only
flow det.
Flow alarm
≤ Flow failure
External signals
&
Supply fan on
Fan start alarm

inhibit time
Extract air filter

None
DP switch Extract air filter
DP switch
Extract air filter DP sensor
DP sensor ≥ Filter dirty
Filter dirty alarm
DP sensor with Symbol only
flow det.
Flow alarm
≤ Flow failure
&
Extract fan on
Fan start alarm

inhibit time
Figure 21: Filters strategy
th
16 PAGE 212 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Supply fan control strategy

This strategy provides selection of the following mechanical plant ventilation options with respect to the
supply of air:
Supply fan
On/Off (Boolean 2 state)
Low/High (using the 2-HILO module)
Low/High – separate I/O (not using the 2-HILO module)
Modulating (0-100% analogue output interface)
On/Off Modulating (Boolean 2 state on-off and 0-100% analogue output interface)
Outside air damper

None
Open / Closed (Boolean 2 state)
Incorporated with fan (The supply fan is mechanically linked and interlocked externally with the
outside air damper. No control is provided by this strategy for the outside air damper although it is
shown on the graphic)
Supply air flow detection

None
DP switch
DP sensor
From filter
This strategy also caters for the supply fan interlocks for flow failure, outside air damper, fire override and
overrun after a cooling demand as well as automatically responding to control from the delayed start-up
method.
The strategy also informs other controls and components in the air system of the current operational state
of the supply fan with its ‘Fan on’ and ‘Fan fail’ signals,
Figure 22 illustrates the logic of the supply fan control strategy. This logic drives whichever type of fan that
has been selected by the ‘supply fan’ configuration.
An ‘Enable’ signal, derived from the delayed start-up strategy, indicates to this fan control logic the desired
state of the supply fan. If a two speed supply fan is being used then this logic will determine the state of the
fan by switching the ‘low’ speed to on. The ‘high’ speed condition of the fan is determined by the ‘High
command’ signal from the low/high fan speed control strategy. If a modulating supply fan is being used
then this logic will enable it and the control value of the fan is determined by the ‘Control’ signal from the fan
modulating control strategy. A ‘fan start sequence’ control offers start-up options to define whether it is the
supply fan or the extract fan that starts first and what the time delay (default 2 min) between the first and
the ‘following’ fan is.
A safety Interlock, to ensure that the outside air damper is fully open before the supply fan starts, is
provided by the ‘outside air damper’ selection option. The open condition of the outside air damper is
proven either by its ‘stroke’ time or from the ‘is running’ feedback signal on the I/O device. A similar
protection is provided by the ‘supply air flow detection’ option which will cause a fan failure signal to occur if
the supply air fails, detected either by a differential pressure switch, differential pressure sensor (with a
default alarm value 10.0 Pa) or inlet ‘filter flow failure’ derived from the filters strategy. The switch and
sensor alarm signals are protected against spurious operation by a ‘settings’ adjustable ‘start alarm inhibit’
time (default 1 min).
th
16 PAGE 213 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Cooling SF o’run time after Outside air damper

demand cool demand
Supply fan o’run after
EF on cool demand
Cool demand
Yes
Overrun
Start
sequence
No or 1
EF follows SF
Enable &
SF follows EF
Fan start 1
Delay sequence
Fire override
Supply fan on
&
Supply fan off
External signals
Or
Supply fan Fan
on
Low/High
On/Off module
Modulating Low/High
separate I/O
High
command Or
Fan
Control fail
Fan start alarm

inhibit time
None
Flow switch
Flow sensor
Supply air flow
detection
From
filter
Flow alarm
Filter flow failure
Figure 22: Supply fan control strategy
The supply fan control includes a timer which can cause the fan to overrun by a ‘settings’ adjustable ‘supply
fan o’run time after cool demand’ time (default 1 min). The cooling demand signal is derived from the
cooling control strategy. It is important, especially with DX cooling, that the supply fan is allowed to overrun
if there is a cooling demand at the end of occupancy when the complete system would normally switch off.
This is to prevent freeze damage to the coils by removing the residual cooling in the system.
Action from either of the two override signals, ‘supply fan on’ or ‘supply fan off’ under fire condition or
fireman’s override, will directly command the supply fan, by-passing the ‘overrun after cooling’ timer and
ignoring any flow failure signals.
th
16 PAGE 214 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Extract fan control strategy

This strategy provides selection of the following mechanical plant ventilation options with respect to the
extract of air:
Extract fan
None
On/Off (Boolean 2 state)
Low/High (using the 2-HILO module)
Low/High – separate I/O (not using the 2-HILO module)
Modulating (0-100% analogue output interface)
On/Off Modulating (Boolean 2 state on-off and 0-100% analogue output interface)
Combined with supply fan (Only the supply fan is configured and controlled in the application but
the both fans are individually displayed on the graphic)
Exhaust air damper

None
Incorporated with fan (The extract fan is mechanically linked and interlocked externally with the
exhaust air damper. No control is provided by this strategy for the exhaust air damper although it is
Combined with outside air damper (The exhaust and outside air dampers are controlled by a single
signal from the supply fan control strategy)
Extract air flow detection

None
DP switch
DP sensor
From filter
This strategy caters for the extract fan interlocks for flow failure, exhaust air damper and fire override as
well as automatically responding to control from the delayed start-up method.
This strategy also informs other controls and components in the air system of the current operational state
of the extract fan via the ‘Fan on’ and ‘Fan fail’ signals,
Figure 23 illustrates the logic of the extract fan control strategy. This logic drives whichever type of fan that
has been selected by the ‘extract fan’ configuration setting.
An ‘enable’ signal, derived from the delayed start-up strategy, indicates to this fan control logic the desired
state of the extract fan. This enable signal will only be true if the supply fan has started. If a two speed
extract fan is being used then this logic will determine the state of the fan by switching the ‘low’ speed to on.
The ‘high’ speed condition of the fan is determined by the ‘High command’ signal from the low/high fan
speed control strategy. If a modulating extract fan is being used then this logic will enable it and the control
value of the fan is determined by the ‘Control’ signal from the fan modulating control strategy. A ‘fan start
sequence’ control offers start-up options to define whether it is the supply fan or the extract fan that starts
first and what the time delay (default 2 min) between the first and the ‘following’ fan is. If configured, extract
fan operation under a delayed start-up condition will take priority over the ‘fan start sequence’ control.
In addition and providing that the ‘Extract fan at delayed start-up’ configuration is ‘on’, the extract fan will
respond to the ‘delayed start-up’ signal from the delayed start-up strategy. This will switch the extract fan
on during the delayed start up period whilst the supply fan is held off.
th
16 PAGE 215 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Delayed Extract fan on

Exhaust air damper
start-up
Extract fan off Extract fan at
SF on delayed start-up
Start
sequence 1 1
or
EF follows SF
Enable &
SF follows EF
Fan start 1
Delay sequence
Fire override
Extract fan on
&
Extract fan off
External signals
Or
Extract fan Fan
on
Low/High
On/Off module
Modulating Low/High
separate I/O
High
command Or
Fan
Control fail
Fan start alarm

inhibit time
None
Flow switch
Flow sensor
Extract air flow
detection
From
filter
Flow alarm
Filter flow failure
Figure 23: Extract fan control strategy
A safety Interlock, to ensure that the exhaust air damper is fully open before the extract fan starts, is
provided by the ‘exhaust air damper’ selection option. The open condition of the exhaust air damper is
proven either by its ‘stroke’ time or from the ‘is running’ feedback signal on the I/O device. A similar
protection is provided by the ‘extract air flow detection’ option which will cause a fan failure signal to occur if
the extract air fails, detected either by a differential pressure switch, differential pressure sensor (with a
default alarm value 10.0 Pa) or extract ‘filter flow failure’ derived from the filters strategy. The switch and
sensor alarm signals are protected against spurious operation by a ‘settings’ adjustable ‘start alarm inhibit’
time (default 1 min).
Action from either of the two override signals, ‘extract fan on’ or ‘extract fan off’ under fire condition or
fireman’s override, will directly command the extract fan, ignoring any flow failure signals.
th
16 PAGE 216 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Heater control strategy

This is the control strategy for the water based heater component within the AHU. It provides the following
output signals:
Modulating 2 port or 3 port valve control signal using 0-10vdc or tri-state outputs
Boolean on/off signal to the heater circulation pump
Heat demand signal to the heating plant which specifies the desired boiler temperature
Overall enable control of the heater is primarily supplied from the ‘heating and cooling staging strategy’.
The heater will control its coil temperature depending upon the requirement from the calculated supply
temperature from the ‘supply temperature strategy’. Various heater protection options are provided to
ensure that the heater does not freeze either by the introduction of low temperature air or by a frost
condition. The heater circulation pump is enabled accordingly. Finally a ‘heat demand’ signal which is sent
to the heating plant specifies the heat requirement from the AHU heater. Figures 24 and 26 illustrate the
logic of the heater control strategy.
th
16 PAGE 217 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Enable heater
Supply
air temp PID Control based on supply temperature
Calculated supply 0
temperature
Value during Valve set to
delayed start-up fixed value
Delayed start-up 0
No action Behaviour
during delayed
start-up
Control based on
0
Outside heat outside temperature
air temp curve
Protection on outside
temperature
Outside temp. No 0
protection limit
Yes 1 &
No Control
0 Heat
Control based on frost curve
max
Frost heat sensor heat curve
sensor Frost sensor
curve Minimum protection
External signals
temp.
control
PID Control based on frost

Minimum frost
temperature sensor temperature
Return
temp
Minimum return Fixed value
No PID
Control based on
temperature return temperature
heat Heat curve
curve
Control based on
minimum return temp. RT setpoint
Limit
&
Frost protection
0 No
on return temp.
Alarm only 0
1
Alarm and frost thermostat function Frost
Frost or
thermostat
Figure 24: Control and Frost
th
16 PAGE 218 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Modulating control value strategy

The modulating control value is a combination of a number of temperature values, each being calculated
from sensors, PID, heat curve or protection circuits and some with dependencies on the condition of other
air handling unit control strategies. The modulating signal is the maximum of all the following values and it
is illustrated in Figure 24:
Calculated supply temperature:

Providing that the heater is enabled by the ‘heating and cooling staging strategy’, the calculated supply
temperature provides a setpoint for a PID control loop whose measured variable is the supply
temperature sensor and whose output is the modulating control value.
Delayed start-up:
The water based heater coil is at risk if low temperature outside air is introduced into the duct before it
has attained a manageable working temperature. The ‘delayed start-up method’ strategy provides a
‘delayed start-up’ signal which is used in this strategy to enable a default pre-set control value of 80% to
be selected for the heater valve during a delayed start-up condition. This is illustrated by an example in
Figure 25 which also includes part of the operation of the ‘delayed start-up method’:
In this example, the outside air temperature is below the preset value (indicated 1 in the
diagram) when the overall system enable signal (the timeschedule) operates. The ‘delayed
start-up’ signal goes ‘true’ and is used by this heater control strategy to enable a default pre-
set control value of 80% to be selected and is also shown at the ‘max control output value to
valve’ signal’. The ‘delayed start-up’ signal will remain in this ‘true’ condition for as long as it
takes for the heater return temperature value to reach a preset value (default 25ºC) (indicated
2 in the diagram) whereupon the ‘delayed start-up’ signal goes ‘false’.
The reset of the 80% control value will cause it to reduce at a rate determined by a setpoint
change delay timer (default 1%/1s) (indicated 3 in the diagram). Further details of the setpoint
change delay timer can be found elsewhere in this document. The ‘delayed start-up method
strategy’ has in the meantime, switched its ‘enable’ signal ‘true’ which in turn has enabled the
‘heat and cooling staging strategy’ and in this example, has ‘enabled the heater’. The ‘control
based on supply temperature’ signal from the PID loop will start to control and its signal will
rise accordingly. At the point it exceeds the now reducing ‘control value under delayed start-
up’ signal then transfer of control to the ‘control on supply temperature’ is achieved (indicated
4 in the diagram).
The operation in this example assumes that no other protection logic is currently active.
Outside air temperature protection:

If any of the heater protection options are selected, a time based hysteresis control, which is more fully
described in “Common functions”, will monitor the outside air temperature and if the temperature falls
below a default preset value of 6°C, then protection is enabled. The protection options are:
Outside air temperature heat curve:

A protecting control value that is based upon the outside air temperature via a heat curve.
Frost sensor heat curve:

A protecting control value that is based upon the temperature from a frost sensor. Two alternative
options exist here to either use the sensor value via a heat curve or to use the sensor value as the
measured variable of a PID loop which controls to a preset fixed ‘minimum frost temperature’
setpoint and whose output is the modulating control value.
Minimum return temperature:

A protecting control value that is based upon the temperature from a return water sensor. The
sensor value is the measured variable of a PID loop which controls to either a preset fixed
‘minimum return temperature’ setpoint or an outside air temperature heat curve. The output of the
PID loop is the modulating control value.
th
16 PAGE 219 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
100%
‘Max’ Control output
value to valve
. 0%

100%
Control based on
supply temperature
0%

Control value under 80%
Delayed start-up
. 0%
true
Delayed start-up
. false
Heater return
temperature 25
ºC
Outside air
temperature 5
Time schedule, true

Time extension,
false
Optimiser, Space
limit or External
Time
.
Figure 25: Control value under delayed start-up on heater return temperature
Second stage frost override control strategy

A ‘second stage - frost’ override condition can be determined by a frost thermostat or the temperature of
the return water in the heater circuit. Either or both of these will determine a ‘frost’ condition. If the return
water temperature is used then a time based hysteresis control, which is more fully described in “Common
functions”, will monitor the return temperature and if the temperature falls below a default preset value of
15°C and the outside air temperature protection is enabled, then a frost condition is instantiated. This
effectively creates a ‘frost thermostat function’ from the return water sensor value. This is illustrated in
figure 24.
The ‘frost protection on return temperature’ setting requires some additional explanation:
This option is only available when a return water sensor has been linked.
If the setting is chosen as ‘alarm only’ then when the condition of the return temperature ‘frost
thermostat function’ is in a ‘frost’ condition it only generates an ‘alarm’ and does not instantiate a ‘frost
condition’.
If the setting is chosen as ‘alarm and frost thermostat function’ then when the condition of the return
temperature ‘frost thermostat function’ is in a ‘frost condition’ it generates an ‘alarm’ and instantiates a
frost condition. This is also interlocked against the ‘outside temperature protection limit’ condition
which must also be active for this return temperature based ‘frost thermostat function’ to be active.
If the frost thermostat is linked then this will always instantiate a ‘frost condition’ when active regardless of
the condition of the ‘return temperature’ frost thermostat function or the ‘outside temperature protection
limit’ condition.
When a frost override condition is instantiated, the value of the modulating valve signal can be optionally
switched immediately to a maximum of 100% or be switched initially to a maximum value for a default frost
control delay period of 10 minutes but then switched to a default fixed preset value of 25% after the delay
has expired and then continuously at that fixed value for as long as this second stage frost override
condition exists or the frost thermostat is reset. This is illustrated in figure 26.
th
16 PAGE 220 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
-------------------- From Figure 24 -------------------- Valve

Control
Heat demand
power
100% Maximum heater
capacity
Output value after
frost control delay
Frost control
delay Circulation
≠0 pump overrun
Maximum (100%)
Maximum then fixed value after delay
Frost
control
Valve output Timer None Pump
during frost In supply
Frost or
Frost limit In return
Circulation
Interval Duration
Pump pump
External signals
exercise
method
Pump exercise Interval Interval
Outside Direct
air temp
or
Enable heater
&
----------- From Figure 24 ---------
Limit
& 0 Heat demand
Correction
Calculated
heat heat demand
curve
0 Correction at 100% Yes No
valve position
heat Heat demand
curve Heat demand value correction
correction threshold
Heat demand (valve%)
RT setpoint + during frost
Return temperature
setpoint offset
Figure 26: Valve and Pump
th
16 PAGE 221 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application

A ‘circulation pump’ configuration setting allows the fundamental selection of a circulation pump in the
heater circuit and then whether the graphic displays the pump in either the supply or return water pipe work.
When the value of the modulating valve signal is zero, the circulation pump is disabled. In normal
operation, when the valve is in a controlled state then the pump is enabled. However there are some
override conditions which will also enable the pump. These are illustrated in figure 26 and are:
Pump Overrun:
A pump overrun condition starts after an operating period during which hot water has been distributed
around the heating coil. The purpose of pump overrun is to dissipate the heat contained in the water of
the circuit. The circulation pump has an adjustable pump overrun time setting and its default value is 5
minutes.
Frost override:
Whenever the frost override control condition exists, the pump is enabled.
First stage frost protection:

If a ‘first stage frost’ condition exists when the ‘frost limit’ signal from the ‘outside air temperature
application’ is in ‘frost limit’, regardless of the enable state of the AHU, the heater circulation pump is
enabled.
Pump exercise:
described elsewhere in this document. It may be optionally selected for use by the AHU heater
circulation pump to protect it from becoming unavailable because it has seized due to corrosion and
precipitate build up after long periods of inactivity.
Heat demand strategy

The heat demand strategy determines the temperature that is returned to the heat plant or distribution
circuit as a heat demand value and as a heat demand power value. The heat plant, heat delivery and heat
users such as the AHU heater are designed such that it is the responsibility of each heat user circuit to
request its own heat demand temperature. Each heat user is allocated to a specific heating plant or
distribution circuit and the heating plant system will eventually produce heated water to satisfy the maximum
value of all its supported heat users. The heat demand control strategy is illustrated in figure 26.
There are two main parts to the heat demand strategy: ‘Calculated heat demand’ and ‘Heat demand
correction’:
Calculated heat demand:

The calculated heat demand value will depend upon a number of conditions:
Valve position = zero:

If the valve position is zero then the calculated heat demand value will be zero. This indicates a
condition where the heater is not required and also it is not in any frost or other condition of
protection
Enable heater and frost

If the valve is positioned and the heater is enabled by the ‘heating and cooling strategy’ or a ‘frost’
condition exists then the calculated heat demand will be derived from the outside air temperature
via a compensated heat curve to give weather compensation. Compensated temperature control is
where the temperature setpoint is varied as a function of the measured outside air temperature
(weather compensation). A description of operation of the heat curve can be found in “Common
functions”
th
16 PAGE 222 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Unoccupied outside temperature protection limit

If the heater is not enabled but an ‘outside temperature limit’ condition exists, then the calculated
heat demand will be derived from a choice of either the normal ‘occupancy heat curve’, a dedicated
‘frost limit heat curve’ or an uplifted current ‘return temperature setpoint’ value which is offset by a
fixed preset value (default 10°C). Under these conditions there will be no air flow passing over the
heater coil and the heat demand value may be minimised. Note that if ‘control on return
temperature’ is not selected then only the choice of heat curve is offered
Heat demand correction:

‘Heat demand correction’ provides a means of adjusting the calculated heat demand value to take
the heater. The calculated heat demand value is adjusted (corrected) and this new value is then the
heat demand value signal which is sent to the heating plant.
The heat demand correction value is variable and depends upon the position of the control valve. The
correction value is zero until the valve reaches a fixed preset ‘Heat demand correction threshold
(valve%)’ (default 90%). As the valve increases towards 100% a proportional correction value is added
which is determined by a linear ratio between the ‘threshold’ and a ‘Correction at 100% valve position’
value (default 5K). This is illustrated in Figure 27. Note that the ‘Heat demand value’ is the total value
which includes the ‘Heat demand correction’
61.5
2.0
+
63.5
Correction 5
(K)
0 20 40 60 80 90 100
Valve position (%)

Figure 27: Heat demand correction
Heat demand power:

The heat demand power value, which is included for future use, is simply a conversion of the
modulated valve signal value into a ‘power value’ in linear proportion with the value of the fixed preset
‘maximum heater capacity (default 50 kW)
th
16 PAGE 223 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Chilled water cooler control strategy

This is the control strategy for the chilled water cooler component within the AHU. It provides the following
output signals:
Modulating 2 port or 3 port valve control signal using 0-10vdc or tri-state outputs
Boolean on/off signal to the cooler circulation pump
Boolean cooling demand signal to the chiller plant
Overall enable control of the cooler is primarily supplied from the ‘heating and cooling staging strategy’.
The cooler will control its coil temperature depending upon the requirement of the calculated supply
temperature. A number of enable interlocks are also included. The cooler circulation pump is enabled
accordingly. Finally, a cooling demand signal is generated and this is sent to the chiller plant to indicate
that chilled water is required. Figure 28 illustrates the logic of the chilled water cooler control strategy.
Delay after supply

Supply fan fan running
running
Delay after supply
Timer fan running
Enable cooler Yes
No
1 No
&
Outside
air temp Yes
Outside
Outside temperature temperature
Supply interlock
interlock
air temp Valve
External signals
Calculated supply PID

temperature
Cooling demand
power
Maximum cooler
capacity
Circulation
≠0 pump overrun
Interval Duration
Pump
exercise Timer
Interval None
Pump exercise Interval method Pump
In supply
or
Direct
Frost limit In return
Start circulation pump No 0 & Circulation
on frost limit Yes 1 pump
Cooling demand
Figure 28: Chilled water cooler control strategy
th
16 PAGE 224 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Modulating control value strategy

The value of the modulating control valve signal is simply provided by the output from a cooling PID control
loop whose measured value is the supply temperature sensor and whose setpoint is the calculated supply
temperature which is provided by the ‘supply temperature strategy’. The control loop is primarily enabled by
the ‘enable cooler’ signal from the ‘heating and cooling staging strategy’ unless it is prevented to by the
condition of the following interlock options:
Outside air temperature interlock

To prevent the cooler from being enabled if the outside air temperature is too low, a time based
hysteresis control, which is more fully described in “Common functions”, will monitor the outside air
temperature and if the temperature falls below a default preset value of 15°C, then the control loop is
disabled.
Supply air flow interlock

To prevent the cooler from being enabled until the ventilation supply fan has started and established an
air flow, a start delay can be introduced. A default ‘delay after supply fan running’ period of 3 minutes
will hold-off the enable of the control loop. This delay interlock, which holds-off starting of the cooler, is
useful to allow time for the supply air temperature sensor to stabilise and give a more accurate ‘normal’
measured value to the control loops and reduce the chances of control loop ‘hunting’. Initially, the
temperature value that the supply air sensor gives can be high and unrepresentative of normal air duct
conditions if there has been no air flow for some time.

A ‘circulation pump’ configuration setting allows the fundamental selection of a circulation pump in the
cooler circuit and then whether the graphic displays the pump in either the supply or return water pipe work.
When the value of the modulating valve signal is zero, the circulation pump is disabled. In normal
operation, when the valve is in a controlled state then the pump is enabled. However there are some
override conditions which will also enable the pump. These are illustrated in figure 28 and are:
Pump Overrun
A pump overrun condition starts after an operating period during which chilled water has been
distributed around the cooling coil. The purpose of pump overrun is to dissipate the chilled water in the
cooler coil to prevent coil damage by making a consistent temperature throughout the circuit. The
circulation pump has an adjustable pump overrun time setting and its default value is 5 minutes.
First stage frost protection

application’ is in ‘frost limit’, regardless of the enable state of the AHU, the cooler circulation pump is
enabled when the ‘start circulation pump on frost limit’ option is selected.
Pump exercise
described elsewhere in this document. It may be optionally selected for use by the AHU cooler
circulation pump to protect it from becoming unavailable because it has seized due to corrosion and
precipitate build up after long periods of inactivity.
th
16 PAGE 225 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Cooling demand strategy

The cooling demand strategy produces two demand signals that are returned to the chiller plant or
distribution circuit; A boolean ‘cooling demand’ signal and a modulating ‘cooling demand power’ value.
The chiller plant, chilled water delivery and chilled water users such as the AHU cooler are designed such
that it is the responsibility of each chilled water user circuit to request its own cooling demand. Each chilled
water user is allocated to a specific chiller plant or distribution circuit and the chiller plant system will
eventually produce chilled water to satisfy the maximum value of all its supported chilled water users. The
cooling demand control strategy is illustrated in figure 28.
The boolean cooling demand signal is produced from the modulating value of the valve such that whenever
the value is non-zero then the cooling demand signal is ‘true’.
The cooling demand power value is simply a conversion of the modulated valve signal value into a ‘power
value’ in linear proportion with the value of the fixed preset ‘maximum cooler capacity (default 50 kW). The
cooling demand power value is used by the chiller plant when it is configured for its ‘load power strategy’.
th
16 PAGE 226 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
DX chiller control strategy

This is the control strategy for the DX chiller component within the AHU. DX is short for Direct Expansion
which means that the refrigerant expands (thereby producing a cooling effect) in an expansion coil that is in
direct contact with the conditioned air that will be delivered to the space. Up to 4 DX chiller stages may be
configured. The DX cooler control strategy provides the following output signals:
Individual boolean on/off signals to up to four DX chiller stages
Overall enable control of the chillers is primarily supplied from the ‘heating and cooling staging strategy’.
DX chiller stages are loaded depending upon the requirement of either the space, extract or supply air
temperatures. A proportional staging strategy, driven by the output of a cooling temperature PID loop,
controls the chiller stages. A number of enable interlocks are also included. Finally a chiller rotation
sequence strategy defines which actual chillers are enabled to make up the required number of stages.
Figure 29 illustrates the logic of the DX chiller control strategy.
Delay after supply

Supply fan fan running
running
Delay after supply
Timer fan running
Enable cooler Yes
No
1 No
&
Outside
air temp Yes
Outside temperature
External signals
Outside temperature
interlock interlock
Space Space temperature
air temp
Extract Extract temperature
air temp
Supply Supply temperature
air temp
PID
Desired space
temperature
No
Desired extract Maintain enable 0
temperature DX chiller during failure 1
Yes
control method
Calculated supply Stage 1
temperature
Stage 1
& Chiller 1
Stage 2
Stage 2 Chiller 2
&
Supply temperature
interlock 0 No Chiller 3
Stage 3
1 Yes Stage 3
& Chiller 4
Sequence
Stage 4
Stage 4
&
Figure 29: DX chiller control strategy
th
16 PAGE 227 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Temperature control strategy

The control output from a cooling temperature PID loop is used by the staging strategy to enable the DX
chiller stages. This control loop is primarily enabled by the ‘enable cooler’ signal from the ‘heating and
cooling staging strategy’. There are three temperature options as to the source of control for the loop,
namely space, extract or supply. The space temperature or extract air temperatures are controlled to
individual fixed preset setpoints and supply temperature is controlled to the ‘calculated supply temperature’
which is provided by the ‘supply temperature strategy’. Three interlocks are also included:

To prevent the chillers from being enabled if the outside air temperature is too low, a time based
temperature and if it falls below a default preset value of 15°C, then the control loop is disabled.

To prevent the chillers from being enabled until the ventilation supply fan has started and established
an air flow, a start delay can be introduced. A default ‘delay after supply fan running’ period of 3
minutes will hold-off the enable of the control loop. This delay interlock, which holds-off starting the
chiller control, is useful to allow time for the supply air temperature sensor to stabilise and give a more
accurate ‘normal’ measured value to the control loops and reduce the chances of control loop ‘hunting’.
Initially, the temperature value that the supply air sensor gives can be high and unrepresentative of
normal air duct conditions if there has been no air flow for some time.
Supply temperature interlock

It would be expected that this interlock, which is set by the ‘supply temperature interlock’ option, is only
enabled if the chiller is controlled on either the space or extract air temperature. If control on space or
extract temperature were selected, it is important because the control loop may have a significant
operational lag between measurement and control of the chiller coil, the supply air temperature is
protected against being controlled to excessive low temperature.
This is achieved by each DX chiller stage having an individual time based hysteresis control. The
hysteresis control, which is more fully described in “Common functions”, monitors the supply air
temperature. As the temperature falls below preset values, chiller stages are progressively disabled.
The default settings for each stage are shown if figure 30. Individual timers can also be used to
instigate a delay before the enabling on or off of each stage. The default value of all these timers is
1 second.
Stage 4
Stages disabled
Stages enabled
Interlock off
Interlock on
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage 1
Supply temperature 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 °C
Figure 30: Default supply temperature interlock
th
16 PAGE 228 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
DX staging strategy
Each DX stage is enabled in proportion to the magnitude of the output value of the cooling temperature PID
loop. Figure 31 shows the default enable set points for each of the 4 possible DX stages.
Stage 4
Stages OFF
Stages ON
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage 1
PID loop output value 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

%
Figure 31: Default DX staging strategy
Stage 1 is enabled when the loop output reaches a value of 10%. Stage 2 is enabled when the loop output
reaches a value of 40%. The stages continue to be incrementally enabled until stage 4 is enabled when the
loop output reaches a value of 90%. As the magnitude of the loop output reduces, each stage is switched
off in reverse sequence order.
The enable set points are protected against instability which can be caused by small fluctuations in
stage. The default value of all these timers is 1 second.
An option is included to ‘maintain enable during failure’ of the chillers and allows for different types of DX
mechanical chiller components to be used. It sets the way that the DX chiller control strategy handles any
chiller stage failure as follows:
Combination chiller with one or more stages:

If a combination chiller is used and it has a common failure signal that indicates one of its stages is in a
fault condition then it would not be acceptable to remove the chiller enable because some of its other
stages could operate. In this case the ‘maintain enable during failure’ option should be set to ‘Yes’
.
Individual chiller stages:
If individual chiller stages are used and each has its own fault condition status then it is likely that the
stage would need to be disabled during a stage fault condition. In this case the ‘maintain enable during
failure’ option should be set to ‘No’
th
16 PAGE 229 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
DX chiller sequencing strategy

A DX chiller rotation or sequencing strategy is employed to equalise the operating life of the DX chiller
stages. Output from the staging strategy provides the DX chiller sequencer with a numeric value ranging
from zero to 4 to indicate the quantity of DX stages that are required to be enabled.
The sequencing strategy then rotates a lead-lag sequence after the lead stage has operated for a defined
that lead-lag rotation occurs may also be adjusted. The example shown in Figure 32 is of a four stage
chiller system which sequences every Monday at 14:00 hrs and currently chiller 4 is the lead chiller. On the
next anniversary, the sequence will rotate to be 1-3-4-0, followed afterwards by 3-4-1-0.
Next chiller number 1

Lead chiller number 4 Lag chiller number 3
Chiller 2 is unavailable
Figure 32: Chiller sequencing example
Chillers, however, may be either available, which is the normal condition, or unavailable and an example of
an unavailable chiller (chiller 2) in a system may be seen in Figure 32. A chiller may be unavailable for
If either option of rotate on running hours or rotate on period is chosen, then should a chiller become
stepped as illustrated in Figure 33.

Figure 33: Manual sequence
th
16 PAGE 230 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Humidifier control strategy

This is the control strategy for the humidifier component within the AHU. It provides the following output
signals:
Boolean on/off signal to an on/off (only) humidifier

Modulating control signal using 0-10vdc to a modulating (only) humidifier
Boolean on/off and modulating control signals to a combined on/off and modulating humidifier
Overall enable control of the humidifier is primarily supplied from the ‘supply fan strategy’. The strategy
provides both boolean on/off and modulating signals to suit a variety of humidifier products. A number of
choices are provided as to the source of control of the humidifier as well as a several enable interlocks.
Figure 34 illustrates the logic of the humidifier control strategy.
Control Humidifier
humidistat Control humidistat
off delay
Delay after supply
Supply fan fan running Control humidistat
running on delay
Delay after supply
Timer fan running
Enable Yes
No
& Timer
1 No
&
Outside &
air temp Yes
Outside
Outside temperature
interlock
temperature
interlock
Humidistat
Humidifier
interlock
on/off
Supply Yes
or Delta Moisture (DM)
External signals
RH (DM=actual-desired) control
Humidistat interlock actual desired
0 Humidistat interlock
from supply RH
No from supply RH
Supply RH
Control method
Space Space RH
RH PID
Extract Extract RH
RH
Desired RH Desired supply RH
PID
Desired space RH
PID
Desired extract RH
Desired (space/extract) RH
heat
curve
External desired
RH value
Figure 34: Humidifier control strategy
th
16 PAGE 231 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Humidifier control strategy

There are three methods of control for the humidifier and the choice will depend upon whether the
humidifier requires only a boolean on/off signal or only a modulating signal or both. The methods are:
Boolean on/off signal to an on/off (only) humidifier: The humidifier enable is simply controlled by
the status of a ‘control humidistat’ device which would typically be installed in the supplied space or in
the extract air duct. Two associated ‘delay’ timers are also available, ‘delay on’ and ‘delay off’ which
can be used to offer a hysteresis effect to the humidistat switching signal.
Modulating control signal using 0-10vdc to a modulating (only) humidifier: A control PID loop,
which is enabled by a Delta Moisture (DM) control, provides the modulating signal to the humidifier.
The method of control can be based upon the measured values of a relative humidity (RH) from a
sensor in the supply air duct, in the supplied space or in the extract air duct. The control setpoint can
also be selected as a fixed value or a compensated value from the outside air temperature, or
externally. The setpoint could also be supplied via a PID loop from sensors in the supplied space or in
the extract air duct if the measured value selected is from the sensor in the supply air duct.
Boolean on/off and modulating control signals to a combined on/off and modulating humidifier:
In this method, the humidifier is only enabled when the modulating control PID loop is enabled.
Otherwise the modulating control method is the same as that previously described.
In addition, the humidity control strategy contains these interlocks:

Humidistat interlock
Delta moisture
Both boolean and modulated control methods are enabled by an ‘enable’ signal from the ‘supply fan
strategy’ which indicates that the ventilation system has been enabled and the humidifier control strategy
can start unless it is prevented to by the condition of the following interlock options:

To prevent the humidifier from being enabled until the ventilation supply fan has started and established
an air flow, a start delay can be introduced. A default ‘delay after supply fan running’ period of 3
minutes will hold-off the enable of the humidifier. This delay interlock, which holds-off the humidifier
and disables the modulating control loop, is useful to allow time for the humidity sensors to stabilise and
give a more accurate ‘normal’ measured value to the control loops and reduce the chances of control
loop ‘hunting’. Initially, the humidity value that the sensors give can be unrepresentative of normal air
duct conditions if there has been no air flow for some time.

To prevent the humidifier from being enabled if the outside air temperature is too high, a time based
temperature and if the temperature rises above a default preset value of 15°C for more than 5 minutes,
then the humidifier is disabled.
Humidistat interlock
To add protection against the risk of condensation occurring, a high limit humidistat is usually fitted in
the supply air duct. If fitted, this ‘humidistat interlock’ device will disable the humidifier and also disable
its modulating control. As an alternative to, or in conjunction with the high limit humidistat, an RH value
from a humidity sensor in the supply air duct can also be selected with the ‘Humidistat interlock from
supply RH’ option. In this case, a time based hysteresis control, which is more fully described in
“Common functions”, converts the supply air sensor RH value into a humidistat function. If the sensor
th
16 PAGE 232 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
value rises above a default value of 85% for more than 30s then the humidistat function switches on
and the humidifier is disabled.
Delta moisture (DM)

This is not specifically an interlock option but nevertheless it provides an alternative method of creating
a ‘dead-band’ in the main control loop. Using a time based hysteresis control, which is more fully
described in “Common functions”, a ‘Delta Moisture’ (DM) calculation is made on the difference
between the actual and desired values of relative humidity used for control. The DM value of RH must
be less than a default value of -5% for at least 30s, before the DM hysteresis control will enable the
main PID control loop and enable the humidifier. If for example the desired supply air humidity is 55%
and the measured value is 48% the DM value will be -7% and consequently the control loop will be
enabled. Otherwise the PID loop will be disabled and its output will be 0%.
th
16 PAGE 233 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Heat recovery run around coil strategy

This is the control strategy for the heat recovery run around coil component within the AHU. Run around
coil heat recovery air-to-air heat exchangers typically have an effectiveness of between 45% and 60% and
are particularly suited to applications where the inlet and exhaust air streams are not adjacent with each
other or where it is important to prevent cross contamination. Both cooling and reheating energy is saved
by the run around coil and in this AHU application it is used to pre-cool or pre-heat incoming outside air with
extract air from the conditioned space.
A typical run around coil system places finned tube water coils in the inlet and exhaust air streams. The
coils are connected in a closed loop via piping through which an intermediate heat transfer fluid (typically
water or a freeze-preventive solution) is pumped. This system operates for sensible heat recovery only.
The heat recovery run around coil control strategy provides the following output signals:
Modulating valve control signal using 0-10vdc or tri-state outputs

Modulating pump speed control signal using 0-10vdc
Boolean on/off signal to the circulation pump
Overall enable control of the run around coil is supplied from the heating and cooling staging strategy.
Figure 34 illustrates the logic of the run around coil control strategy.
Run around coil control

Control of the run around coil is achieved by controlling either the valve position, or the circulation pump
speed by a 0-100% modulating signal. Figure 35 illustrates the control logic for this strategy. The
modulating control value is the maximum value from either of two PID control loops, one for heating and
one for cooling recovery. A ‘delayed start-up’ interlock overrides the control loop output under the condition
of a delayed start-up. In addition, the flow temperature (exhaust side) is monitored to protect against the
exhaust coil from freezing. Here are the control and interlock strategies:
Delayed start-up:
be selected for the modulating signal during a delayed start-up condition. This would enable any heat
which may be available in the extract air to preheat the inlet air during delayed start-up conditions. The
control logic contains protection against the effect of a sudden step change of modulating value, which
can occur when switching between delayed start-up and normal conditions, by a setpoint change delay
functions”.
Flow temperature protection (exhaust side):

There is always a risk with a run around coil heat recovery system, of icing on the exhaust coil, if the
temperature of the heat transfer fluid entering it, falls to freezing point. This would only occur when the
recovery system is in a HRU heating mode and also under conditions of low outside air temperature. A
flow temperature protection interlock is therefore provided to prevent damage to the coil occurring by
monitoring the flow temperature of the heat transfer fluid at the exhaust side and ensuring that the run
around coil control output value is decreased if such an icing condition approaches. This is illustrated
in Figure 35. A cooling PID control loop monitors the flow temperature and if it is greater than a default
fixed preset ‘minimum temperature flow temperature exhaust side’ setting of 5°C, the control output will
be 100% and have no effect on the overall modulated control signal output. When the flow
temperature drops below 5°C and the HRU heater is enabled, the control output will decrease to 0%
and thereby override the normal control modulated output value to steadily reduce the effect of heat
recovery.
th
16 PAGE 234 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Delayed start-up
Fixed percentage &
Demand & offer 1
heat 0
& No action Behaviour
during delayed
Enable HRU heater Control
start-up
valve
Heat Run around
PID coil control
Supply
air temp Run
Valve minimum
around
Calculated supply max coil
temperature Valve maximum
min
Cool Value during Circulation

External signals
delayed start-up pump

PID
control
Demand & offer
cool
& 100
100%=Valve open=Full Recovery
Enable HRU cooler No
0%=Valve closed=No Recovery
Flow temp. Yes Flow temp. protection

exhaust side (exhaust side)
PID
Minimum flow temp.
Exhaust side Circulation
pump overrun
or Timer
Circulation
Frost limit or pump
0 None
&
Pressure Pressure sensor
sensor
Pressure
Pressure Pressure interlock Pressure switch interlock
switch
Interval Duration
Pump exercise
Direct
Figure 35: Heat recovery run around coil control strategy
HRU Heat control:

The ‘Heat PID’ control loop is enabled by the ‘demand and offer heat’ and the ‘enable HRU heater’
signals from the heating and cooling staging strategy. The ‘demand and offer heat’ signal will be true if
the demand and offer strategy has determined that the HRU is ‘useful as a heater’. Providing it is
enabled, the heat PID loop will control the run around coil to satisfy the ‘calculated supply temperature’,
from the supply temperature strategy. It is important to note however that providing it is enabled, the
heat PID loop will be forced to its maximum value, regardless of measured and setpoint values, while
the heater is also enabled and its output is greater than 0%. This ensures that maximum heat gain is
obtained from heat recovery.
th
16 PAGE 235 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
HRU Cool control:

The ‘Cool PID’ control loop operates in a similar manner to the ‘Heat PID’ loop. It is enabled by the
‘demand and offer cool’ and the ‘enable HRU cooler’ signals also from the heating and cooling staging
strategy. The ‘demand and offer cool’ signal will be true if the demand and offer strategy has
determined that the HRU is ‘useful as a cooler’. Providing it is enabled, the cool PID loop will control
the run around coil to satisfy the ‘calculated supply temperature’, from the supply temperature strategy.
It is important to note however that providing it is enabled, the cool PID loop will be forced to its
maximum value, regardless of measured and setpoint values, while the cooler is also enabled and its
output is greater than 0%. This ensures that maximum cooling gain is obtained from heat recovery.

This strategy relates solely to the on/off control of the circulation pump. If the pump is modulated, then the
control strategy previously described, additionally applies. Figure 35 illustrates the pump control logic for
this strategy. The circulation pump is enabled whenever the ‘delayed start-up’ or ‘enable HRU heater’ or
‘enable HRU cooler’ conditions are active. However there are some override conditions which will also
enable or disable the pump. These are illustrated in figure 35 and are:
Pump Overrun:
A pump overrun condition starts after an operating period during which heat transfer fluid has been
distributed around the run around coil system. The purpose of pump overrun is to dissipate the heat
contained in the water of the circuit. The circulation pump has an adjustable pump overrun time setting
and its default value is 20 seconds.
Pressure interlock:
The pressure of the heat transfer fluid within the run around coil system is monitored by either a
pressure sensor or a pressure switch. Either of these will determine a low pressure interlock condition.
If the pressure sensor is used then a time based hysteresis control, which is more fully described in
“Common functions”, will monitor the system pressure and if the pressure falls below a default preset
value of 0.2Bar, then the pressure interlock is instantiated. Providing the pressure remains above the
default preset value of 0.5Bar the interlock is disabled. This effectively creates a ‘pressure switch’
function from the pressure sensor value. This interlock prevents the circulation pump from being
enabled by any of the normal pump controls or any of the other interlock signals.
First stage frost protection:

application’ is in ‘frost limit’, regardless of the state of the normal enable signals of the pump, the
circulation pump is enabled.
Pump exercise:
protect it from becoming unavailable because it has seized due to corrosion and precipitate build up
after long periods of inactivity.
th
16 PAGE 236 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Heat recovery wheel control strategy

This is the control strategy for the heat recovery wheel component within the AHU. Heat or enthalpy wheels
are rotary air-to-air heat exchangers which typically have an effectiveness of between 50% and 80%. Both
cooling and reheating energy is saved by the heat wheel and in this AHU application it is used to pre-cool or
pre-heat incoming outside air with extract air from the conditioned space.
Adjacent supply and extract air streams are arranged so that each air flow passes through half of a rotating
wheel. Sensible heat (moisture that contains latent heat) is transferred to the wheel by the extract air
stream. The heat wheel is constructed with a material (usually aluminium) that transfers sensible heat. An
enthalpy wheel transfers total heat. Control of the amount of heat recovered is achieved by modulating the
wheel’s rotation speed typically between 0.2 rpm and 20 rpm. The heat recovery wheel control strategy
provides the following output signals:
Boolean on/off signal and modulating signal to the heat wheel

Modulating signal to the heat wheel
Overall enable control of the heat recovery wheel is supplied from the ‘heating and cooling staging strategy’.
Figure 36 illustrates the logic of the heat recovery wheel control strategy.
Temperature after
heat recovery Display only
Value during
wheel exercise
Time & Yes

day Exercise
No Wheel exercise
Delayed start-up
Fixed percentage &
1
Enable HRU heater
0
& No action Behaviour
Demand & offer during delayed
heat start-up
Heat Heat
PID recovery
External signals
Supply wheel
air temp Heat recovery
wheel minimum
Calculated supply max

Heat recovery
temperature wheel maximum
Cool Value during

delayed start-up
PID
100%=Full speed=Full Recovery
Enable HRU cooler 0%=Wheel stopped=No Recovery
&
Demand & offer cool
Figure 36: Heat recovery wheel control strategy
th
16 PAGE 237 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
The modulating heat wheel control value is the maximum value from either of two PID control loops, one for
heating and one for cooling recovery. A ‘delayed start-up’ protection interlock overrides the control loop
output under the condition of a delayed start-up and a ‘wheel exercise’ control allows the wheel to be
regularly rotated. Here are the control and interlock strategies:
Delayed start-up:
be selected for the heat wheel during a delayed start-up condition. This would enable any heat which
may be available in the extract air to preheat the inlet air during delayed start-up conditions. The
control logic contains protection against the effect of a sudden step change of heat wheel modulating
value, which can occur when switching between delayed start-up and normal conditions, by a setpoint
change delay timer (default 1%/1s). Further details of the setpoint change delay timer can be found in
HRU Heat control:

enabled, the heat PID loop will control the heat wheel to satisfy the ‘calculated supply temperature’,
obtained from heat recovery.
HRU Cool control:

the heat wheel to satisfy the ‘calculated supply temperature’, from the supply temperature strategy. It is
important to note however that providing it is enabled, the cool PID loop will be forced to its maximum
value, regardless of measured and setpoint values, while the cooler is also enabled and its output is
greater than 0%. This ensures that maximum cooling gain is obtained from heat recovery.
Wheel exercise:
The mechanical construction of most heat wheels is of a circular wheel on an axle between two
bearings. If the wheel remains stationary for prolonged periods of time then the axle can become
distorted due to the weight of the wheel. A wheel exercise control is available so that if enabled it can
regularly rotate the wheel at an adjustable preset speed (default 10%) for an adjustable preset time
(default 15 minutes) and at predefined times during the week (default Monday 16:00)
th
16 PAGE 238 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Heat recovery plate heat exchanger (modulating bypass) strategy

This is the control strategy for the heat recovery fixed plate heat exchanger (modulating bypass)
component within the AHU. In the fixed plate heat exchanger the warm extract air and cool fresh air,
separated by thin plates, pass each other in cross-flow. No mixing of the two air streams take place,
therefore the transmission of dirt, odours, moisture and bacteria is impossible. Heat is transmitted from the
extract air to the fresh air purely by conduction as a result of the temperature difference between the two air
streams. The warm extract air is cooled down, the cool fresh air is heated. The control strategy for
modulating the rate of heat transfer is to control the ‘face’ and ‘bypass’ air dampers which are arranged in
the inlet air stream and these regulate the amount of fresh air passing over the fixed plates. Depending on
mechanical configuration, the ‘face and bypass’ air damper may alternatively be constructed of individual
dampers which move in opposition with each other. In this strategy the bypass damper is controlled by a
modulating signal:
Modulating signal to the bypass damper of the plate heat exchanger
Figure 37 illustrates the logic of the plate heat exchanger (modulating bypass) control strategy.
th
16 PAGE 239 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application

Fire alarm
(modulating bypass)
Bypass during
Night purge fire override
Open
100
Enable HRU heater
As
& occupancy
Demand & offer
heat
Heat
PID Timer
Supply
air temp Bypass control
Delay after
minimum
ventilation enabled
Bypass control
temperature maximum
max
100 100%=Open=Full Bypass
Cool 0%=Closed=Full Recovery
External signals
PID
Enable HRU cooler

&
Demand & offer cool
0
Condensation
alarm
Cross-flow Condensation
box temp protection
PID
Cross-flow box
minimum temperature
Extract air
temp
∆T
Exhaust air
- PID
temp
Maximum Dt
(extract-exhaust)
Differential
pressure sensor PID
Max. plate heat
exchanger differential
pressure
Figure 37: Heat recovery plate heat exchanger (modulating bypass) control strategy
th
16 PAGE 240 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Modulating bypass control

Control of the bypass damper is achieved by a modulating signal where open (100%) is equivalent to full
bypass and the venting of all the outside fresh air directly into the supply duct thereby bypassing the cross-
flow coil for no heat recovery. Figure 37 illustrates the control logic for this strategy. The modulating
control value is derived from the maximum value from either of two PID control loops, one for heating and
one for cooling recovery. A default 30 second ‘delay after ventilation enabled’ preset setting allows a short
time after the ventilation system has started, for the PID loops to settle and provide a stable working value
before they effect the position of the bypass damper. Here are the control and interlock strategies:
HRU Heat control:

enabled, the heat PID loop will control the bypass damper to satisfy the ‘calculated supply temperature’,
obtained from heat recovery. Note also that there is a signal inversion in the logic of this control signal
and it is illustrated in an example described in figure 37.
HRU Cool control:

the bypass damper to satisfy the ‘calculated supply temperature’, from the supply temperature strategy.
It is important to note however that providing it is enabled, the cool PID loop will be forced to its
maximum value, regardless of measured and setpoint values, while the cooler is also enabled and its
output is greater than 0%. This ensures that maximum cooling gain is obtained from heat recovery.
Note also that there is a signal inversion in the logic of this control signal and it is similar to the heating
example described in figure 38.
Figure 38: Control output inversion example
th
16 PAGE 241 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Night purge:
This interlock control is available so that during conditions of night purge when the cool fresh outside air
is required to purge the conditioned space, the bypass damper is opened (full bypass).
Fire:
Depending upon selection, under a fire alarm condition, the bypass damper may remain in its
occupancy position or be forced to an open condition (full bypass).
Condensation protection:
There is always a risk with a fixed plate heat exchanger heat recovery system, of the formation of
condensation with the subsequent icing and causing air blockages between the plates, if there is a
large temperature difference between the extract and exhaust sides. This could occur when the
recovery system is in a HRU heating mode and also under conditions of low outside air temperature.
When the interlock becomes active the bypass damper is opened (full bypass). An example of an
activated condensation protection interlock can be seen in figure 39. There are four control options to
determine whether condensation protection is required:
Condensation alarm:
If a ‘condensation alarm’ signal, generated by the heat exchanger, becomes active then the bypass
damper is opened (full bypass).
Temperature control:
A heating PID control loop monitors the cross-flow box temperature and as long as it is greater than a
default fixed preset ‘cross-flow box minimum temperature’ setting of 8°C, then its control output will be
0% and have no effect on the overall modulated control signal output. When the cross-flow box
temperature drops below 8°C and the HRU heater is enabled, the PID loop control output will increase
to 100% (Full bypass) and thereby override the normal control modulated output value to steadily
reduce the effect of heat recovery.
Differential temperature (extract-exhaust):

A cooling PID control loop monitors the differential temperature between the extract and exhaust
temperatures and as long as it is less than a default fixed preset ‘maximum DT (extract-exhaust)’
setting of 15°C, then its control output will be 0% and have no effect on the overall modulated control
signal output. When the differential temperature increases above 15°C and the HRU heater is enabled,
the PID loop control output will increase to 100% (Full bypass) and thereby override the normal control
modulated output value to steadily reduce the effect of heat recovery.
Differential pressure sensor:

A cooling PID control loop monitors the differential pressure of the airflow through the heat exchanger
and as long as it is less than a default fixed preset ‘Max. plate heat exchanger differential pressure’
setting of 150Pa, then its control output will be 0% and have no effect on the overall modulated control
signal output. When the differential pressure increases above 150Pa, indicating that ice has formed to
create a blockage and the HRU heater is enabled, the PID loop control output will increase to 100%
(Full bypass) and thereby override the normal control modulated output value to steadily reduce the
effect of heat recovery.
Figure 39: Condensation protection example
th
16 PAGE 242 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Heat recovery plate heat exchanger (open / close bypass) strategy

This is the control strategy for the heat recovery fixed plate heat exchanger (open / close bypass)
component within the AHU. In the fixed plate heat exchanger the warm extract air and cool fresh air,
separated by thin plates, pass each other in cross-flow. No mixing of the two air streams take place,
therefore the transmission of dirt, odours, moisture and bacteria is impossible. Heat is transmitted from the
extract air to the fresh air purely by conduction as a result of the temperature difference between the two air
streams. The warm extract air is cooled down, the cool fresh air is heated. The control strategy for
modulating the rate of heat transfer is to control the ‘face and bypass’ air damper which is arranged in the
inlet air stream and this regulates the amount of fresh air passing over the fixed plates. Depending on
mechanical configuration, the ‘face and bypass’ air damper may alternatively be constructed of individual
dampers which move in opposition with each other. In this strategy the bypass damper is controlled by a
boolean open / close signal:
Boolean on / off signal to the open / close bypass damper of the plate heat exchanger
Figure 40 illustrates the logic of the plate heat exchanger (open/close bypass) control strategy.
Outside On outside temperature Bypass air

air temp damper control
On Delta T
Enable HRU heater (open/close bypass)
& True=Open=Full Bypass
Demand & offer False=Closed=Full Recovery
External signals
heat
or or
Enable HRU cooler
As
& occupancy
Demand & offer cool
Open
1
Bypass during
Condensation fire override
alarm
Condensation No 0 &
alarm protection Yes 1
Night purge
Fire alarm
Figure 40: Heat recovery plate heat exchanger (open/close bypass) control strategy
th
16 PAGE 243 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Open / close bypass control

Control of the bypass damper is achieved by a boolean open / close signal where open (true) is equivalent
to full bypass and the venting of all the outside fresh air directly into the supply duct thereby bypassing the
cross-flow coil for no heat recovery. There are five input controls which can control the bypass damper.
The logic is arranged such that the default condition of the damper is closed (full recovery) unless it is
overridden open (full bypass) by any one or more input:
On outside air temperature:

This control is available so that when the fresh air is cool it can be preheated with heat recovered by the
plate heat exchanger. The outside air temperature is monitored and if the temperature falls below a
default preset value of 21°C then the bypass damper is closed (full recovery) using a time based
hysteresis control, which is more fully described in “Common functions”.
On Delta T:
The bypass damper can alternatively be controlled by the heating and cooling staging strategy as
described here:
HRU Heat control:

The bypass damper is switched closed (full recovery) by the ‘demand and offer heat’ and the ‘enable
HRU heater’ signals from the heating and cooling staging strategy. The ‘demand and offer heat’ signal
will be true if the demand and offer strategy has determined that the HRU is ‘useful as a heater’.
HRU Cool control:

HRU cool control operates in a similar manner to HRU heat control. The bypass damper is switched
closed (full recovery) by the ‘demand and offer cool’ and the ‘enable HRU cooler’ signals from the
heating and cooling staging strategy. The ‘demand and offer cool’ signal will be true if the demand and
offer strategy has determined that the HRU is ‘useful as a cooler’.
Condensation alarm protection:

This interlock control is available so that if a ‘condensation alarm’ signal, generated by the heat
exchanger, becomes active then the bypass damper is opened (full bypass) to prevent the heat
exchanger from being blocked due to icing.
Night purge:
Fire:
Depending upon selection, under a fire alarm condition, the bypass damper may remain in its
occupancy position or be forced to an open condition (full bypass).
th
16 PAGE 244 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Heat recovery mixing dampers strategy

This is the control strategy for the heat recovery mixing dampers component within the AHU. The mixing
damper system comprises up to three sets of air dampers, situated in the exhaust air stream, in the inlet air
stream and in the recirculation air between the exhaust and inlet air streams. A proportion of the extract air
from the occupied space is recirculated and mixed with incoming outside fresh air. The dampers work in
unison with each other so that the proportion of recirculated air and outside air may be varied while keeping
the air flows in balance. Depending on mechanical configuration, each air damper set may be controlled
separately or with combined signals. In this strategy the mixing dampers are controlled by a choice of
modulating signals:
Modulating signal to the air damper in the inlet air stream

Modulating signal to the air damper in the exhaust air stream
Modulating signal to the air damper in the recirculating air stream
Combined modulating signal to the air dampers in the inlet and recirculating air streams
Combined modulating signal to the air dampers in the inlet, exhaust and recirculating air streams
Figure 41 illustrates the control logic for this strategy. A number of alternative ‘damper IO configurations’
are possible and Figure 42 illustrates this along with their relative fire control override states. A number of
alternative ‘damper control methods’ are also possible as follows:

Control on air quality
Control on relative humidity
Control on supply temperature and air quality (The ‘maximum value’ of either is used)
Control on supply temperature and relative humidity (The ‘maximum value’ of either is used)
Control on supply temperature, air quality and relative humidity (The ‘maximum value’ of each is used)
Control of the mixing dampers is achieved by a modulating signal where open (100%) is equivalent to full
fresh air and the venting of all outside fresh air directly into the supply duct and all the extract air into the
exhaust duct. It is important to note that this applies to the inlet and exhaust air dampers only. The
recirculation air damper must operate in an opposite manner and this can be achieved by mechanical
means at the motor or damper linkage. If the dampers are controlled separately by this strategy then the
control logic will provide an inverted signal for this damper and is described in Figure 42.
A default 30 second ‘delay after supply fan start’ preset setting allows a short time after the ventilation
system has started, for the control PID loops to settle and provide a stable working value before they effect
the position of the mixing dampers.
th
16 PAGE 245 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Night purge
Enable HRU heater

&
Demand & offer
heat
Heat
PID
Supply
air temp Bypass control
minimum

Bypass control
temperature maximum
100
Cool
PID
Enable HRU cooler

&
Demand & offer cool
Damper
Delay after
control supply fan start
External signals
Space Air quality method

air quality On space air quality control
On extract air quality AQ
Extract
air quality PID
max Timer
External desired
air quality
Desired air quality
(if linked)
Enable Ventilation
Relative humidity
Space control
RH On space RH Mixing dampers
On extract RH RH
Extract
RH PID
External desired Fire

RH control
Desired RH
(if linked) IO
Fire alarm
Supply fan on
Fire override
Supply fan off

Damper IO configuration
Extract fan on
Extract fan off
Figure 41: Heat recovery mixing dampers control strategy
th
16 PAGE 246 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application

The modulating control value is derived from the maximum value from either of two PID control loops, one
for heating and one for cooling recovery. Here are the control and interlock strategies:
HRU Heat control:

enabled, the heat PID loop will control the mixing dampers to satisfy the ‘calculated supply
temperature’, from the supply temperature strategy. It is important to note however that providing it is
enabled, the heat PID loop will be forced to its maximum value, regardless of measured and setpoint
values, while the heater is also enabled and its output is greater than 0%. This ensures that maximum
heat gain is obtained from heat recovery. Note also that there is a signal inversion in the logic of this
control signal.
HRU Cool control:

the mixing dampers to satisfy the ‘calculated supply temperature’, from the supply temperature
strategy. It is important to note however that providing it is enabled, the cool PID loop will be forced to
its maximum value, regardless of measured and setpoint values, while the cooler is also enabled and
its output is greater than 0%. This ensures that maximum cooling gain is obtained from heat recovery.
Note also that there is a signal inversion in the logic of this control signal.
Night purge:
is required to purge the conditioned space, the mixing dampers are set to full fresh air.
Control on air quality

The modulating control value is derived from a PID control loop which measures air quality from either the
extract air duct or the space and thereby ensuring that should the air quality exceed a default preset value
of 900 ppm, the mixing dampers will open for fresh air. The set point of the control loop can alternatively be
provided by an externally derived signal. If the mixing dampers are used for air quality conditioning rather
than heat recovery then the ‘control on air quality’ method should be chosen without additional ‘control on
supply temperature’. In such a case the ‘demand and offer’ HRU control from the heating and cooling
staging strategy is not operative.
Control on relative humidity

The modulating control value is derived from a PID control loop which measures relative humidity from
either the extract air duct or the space and thereby ensuring that should the relative humidity exceed a
default preset value of 55%, the mixing dampers will open for fresh air. The set point of the control loop
can alternatively be provided by an externally derived signal. If the mixing dampers are used for humidity
air conditioning, such as in a swimming pool application to increase fresh air in high humidity conditions,
rather than heat recovery then the ‘control on relative humidity’ method should be chosen without additional
‘control on supply temperature’. In such a case the ‘demand and offer’ HRU control from the heating and
cooling staging strategy is not operative.
th
16 PAGE 247 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Damper IO 0%=Closed=Full recirculation

configuration 100%=Open=Full fresh air
IO
Fire condition Combined

Supply fan on 100% Recirculation damper
Supply fan off 0% position is inverted
Extract fan on 100% mechanically at the
Extract fan off 0% motor or linkage

IO
Fire condition Inlet/Recirc Exhaust

Extract fan on 100% mechanically at the
Extract fan off 0% motor or linkage

Recirculation damper position

IO is inverted within the control
strategy:
Fire condition Inlet Recirc Exhaust 0%=Closed=Full fresh air
Supply fan on 100% 0% 100%=Open=Full recirculation
Supply fan off 0% 0%
Extract fan on 0% 100%
Extract fan off 0% 0%

IO
Fire condition Inlet/Recirc

mechanically at the
motor or linkage
Figure 42: Mixing damper IO configurations
th
16 PAGE 248 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Damper operation mode

The mixing damper system may be set to either one of two operating modes, ‘economy’ or ‘comfort’. This
option only applies when a heater is configured and it applies only to the heater. The principle of operation
is that in ‘economy’ mode, the heating and cooling staging strategy will, providing that ‘demand and offer’
conditions are met, use the mixing dampers in a ‘heat recovery’ mode whereby the strategy performs in a
similar manner to other heat recovery mechanical options and control operation is as previously described.
It is illustrated in Figure 43.
If, however the damper operation is set to ‘comfort’ mode then the heater and HRU heater (mixing
dampers) priority is reversed and the heater is initiated as top priority in a heating condition. The mixing
dampers at this time are set to full fresh air (comfort). This is also illustrated in Figure 42.
100%
Control output
-3.5 -3.0 -2.5 -2.0 -1.5 -1.0 -0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
100%
Control output
-3.5 -3.0 -2.5 -2.0 -1.5 -1.0 -0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Figure 43: Damper operation modes
Fire override
The ‘fire control’ logic will override the normal control signals and ensure that the mixing dampers are
correctly positioned in the event of a fire alarm. The fire override application provides five signals which are
used by the fire control logic. The operation of these signals is described within each damper configuration
option and illustrated in Figure 42.
th
16 PAGE 249 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
th
16 PAGE 250 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
The extract fan TRIDIUM
application
The extract fan application
Overview
The extract fan application comprises an extract fan. The extract fan application is a simple way of
ventilating a space when there is no direct need for any additional heating, cooling or heat recovery.
The ventilation system in the extract fan application comprises two mechanical devices; the extract fan and
the exhaust air damper. Various control options are provided within the application to support different
types of extract fan I/O configurations.
Figure 1 shows an example of an extract fan:
Figure 1: An extract fan application
The following control strategy options are available in the extract fan application…
On / Off control
Low / High control
Exhaust air damper
On / Off control from the space temperature or outside air temperature or space relative humidity (RH)
or space air quality
Low / High control from the space temperature or outside air temperature or space relative humidity
(RH) or space air quality
Night purge
Fire control
Fan overrun
th
16 PAGE 251 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application

A number of enablers, interlocks and alarms are available in this extract fan application which are aimed at
adverse environmental and mechanical conditions. The extract fan application has a number of prioritised
states which are displayed on the graphic and are illustrated in Figure 2:
Emergency shut down This is the highest priority override
Enabled The extract fan is enabled and running normally
Off The extract fan is switched off. This is the lowest priority of override
Figure 2: Extract fan system states
Extract fan control strategy overview

The extract fan application is built from two control strategies:
Extract fan on / off control strategy: The extract fan boolean on / off control signal is provided by this
strategy. The strategy also caters for exhaust air damper, fan interlocks for fire override, fan overrun
and night purge.
Extract fan low / high speed control strategy: This strategy provides selection of the control options
for a two speed (Low / High) extract fan. The Low / High fan can either be that configured to the
dedicated 2-HILO module or that configured to separate digital output channels on other output
modules. The strategy also caters for fan interlocks for fire override and night purge.
If a low / high fan is used, then both strategies are combined otherwise only the On / Off strategy is used.
th
16 PAGE 252 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Fan On / Off control strategy

This is the strategy for the control of an On / Off extract fan as follows:
Boolean on / off enable signal to the extract fan
It includes the following mechanical options for an exhaust air damper:
None
Incorporated with fan (The extract fan is mechanically linked and interlocked externally with the
exhaust air damper. No control is provided by this strategy for the exhaust air damper although it is
The extract fan boolean on / off control signal is provided by this strategy which is illustrated in figure 3.
The strategy also caters for fan interlocks for fire override, fan overrun and night purge:
Time
schedule Enable fan
Or
Space
temperature
Outside
temperature
Space
humidity
&
Space & During

time schedule
air quality
Direct
&
External signals
Enable
External enable function
0 1
True=Fan on On / Off
False=Fan off Extract fan
No 1
Or Fire &
Night purge control
Fan overrun
Yes 1
Fire override
Fan overrun Fan On /Off

Extract fan on
Extract fan off Exhaust air damper
Emergency switch Emergency shutdown – all off
Figure 3: Fan On / Off control strategy
th
16 PAGE 253 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
There are five main sources of extract control which can be configured:
Time schedule, time extension or external value:

The enable fan signal can be supplied from an external enable source or from a linked time schedule or
boolean time extension.
On space air temperature:

The space air temperature is monitored and if the temperature falls below a default preset value of
20°C then the ‘Enable fan’ signal is set to false and the extract fan disabled using a time based

The outside air temperature is monitored and if the temperature falls below a default preset value of
20°C then the ‘Enable fan’ signal is set to false and the extract fan disabled using a time based
On space air humidity:

The space air humidity is monitored and if the humidity falls below a default preset value of 20% then
the ‘Enable fan’ signal is set to false and the extract fan disabled using a time based hysteresis control,
which is more fully described in “Common functions”.
On space air quality:

The space air quality is monitored and if the air quality falls below a default preset value of 20ppm then
the ‘Enable fan’ signal is set to false and the extract fan disabled using a time based hysteresis control,
There are five interlock options:
Enable function:
The logic of the strategy includes an ‘Enable function’ which gives a choice as to whether the fan On
/Off signal is interlocked against a time schedule so that it is only enabled when the time schedule is
on, or it is ‘Direct’ with no time override. This option is not available if the primary choice to ‘Enable fan’
is also the time schedule.
Night purge:
is required to purge the conditioned space, the extract fan is enabled to an on condition by the linked
night purge application.
Fan overrun:
A fan ‘overrun’ condition starts after an operating period during which air has been extracted from the
space. The fan overrun has an adjustable fan overrun time setting and its default value is 20 seconds.
Fire:
Action from either of the two override signals, ‘extract fan on’ or ‘extract fan off’ under fire condition or
fireman’s override, will directly command the extract fan. Both fire override signals will by-pass any
other interlock signal.
Emergency shutdown:
Action from an external ‘Emergency switch’ will shut down the Extract fan application. This is the
highest priority override.
th
16 PAGE 254 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
Fan Low / High control strategy

This is the strategy for the control of a boolean Low / High speed extract fan as follows:
Boolean Low / High signal to the extract fan using the 2-HILO module
Boolean Low / High signal to the extract fan using 2 separate I/O channels (High and Low)
This strategy provides selection of the control options for a two speed (Low / High) extract fan. The
Low / High fan can either be that configured to the dedicated 2-HILO module or that configured to separate
digital output channels on other output modules.
Low / High command

Time
schedule
Or
Space
temperature
Outside
temperature
Low / High I/O
Space
humidity
Space
External signals
air quality
Low / High
Extract
Extract fan
fan
External enable (I/O module)
High speed on
No
night purge
Night purge
Yes Or High
High speed Yes & Extract fan high
Fire override
Fire alarm on fire

No
Low / High
Extract fan
(Separate I/O)
Low
Fan On /Off
Extract fan low
Figure 4: Low / High fan control strategy
The logic of this strategy provides a number of choices as to the type and source of the ‘high speed’
command signal, for example time schedule, temperature, relative humidity and air quality, which will then
switch the fan to high speed if the input is at a certain value. The strategy also caters for high speed fan
interlocks for fire override and night purge:
Figure 4 illustrates the logic of the low / high extract fan speed control strategy: A fan On / Off signal which
is derived from the On / Off control strategy determines whether the Low / High fan is On or Off. When it is
‘on’, which enables the low condition, the strategy may switch to a high speed providing the conditions set
by the Low / High command are satisfied. There are five main sources available to determine the high
speed boolean command signal:
Time schedule, time extension or external value:

The high speed command signal can be supplied from an external enable source or from a linked time
schedule or boolean time extension.
th
16 PAGE 255 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
application
On space air temperature:

The space air temperature is monitored and if the temperature exceeds a default preset value of 23°C
then the high speed command signal and consequently the extract fan is set to high speed using a time
based hysteresis control, which is more fully described in “Common functions”.

The outside air temperature is monitored and if the temperature exceeds a default preset value of 23°C
then the high speed command signal and consequently the extract fan is set to high speed using a time
On space air humidity:

The space air humidity is monitored and if the humidity exceeds a default preset value of 23% then the
high speed command signal and consequently the extract fan is set to high speed using a time based
On space air quality:

The space air quality is monitored and if the air quality exceeds a default preset value of 23ppm then
the high speed command signal and consequently the extract fan is set to high speed using a time
There are two interlock options which can also demand a fan high speed but these are also interlocked
against the fan On / Off signal. Providing the ‘Fan On / Off’ signal is true (which can be from a night purge
signal or a fireman’s switch fire override signal) then high speed may be enabled as follows:
Night purge:
is required to purge the conditioned space, the extract fan high speed condition is enabled, depending
on a configuration option, by the linked night purge application.
Fire:
Under a fire condition, the extract fan high speed condition is enabled, depending on a configuration
option.
th
16 PAGE 256 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
The heat recovery unit TRIDIUM
(HRU) application
The heat recovery unit (HRU) application
Overview
The heat recovery unit (HRU) application comprises a supply fan and extract fan in a unit which is also
equipped with an air heat exchanger. The HRU is a simple way of ventilating a space when there is no
direct need for any additional heating or cooling.
The ventilation system in the heat recovery unit application comprises two mechanical devices, the supply
fan and extract fan. Various control options are provided within the application to support different types of
fan motor configurations including a ‘packaged’ type of HRU which requires only one control signal.
Heat recovery is a mechanical ventilation system that recovers energy from exhausted indoor air and
transfers it to incoming air using a bypass air damper.
Figure 1 shows an example of a heat recovery unit with supply, extract fans and heat recovery.
Figure 1: A heat recovery unit application
The following control strategy options are available in the HRU application:

HRU on / off or modulating control
Independent or combined supply and extract fan on / off or modulating control
Bypass open / close or modulating control
Bypass control on supply or space temperature
Fan, relative humidity, air quality and supply pressure control and monitoring
Inlet and return air filter monitoring
Demand and offer control heat recovery control
Night purge
Fire control
Heat exchanger frost protection control
th
16 PAGE 257 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application

A number of enablers, interlocks and alarms are available in this HRU application which are aimed at
adverse environmental and mechanical conditions. The HRU application has a number of prioritised states
which are displayed on the graphic and are illustrated in Figure 2:
Frost A frost condition from the exhaust temperature frost protection is active
Delayed start-up Delayed start up is in progress
Enabled The HRU is enabled and running normally
Off The HRU is switched off. This is the lowest priority of override
Figure 2: HRU system states
Control strategy overview

The HRU application is built from a number of separate control strategies:
Combined supply fan and extract fan: This strategy provides control for a HRU requiring either a
single boolean or a single modulating control signal
Separate supply fan and extract fan on / off control: This strategy provides control for a HRU
requiring two boolean controls for a supply fan and extract fan
Separate supply fan and extract fan modulating control: This strategy provides control for a HRU
requiring modulating controls for a supply fan and extract fan
Bypass air damper open /close control: This is the control strategy for the bypass air damper (open /
close bypass) heat recovery component within the HRU
Bypass air damper modulating control: This is the control strategy for the modulating bypass air
damper heat recovery component within the HRU
Construction of the full HRU application is simply made up by combining one of the fan control strategies
with, or without, one of the bypass air damper control strategies.
th
16 PAGE 258 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Combined supply fan and extract fan control strategy

This strategy provides control for a Heat Recovery Unit (HRU) requiring either a single boolean or a single
modulating control signal as follows:
Modulating control signal to the HRU using a 0-10vdc output

Boolean on/off enable signal to the HRU
This strategy also caters for HRU interlocks for fire override and night purge.
On/Off control strategy

The simplest control configuration is for an HRU using just a boolean on/off signal and this is illustrated in
figure 3. The HRU is enabled either by time schedule, timed extension or by an external boolean enable.
There are two interlock options which are:
Night purge:
is required to purge the conditioned space, the HRU is enabled to an on condition by the linked night
purge application.
Fire:
If a fire condition exists then the HRU can be overridden to either an on or off condition depending upon
configuration and the state of the linked fire alarm application.
th
16 PAGE 259 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Fire Alarm
Time Enable
schedule
Or
External enable
Night purge
0 False=HRU disable
True=HRU enable
HRU during a 1
fire condition
Off
0 100%=Control maximum
0%=Control minimum
100
On
Fan type
Night purge value
Fixed value
External signals
Action at
night purge As during
occupancy
Ventilation (min) Ventilation (max)

limit
Enable
Fixed value
Supply Desired
pressure
PID
Fan
control
Desired
Space AQ PID
Space RH Desired
PID
Outside heat
air temp curve
External
ventilation control
Supply fan
external control
Extract fan (n/a)
external control
Figure 3: Combined SF & EF control strategy
th
16 PAGE 260 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Modulating control strategy

A modulating HRU is controlled by a 0% (Off) to 100% modulating signal and this is illustrated in figure 3.
The logic of the strategy also allows for an HRU which requires both an on/off and modulating signal in
which case on/off control is as previously described. Modulating control is enabled by the same signals as
for the on/off control logic previously described. Control of the HRU can be derived from one of a number
of sources:
There are three main sources of HRU (fan) control method which can be configured:

The modulating value can simply be supplied from an external source or from a fixed preset value
(default 50%).

The modulating value can be derived from a heat-curve adjustment of the outside air temperature.

The modulating value can be provided by the output of a PID control loop. The supply pressure, space
air quality or space relative humidity value provides the measured value input of the PID loop which has
a preset control setpoint.
There are three interlock options:
Min/Max:
A minimum fixed preset (default 20%) value and maximum fixed preset (default 100%) value are
included to ensure that the modulating control signal does not exceed preset limits.
Night purge:
is required to purge the conditioned space, the HRU may be enabled, depending upon configuration to,
either a fixed preset value (default 100%) or to the same value as during normal occupancy. The
can occur when switching between normal and override conditions, by a setpoint change delay timer
(default 1%/1s). Further details of the setpoint change delay timer can be found in “Common
functions”.
Fire:
If a fire condition exists then the HRU can be overridden to either a fully on (100%) or fully off (0%)
condition depending upon configuration and the state of the linked fire alarm application.
th
16 PAGE 261 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Separate supply fan and extract fan on / off control strategy

This strategy provides control for a Heat Recovery Unit (HRU) requiring two boolean controls for a supply
fan and extract fan as follows:
Boolean on / off enable signal to the supply fan of the HRU

Boolean on / off enable signal to the extract fan of the HRU
Separate supply fan and extract fan boolean on / off control signals are provided by this strategy which is
illustrated in figure 4. The strategy is enabled either by time schedule, timed extension or by an external
boolean enable. The strategy also caters for HRU fan interlocks for fire override, delayed start-up and night
purge:
Night purge:
is required to purge the conditioned space, the HRU fans are enabled to an on condition by the linked
night purge application.
Fire:
Action from either of the two override signals, ‘supply fan on’ or ‘supply fan off’ under fire condition or
fireman’s override, will directly command the supply fan. In a similar manner, action from either of the
two override signals, ‘extract fan on’ or ‘extract fan off’ under fire condition or fireman’s override, will
directly command the extract fan. All fire override signals will by-pass any other interlock signal.
Delayed start-up:
The delayed start-up method configuration controls the start-up of the HRU fans. The two signals;
‘Enable’ and ‘Delayed start-up’, control the start-up of the supply and extract fans in order to protect the
HRU and the building fabric from the effects of the immediate introduction of low temperature outside
air into the space. If selected and when initiated, these signals will delay the starting of the supply fan
until the system has established a safe working temperature and is able then to deal with the thermal
shock caused by the introduction of low temperature outside air.
There are two methods of delayed start-up operation namely, none or on time duration and the
operation of each method is illustrated by the timing diagrams in figures 5, and 6.
th
16 PAGE 262 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Time
schedule
Or Delayed start-up method
External enable Delay if O/S
temp <
Night purge
Duration
Outside air & Enable

temperature Delay
External signals
τ Delayed
Any failure & start-up
Supply fan on
or
Supply fan
&
Supply fan off
Enable
Fire override
Delayed
start-up
or
Extract fan on False=Fan off
& Extract fan True=Fan on
Extract fan off
Figure 4: Separate SF & EF on/off control strategy
Figure 5 illustrates the operation of the delayed start up method if it is not chosen to operate by choice of
the ‘None’ selection. The Enable signal simply operates in synchronism with the overall system enable
which is derived from either, the time schedule, a time extension, an external enable signal or night purge
override. If a system failure occurs then the Enable signal returns to a ‘false’. Note that the ‘Delayed start-
up’ signal does not operate in this method. The supply and extract fans operate together from the Enable
signal.
Figure 6 illustrates the operation of the delayed start up method if the ‘On time duration’ is selected. If the
outside air temperature is above a preset value (default 5°C) (indicated 1 in the diagram) then the Enable
signal simply operates in synchronism with the overall system enable which is derived from either the time
schedule, a time extension, an external enable signal or night purge override. If a system failure occurs
then the Enable signal returns to a ‘false’. Note that the ‘Delayed start-up’ signal does not operate at this
time and the supply and extract fans operate together from the Enable signal.
th
16 PAGE 263 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
true
Enable
. false
true
Delayed start-up
. false
°C
temperature 5
true
Failure
. false
Time schedule, true

Time extension,
false
External
or Night purge
Time
.
true
Enable
. false
true
Delayed start-up
. false
Outside air °C

temperature 5

true
Failure
. false
Time schedule, true

Time extension,
false
External
or Night purge 5 mins Time
.
‘Duration of
delayed start-up’
when the overall system enable operates, then the ‘Delayed start-up’ signal goes ‘true’ which switches the
extract fan on whilst the supply fan, operating from the ‘Enable’ signal is held off. The ‘Delayed start-up’
signal will remain in this ‘true’ condition for a time set by the ‘Duration of delayed start-up’ preset (default 5
min), regardless of any subsequent change to the value of the outside air temperature. At the expiry of the
‘delayed start-up’ preset time, the ‘Delayed start-up’ signal goes ‘false’ and the ‘Enable’ signal goes ‘true’
thereby switching on the supply fan as well as maintaining the extract fan on.
th
16 PAGE 264 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Separate supply fan and extract fan modulating control strategy

This strategy provides control for a Heat Recovery Unit (HRU) requiring modulating controls for a supply fan
and extract fan as follows:
Modulating control signal to a supply fan of the HRU using a 0-10vdc output either with or without an
additional boolean on/off signal
Modulating control signal to a extract fan of the HRU using a 0-10vdc output either with or without an
additional boolean on/off signal
Separate supply fan and extract fan boolean on/off and modulating control signals are provided by this
strategy which is illustrated in figure 7. Each modulating HRU fan is controlled by a 0% (Off) to 100%
modulating signal. The strategy is enabled either by time schedule, timed extension or by an external
boolean enable. The strategy also caters for HRU fan interlocks for minimum and maximum values, night
purge, delayed start-up, frost protection and fire override. Control of the supply and extract fans can be
derived from one of a number of sources:
There are three main sources of fan control method which can be configured:

A common modulating value for both fans can simply be supplied from a fixed preset value
(default 50%). Alternatively a common external modulating value can be supplied or each fan can be
supplied with separate external values.

The common modulating value can be derived from a heat-curve adjustment of the outside air
temperature.

The common modulating value can be provided by the output of a PID control loop. The supply
pressure, space air quality or space relative humidity value provides the measured value input of the
PID loop which has a preset control setpoint.
If a common modulated method has been chosen for providing the fan control, there are three options for
‘Extract fan control’ in relation to control of the supply fan:
Extract fan follows supply fan:

The extract fan simply follows the same value as the supply fan.
Extract fan offset from supply fan:

This option allows for a fixed preset offset value (default 0%) to be added to the value of the supply fan.
Extract fan ratio from supply fan:

The extract fan can be configured to follow a ratio via a ‘heat curve’ so that its value is calculated as a
linear relationship from the supply fan. For example as the supply fan value changes between 0 and
100% the extract fan change may change between 0 and 80%. Therefore when the supply fan is at
50% the extract fan is at 40%.
th
16 PAGE 265 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Fixed value
Supply Desired
pressure
PID
Desired Fan
Space AQ PID control
External signals
Desired
S1
Space RH PID EF offset
Follow SF
Offset
Outside heat from SF
air temp curve
+ Extract fan
Ratio control
External ventilation control
heat from SF
Supply fan external control curve
E1
Extract fan external control
=
=
0
S1
_
Night purge value EN
Or S2
DS 0
Night purge
heat
curve 0
EF at delayed
start-up
Action at
night purge Fixed value
Fixed value Supply fan off
As during
As during occupancy
occupancy
E1 EF at delayed
start-up
+
Exhaust temp E2
Delay if O/S temp <
Time Delayed start-up
schedule method
Duration heat
Time extension (maintained) Or
curve Frost
protection
External enable
& EN (exhaust)
External signals
Outside air Delay

temperature
Any failure DS
&
Fire Supply fan

S2 control Limit Threshold
Fire alarm
Fire override
Supply fan on Ventilation (min) SF fan min start-

up threshold
Supply fan off
Extract fan on Ventilation (max) EF fan min start-
up threshold
Extract fan off
Extract
Fire fan
E2 control Limit Threshold
Figure 7: Separate SF & EF modulating control strategy
th
16 PAGE 266 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
There are six interlock options:
Min/Max limit:
A minimum ventilation fixed preset (default 20%) value and maximum ventilation fixed preset (default
100%) value are included to ensure that the modulating control signal does not exceed preset limits.
Startup threshold:
It is sometimes required, especially when variable speed drives (VSD) are used to modulate the fans,
that the modulated value must exceed a minimum threshold before it is applied to the drive. Two ‘fan
minimum startup threshold’ fixed preset limit values, one for the supply fan (default 20%) and one for
the extract fan (default 20%) ensure that the modulated value supplied to each will remain at 0% until
the output value exceeds the minimum threshold value.
Night purge:
is required to purge the conditioned space, the HRU may be enabled, depending upon configuration to,
either a fixed preset value (default 100%) or to the same value as during normal occupancy. The
can occur when switching between normal and override conditions, by a setpoint change delay timer
(default 1%/1s). Further details of the setpoint change delay timer can be found in “Common
functions”.
Delayed start-up:
The delayed start-up method configuration controls the start-up of the HRU fans. The two signals;
‘Enable’ and ‘Delayed start-up’, control the start-up of the supply and extract fans in order to protect the
HRU and the building fabric from the effects of the immediate introduction of low temperature outside
air into the space. If selected and when initiated, these signals will delay the starting of the supply fan
until the system has established a safe working temperature and is able then to deal with the thermal
shock caused by the introduction of low temperature outside air.
There are two methods of delayed start-up operation namely, none or on time duration and the
operation of each method is illustrated by the timing diagrams in figures 8, and 9.
true
Enable
. false
true
Delayed start-up
. false
°C
temperature 5
true
Failure
. false
Time schedule, true

Time extension,
false
External
or Night purge
Time
.
th
16 PAGE 267 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Figure 8 illustrates the operation of the delayed start up method if it is not chosen to operate by choice
of the ‘None’ selection. The Enable signal simply operates in synchronism with the overall system
enable which is derived from either, the time schedule, a time extension, an external enable signal or
night purge override. If a system failure occurs then the Enable signal returns to a ‘false’. Note that the
‘Delayed start-up’ signal does not operate in this method. The supply and extract fans operate together
from the Enable signal.
true
Enable
. false
true
Delayed start-up
. false
Outside air °C

temperature 5

true
Failure
. false
Time schedule, true

Time extension,
false
External
or Night purge 5 mins Time
.
‘Duration of
delayed start-up’
Figure 9 illustrates the operation of the delayed start up method if the ‘On time duration’ is selected. If
the outside air temperature is above a preset value (default 5°C) (indicated 1 in the diagram) then the
Enable signal simply operates in synchronism with the overall system enable which is derived from
either the time schedule, a time extension, an external enable signal or night purge override. If a
system failure occurs then the Enable signal returns to a ‘false’. Note that the ‘Delayed start-up’ signal
does not operate at this time and the supply and extract fans operate together from the Enable signal.
when the overall system enable operates, then the ‘Delayed start-up’ signal goes ‘true’ which switches
the extract fan on whilst the supply fan, operating from the ‘Enable’ signal is held off. The ‘Delayed
start-up’ signal will remain in this ‘true’ condition for a time set by the ‘Duration of delayed start-up’
preset (default 5 min), regardless of any subsequent change to the value of the outside air temperature.
At the expiry of the ‘delayed start-up’ preset time, the ‘Delayed start-up’ signal goes ‘false’ and the
‘Enable’ signal goes ‘true’ thereby switching on the supply fan as well as maintaining the extract fan on.
th
16 PAGE 268 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Frost protection:
The three frost protection options are only available if an exhaust air temperature has been linked. If
frost protection is required, there are two main choices of override control option, the third option being
a combination of these other two:
Increase extract fan & decrease supply fan:

The value of the exhaust air temperature is applied to two independent heat curves, one for each fan.
The subsequent compensated heat curve output values are used to adjust the normal modulated value
for each fan. The supply fan speed is reduced and the extract fan speed is increased thereby giving a
net increase in warm extract air through the HRU.
Supply fan off:

To prevent the supply fan from being enabled if the exhaust air temperature is too low, a time based
hysteresis control, which is more fully described in “Common functions”, will monitor the exhaust air
temperature and if the temperature falls below a default preset value of 2°C for more than 30 seconds,
then the supply fan is disabled. The value of the exhaust air temperature must then rise above a
default preset value of 4°C for more than 10 seconds before the fan is enabled. Finally a ‘supply fan
minimum off’ setting (default 15 minutes) protects the supply fan from any repetitive switching which
may occur.
Fire:
The ‘fire control’ logic will override the normal control signals and ensure that the supply and extract
fans are correctly controlled in the event of a fire alarm. The linked fire override application provides
five signals which are used by the fire control logic.
th
16 PAGE 269 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Bypass air damper open / close control strategy

This is the control strategy for the bypass air damper (open / close bypass) heat recovery component within
the HRU. In the HRU the warm extract air and cool fresh air, separated by thin plates, pass each other in
cross-flow. No mixing of the two air streams take place, therefore the transmission of dirt, odours, moisture
and bacteria is impossible. Heat is transmitted from the extract air to the fresh air purely by conduction as a
result of the temperature difference between the two air streams. The warm extract air is cooled down and
the cool fresh air is heated. The control strategy for modulating the rate of heat transfer is to control the
‘face and bypass’ air damper which is arranged in the inlet air stream and this regulates the amount of fresh
air passing over the fixed plates. Depending on mechanical configuration, the ‘face and bypass’ air damper
may alternatively be constructed of individual dampers which move in opposition with each other. In this
strategy the bypass damper is controlled by a boolean open / close signal:
Boolean on/off signal to the open / close bypass damper of the HRU
This strategy which is illustrated in figure 10 also caters for external bypass control and night purge
override.
Control of the bypass damper is achieved by a boolean open / close signal where open (true) is equivalent
to full bypass and the venting of all the outside fresh air directly into the supply duct thereby bypassing the
cross-flow coil for no heat recovery. There are three input controls which can control the bypass damper.
The logic is arranged such that the default condition of the damper is closed (full recovery) unless it is
overridden open (full bypass) by any one or more input:

This control is available so that when the fresh air is cool it can be preheated with heat recovered by the
HRU. The outside air temperature is monitored and if the temperature falls below a default preset
value of 21°C then the bypass damper is closed (full recovery) using a time based hysteresis control,
External:
An external signal can be linked to control the bypass damper.
Night purge:
Outside
air temp
External signals
On outside
Bypass
Bypass temperature
control
External bypass External Bypass air damper
control
Or
Night purge False=Bypass closed=Full recovery
True=Bypass open=Full bypass
Figure 10: HRU open/close bypass control strategy
th
16 PAGE 270 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Bypass air damper modulating control strategy

This is the control strategy for the modulating bypass air damper heat recovery component within the HRU.
In the HRU the warm extract air and cool fresh air, separated by thin plates, pass each other in cross-flow.
No mixing of the two air streams take place, therefore the transmission of dirt, odours, moisture and
bacteria is impossible. Heat is transmitted from the extract air to the fresh air purely by conduction as a
result of the temperature difference between the two air streams. The warm extract air is cooled down and
the cool fresh air is heated. The control strategy for modulating the rate of heat transfer is to control the
‘face’ and ‘bypass’ air dampers which are arranged in the inlet air stream and these regulate the amount of
fresh air passing over the fixed plates. Depending on mechanical configuration, the ‘face and bypass’ air
damper may alternatively be constructed of individual dampers which move in opposition with each other.
In this strategy the bypass damper is controlled by a modulating signal:
Modulating signal to the bypass air damper of the HRU
Figure 12 illustrates the logic of the HRU bypass air damper modulating control strategy. The strategy
includes a ‘demand and offer’ strategy which controls the use of the HRU so as to maximise its contribution
in providing energy efficient heating or cooling.
Before looking at the main control strategies however, here is a description of the demand and offer
strategy.
Demand and offer strategy

The principle of the ‘demand and offer’ strategy in this application, is to control the use of the HRU
modulating bypass air damper so as to maximise its contribution in providing energy efficient heating or
cooling. In short there is a ‘demand’ and the strategy determines whether it can ‘offer’ any useful heat from
the HRU. The basis of the strategy is therefore a calculation as to whether the HRU can ‘usefully offer’ heat
(either heating or cooling) allowing it then to control the bypass air damper.
This calculation is made by looking at the differential between two measured temperatures creating, in
D&O
effect, a Delta T (∆T ) value, and it is illustrated in Figure 11. A combination of two from the inlet, extract,
D&O
space and outside air temperatures are selected to provide the ∆T value. Figure 11 shows the default
D&O
enable set points for the ∆T value which is then used to determine the status of the HRU to be ‘useful as
a heater’, ‘useful as a cooler’ or ‘neutral’.
D&O D&O
When ∆T reaches a value of -2°C the HRU is ‘useful as a heater’ and when ∆T reaches a value of
D&O
+2°C it is ‘useful as a cooler’. If the value of ∆T is between the two preset settings then the status of the
HRU is ‘neutral’ and no heat value can be gained by its introduction.
HRU useful as a heater HRU Neutral HRU useful as a cooler
-3.5 -3.0 -2.5 -2.0 -1.5 -1.0 -0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
D&O
∆T = (for example) inlet temp. – extract temp.
Figure 11: Demand and offer status
th
16 PAGE 271 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Heat recovery function
0%=Closed=Full Recovery
Inlet 100%=Open=Full Bypass
air temp
Demand & offer heat
Extract
Heat
air temp ∆TD&O
PID
Demand
Space & offer
air temp Cool
PID max
Outside Demand & offer cool

air temp
Desired
Internal
Desired space
Desired External temperature
space temp
Space temp.
setpoint (base)
+ External
Space adjustment
External signals
Space
air temp
temperature
Min Max compensation
Yes
compensator
Desired Limit
No PID
Outside heat
air temp curve
Extract Desired
PID
air temp Supply
temperature
Desired calculation
PID
Bypass air
Desired damper
supply temp. control
Supply
air temp
heat
curve
External bypass
control
Figure 12: HRU modulating bypass control strategy
th
16 PAGE 272 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
Control of the bypass damper is achieved by a modulating signal where open (100%) is equivalent to full
bypass and the venting of all the outside fresh air directly into the supply duct thereby bypassing the cross-
flow coil for no heat recovery. The modulating control value is derived from the maximum value from either
of three PID control loops, two from the ‘demand and offer’ heat recovery strategy and one from the normal
air damper temperature control logic. In addition, the air damper may be controlled simply from the outside
air temperature via a heat curve or from an external control value. If either the outside air temperature heat
curve or external control options are selected then the demand and offer heat recovery strategy is
unavailable.
Here are the control strategies:
Heat recovery demand and offer heat control:

The ‘Heat PID’ control loop is enabled by the ‘demand and offer heat’ signal. This signal will be true if
enabled, the heat PID loop will control the bypass damper to meet to requirements of the desired and
measured temperature selected by the ‘Bypass air damper control’ configuration.
Heat recovery demand and offer cool control:

‘demand and offer cool’ signal which will be true if the demand and offer strategy has determined that
the HRU is ‘useful as a cooler’. Providing it is enabled, the cool PID loop will control the bypass
damper to meet to requirements of the desired and measured temperature selected by the ‘Bypass air
damper control’ configuration.
Air damper control on space temperature:

The desired space air temperature is based upon either a fixed internal preset value (default 18°C), an
externally supplied value or using the external supplied value to adjust a ‘space temperature setpoint
(base) fixed internal preset value (default 18°C). An example of the use of external adjustment, is
where an external adjustment value is derived from a ‘kitchen wall mounted temperature potentiometer
(±3°C)’ to adjust a fixed internal preset value of 18°C. Heat recovery demand and offer may also be
selected with this control method.
Air damper control on supply temperature:

The desired supply air temperature is based upon the selection from number of options for the ‘supply
temperature calculation’: Heat recovery demand and offer may also be selected with this control
method. There are three main types of supply temperature calculation method which can be
configured:

The supply temperature value can simply be supplied from an external source or from a fixed preset
desired temperature (default 18°C).

The supply temperature value can be derived from a heat-curve adjustment of the outside temperature.

The supply temperature value can be provided by the output of a PID control loop. The extract or
space temperature value provides the measured value input of a PID loop which has a fixed preset
control setpoint.
th
16 PAGE 273 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
The supply temperature value from the ‘supply temperature calculation’ may be further adjusted by a
‘space temperature compensation’ option:
Space temperature compensation:

If selected, compensation is based upon the ‘desired space temperature’ selection described earlier in
‘control on space temperature’.
Figures 13 and 14 illustrate the operation of the compensation logic and its settings with 4 different
cases. The configuration of each case is of a fixed internal supply temperature method (preset to
24°C) with internally supplied space temperature compensation. Note that operation of the
compensator is the same if the compensated space temperature value is an externally supplied value
or uses the external supplied value to adjust a fixed internal preset value.

Compensation limit (min)

Compensated value =
Desired supply temp

Space temp (actual)
Offset (lower)
Gain (lower)
Error x Gain
Case 1 24.0 18.0 20.0 0.5 -1.5 1.0 -1.5 -5 22.5
Case 2 24.0 17.0 20.0 0.0 -3.0 2.0 -6 -5 19.0
Figure 13: Lower compensated desired supply temperature
Imagine a case (case 2), where the desired space temperature is preset to 17°C. The actual space
temperature is high at 20°C thereby giving a -3°C error to compensate low. Two settings which
determine how much weighting or ‘gain’ to put on both a lower (-) or a raise (+) error are available and
set, in this case as 2.0 for any low error. A simple calculation (error * gain (lower)) gives a
compensation adjustment of -6°C which should be applied to the supply temperature. However two
compensation ‘limit’ settings (min/max) are designed to limit the change allowed from the compensator
and in this case the compensation limit (min) of -5°C will override to give a compensated desired supply
temperature of 19°C (24°C -5°C).
th
16 PAGE 274 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
The compensator logic also allows for a simple offset to be included in the calculation. This is
particularly useful for creating a ‘dead band’ type of function around the desired space temperature. An
offset (lower) of 0.5°C is set in case 1 which ensures that the error will accrue only when the actual
space temperature is over 18.5°C.
Cases 3 and 4 illustrate operation if the actual space temperature is lower than the desired space
temperature thereby requiring a raised supply temperature compensated value.

Compensation limit (max)

Compensated value =
Desired supply temp

Space temp (actual)
Offset (raise)
Error x Gain
Gain (raise)
Case 3 24.0 23.0 17.0 0.0 6.0 1.0 6 5 29.0
Case 4 24.0 24.0 20.0 -1.0 3.0 1.5 4.5 5 28.5
Figure 14: Raised compensated desired supply temperature
th
16 PAGE 275 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
(HRU) application
th
16 PAGE 276 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Default alarms TRIDIUM
Default alarms
Many of the HVAC object types in Vykon HVAC are prebuilt with an alarm extension which has been preset
to a default condition and they are listed in the table below.
For simplicity the table contains a short code for the alarm classes that the alarm is allocated to by default.
The codes are…
o A=Alerts
o D=DefaultAlarm
o UN=UrgentAlarmNoAck
o UA=UrgentAlarmAck
o NN=NonUrgentAlarmNoAck
o NA=NonUrgentAlarmAck
Object name Alarming
High High limit
Low Low limit
High warning
Startup delay
Low warning
Enumerated
Wire-break
Boolean
Delay
AHU chilled water circulation pump UN 5s 5m
Air recirculation damper UN 5s 5m
Alarm UN 5s 5m
Alert A
Boiler UN 5s 5m
Boiler (low/high) D 5s 5m
Boiler (proportional) NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Boiler alarm UN 5s 5m
Boiler circulation pump UN 5s 5m
Boiler common flow temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Boiler common return temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Boiler cut-off valve UN 5s 5m
Boiler feed temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Boiler flow temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Boiler low pressure sensor UN 5s 5m
Boiler low water cut-off level sensor UN 5s 5m
Boiler primary pump UN 5s 5m
Boiler shunt pump UN 5s 5m
Boiler temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
CHP circulation pump UN 5s 5m
CHP common flow temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
CHP common return temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
CHP cutoff valve UN 5s 5m
CHP secondary pump UN 5s 5m
CHP shunt pump UN 5s 5m
CHP temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Changeover circulation pump UA 5s 5m
Changeover control valve (proportional) NA UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Changeover cut-off valve UA 5s 5m
Changeover flow temperature sensor NA UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Changeover return temperature sensor NA UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Changeover valve UA 5s 5m
Charge pump UN 5s 5m
Chilled water circulation pump UN 5s 5m
Chilled water flow temperature NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Chilled water return temperature NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Chilled water return temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Chilled water storage temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Chilled water storage temperature sensor ´bottom´ NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Chilled water storage temperature sensor ´top´ NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
th
16 PAGE 277 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Chilled water supply temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m

Chiller UN 5s 5m
Chiller alarm UN 5s 5m
Chiller circulation pump UN 5s 5m
Chiller common flow temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Chiller common return temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Chiller low pressure switch UA 5s 5m
Chiller low water level protection UA 5s 5m
Chiller primary pump UN 5s 5m
Chiller return temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Chiller secondary pump UN 5s 5m
Chiller shutoff valve UN 5s 5m
Chiller supply temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Circulation pump UN 5s 5m
Cut-off valve UN 5s 5m
DHW (direct-fired) UN 5s 5m
DHW charge circuit flow temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
DHW charge pump UN 5s 5m
DHW circulation pump UN 5s 5m
DHW flow temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
DHW flow temperature sensor (central heating) NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
DHW flow temperature sensor (tap water) NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
DHW return temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
DHW return temperature sensor (boiler) NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
DHW return temperature sensor (tap water) NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
DHW tap water pump UN 5s 5m
DHW temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
DHW temperature sensor (bottom) NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
DHW temperature sensor (top) NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
DHW thermostat UA 5s 5m
DHW thermostat (control) A 5s 5m
DHW thermostat (heat exchanger) UA 5s 5m
DHW thermostat (tap water) UA 5s 5m
District heating UN 5s 5m
District heating circulation pump UN 5s 5m
District heating common flow temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
District heating common return temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
District heating low pressure sensor UA 5s 5m
District heating secondary pump UN 5s 5m
Electric boiler NN 5s 5m
Electric boiler (proportional) UN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Exhaust air damper UN 5s 5m
Exhaust air temperature NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Extract fan UN 5s 5m
Extract fan (Press. diff. switch) A
Extract fan (low/high) D 5s 5m
Extract fan alarm UN 5s 5m
FOS extract air áuto´ A
FOS extract air óff´ A
FOS extract air ón´ A
FOS supply air áuto´ A
FOS supply air óff´ A
FOS supply air ón´ A
Fire alarm contact NN 5s 5m
Floor circulation pump UN 5s 5m
Floor flow temperature sensor NA UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Floor low pressure sensor UA 5s 5m
Floor return temperature sensor NA UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Floor temperature sensor NA UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Floor thermostat UA 5s 5m
Frost thermostat UA 5s 5m
HRU UN 5s 5m
HRU alarm UN 5s 5m
Heat recovery wheel UN 5s 5m
Heat recovery wheel (proportional) UN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Heat recovery wheel alarm UN 5s 5m
Heater circulation pump UN 5s 5m
th
16 PAGE 278 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Heater flow temperature NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m

Heater return temperature NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Humidifier NN 5s 5m
Humidifier alarm NN 5s 5m
Hygrostat (alert) A
Hygrostat (control) A
Inlet air filter (Press. diff. switch) UA 5s 5m
Inlet air temperature NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Legionella alarm UN 5s 5m
Low/High controller D 5s 5m
Open/close Damper UN 5s 5m
Outside air damper UA 5s 5m
Outside air temperature after heat recovery NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Outside air temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Preheat A 5s 5m
Radiant circulation pump UN 5s 5m
Radiant control valve (proportional) NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Radiant flow temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Radiant return temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Radiator circulation pump UN 5s 5m
Radiator control valve (proportional) NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Radiator flow temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Radiator return temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Radiator thermostat UN 5s 5m
Return air filter (Press. diff. switch) UA 5s 5m
Return air temperature NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Run around coil circulation pump UN 5s 5m
Running A 5s 5m
Secondary cut-off valve UN 5s 5m
Secondary flow temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Secondary pump UN 5s 5m
Secondary pump (proportional) UN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Secondary return temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Secondary supply pump UN 5s 5m
Shunt pump UN 5s 5m
Shunt valve UN 5s 5m
Smoke detector UN 5s 5m
Space air temperature sensor NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Spray pump UN 5s 5m
Supply air fan (Press. diff. switch) A
Supply air pressure
Supply air temperature NN UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Supply fan UN 5s 5m
Supply fan (low/high) D 5s 5m
Supply fan alarm UN 5s 5m
Tap water pump UN 5s 5m
Temperature sensor NA UA UA NA NA 5s 5m
Trace heating UA 5s 5m
th
16 PAGE 279 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
th
16 PAGE 280 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Logging TRIDIUM
Logging
Overview
All the super applications of Vykon HVAC will record and store logging such that the behaviour of plant
condition or control may be historically viewed for analysis. Logging is automatically configured by default
on many major plant control or monitoring devices in the super applications. In addition Vykon HVAC
makes it easy to add logging to those devices which have not already been configured.
Logging frequency and capacity

The default logging configuration of frequency and capacity varies depending on the type of HVAC device
being logged. Generally, HVAC devices are logged periodically but the frequency of the log will vary
depending on the type of device. Either 5 minute, 10 minute or 20 minute logging periods are set up by
default but these can be easily changed if the specific application demands it.
Periodic logging will continue automatically for 5 days and at this time the oldest record is overwritten with a
new one. This is called the logging capacity and by default, 5 days of log data is stored before being
overwritten. The capacity of logging which is defined in the table below by the ‘record count’ may also be
shortened or extended easily to meet specific application requirements.
Default logging
Many of the HVAC object types in Vykon HVAC are prebuilt with a periodic logging extension which has
been preset to a default condition and they are listed in the table below.
Object name Logging

Record count
Periodic
AHU chilled water circulation pump 5m 1440

AHU chilled water control valve 10m 720
AHU chilled water control valve (tri-state) 10m 720
Air quality sensor 10m 720
Air recirculation damper 10m 720
Air recirculation damper (proportional) 10m 720
Boiler (proportional) 5m 1440
Boiler common flow temperature sensor 5m 1440
Boiler common return temperature sensor 10m 720
Boiler condensation control 20m 360
Boiler feed temperature sensor 5m 1440
Boiler flow temperature sensor 5m 1440
Boiler return temperature sensor 10m 720
Boiler shunt valve (proportional) 5m 1440
Boiler system pressure sensor 5m 1440
Boiler temperature sensor 5m 1440
CHP common flow temperature sensor 5m 1440
CHP common return temperature sensor 10m 720
CHP temperature sensor 5m 1440
Calculated setpoint 10m 720
Changeover control valve (proportional) 10m 720
Changeover control valve (tri-state) 10m 720
Changeover flow temperature sensor 10m 720
th
16 PAGE 281 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Logging TRIDIUM
Changeover return temperature sensor 10m 720

Chilled water control valve 5m 1440
Chilled water control valve (tri-state) 5m 1440
Chilled water flow temperature 10m 720
Chilled water return temperature 10m 720
Chilled water return temperature sensor 5m 1440
Chilled water storage temperature sensor 10m 720
Chilled water storage temperature sensor ´bottom´ 10m 720
Chilled water storage temperature sensor ´top´ 10m 720
Chilled water supply temperature sensor 5m 1440
Chiller common flow temperature sensor 5m 1440
Chiller common return temperature sensor 5m 1440
Chiller return temperature sensor 5m 1440
Chiller supply temperature sensor 5m 1440
Chiller system pressure sensor 10m 720
DHW charge circuit flow temperature sensor 5m 1440
DHW charge circuit temperature sensor 5m 1440
DHW cold water supply temperature sensor 20m 360
DHW control valve 5m 1440
DHW control valve (proportional) 5m 1440
DHW control valve (tri-state) 5m 1440
DHW flow temperature sensor 5m 1440
DHW flow temperature sensor (central heating) 5m 1440
DHW flow temperature sensor (tap water) 5m 1440
DHW return temperature sensor 10m 720
DHW return temperature sensor (boiler) 10m 720
DHW return temperature sensor (tap water) 5m 1440
DHW temperature sensor 10m 720
DHW temperature sensor (bottom) 10m 720
DHW temperature sensor (top) 10m 720
Damper (proportional) 10m 720
District heating (proportional) 5m 1440
District heating common flow temperature sensor 5m 1440
District heating common return temperature sensor 10m 720
District heating system pressure sensor 5m 1440
District heating temperature sensor 10m 720
Exhaust air damper (proportional) 10m 720
Exhaust air temperature 10m 720
Extract fan (Press. diff. sensor) 10m 720
Extract fan (proportional) 10m 720
Floor control valve (proportional) 10m 720
Floor control valve (tri-state) 10m 720
Floor flow temperature sensor 10m 720
Floor return temperature sensor 10m 720
Floor system pressure sensor 20m 360
Floor temperature sensor 10m 720
Froststat sensor 10m 720
HRU (proportional) 10m 720
HRU bypass damper (proportional) 10m 720
Heat recovery wheel (proportional) 10m 720
Heater control valve 5m 1440
Heater control valve (tri-state) 10m 720
Heater flow temperature 10m 720
Heater return temperature 10m 720
Humidifier (proportional) 10m 720
Inlet air filter (Press. diff. sensor) 10m 720
Inlet air relative humidity 10m 720
Inlet air temperature 10m 720
Outside air damper (proportional) 10m 720
Outside air temperature after heat recovery 10m 720
Outside air temperature sensor 20m 360
Power 20m 360
Pressure sensor 5m 1440
Radiant control valve (proportional) 5m 1440
Radiant control valve (tri-state) 5m 1440
Radiant flow temperature sensor 5m 1440
Radiant return temperature sensor 5m 1440
th
16 PAGE 282 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
Logging TRIDIUM
Radiator control valve 5m 1440

Radiator control valve (proportional) 5m 1440
Radiator control valve (tri-state) 5m 1440
Radiator flow temperature sensor 5m 1440
Radiator return temperature sensor 10m 720
Relative humidity inside 20m 360
Relative humidity outside 20m 360
Return air filter (Press. diff. sensor) 10m 720
Return air pressure 5m 1440
Return air relative humidity 10m 720
Return air temperature 10m 720
Return limit 20m 360
Run around coil control valve 5m 1440
Run around coil control valve (tri-state) 10m 720
Secondary control valve 5m 1440
Secondary control valve (tri-state) 5m 1440
Secondary flow temperature sensor 10m 720
Secondary press. diff. sensor 10m 720
Secondary pump (proportional) 5m 1440
Secondary return temperature sensor 10m 720
Space air temperature sensor 20m 360
Supply air fan (Press. diff. sensor) 10m 720
Supply air pressure 5m 1440
Supply air relative humidity 10m 720
Supply air temperature 5m 1440
Supply fan (proportional) 10m 720
Temperature sensor 5m 1440
Tri-state controller 5m 1440
th
16 PAGE 283 of 284
PARTNER INFORMATION
End TRIDIUM
Related documents
No Reference Title
Document Control
Document Date Comments

release
1 31st Oct ‘07 First issue (JB)
2 29th Jan ‘08 Applications added (JB)
3 13th Feb ‘08 Changes and adds after several renames and much research and released to CI (JB)
4 28th Apr ‘08 Updated for preliminary issue to WE (JB)
5 15th May ‘08 WIP (JB)
6 18th Jun ‘08 WIP issue (JB)
7 22nd Jul ‘08 Corrections from LK. Issue to TC for review (JB)
8 16th Sep ‘08 Issue for Engineering Training LK/AT (JB)
9 5th Nov ‘08 Text box sizes, Add Average outside air temp, Max4 Chillers, DHW (JB)
10 12th Feb ‘09 Add acknowledgement and references, Typos, added cooling delivery system and cooling delivery
pre-controlled group applications, added Max10boiler condensation CTL note, corrected heating non
controlled group typical application and strategy, DHW demand priority added, bound to release
3.2.22_HVAC.1, (JB)
11 23rd Dec ‘09 AHU application added. Changed note in header to Partner Information. Updated as
3.4.46_HVAC_2.1 (JB)
12 4th Jan ‘10 Split off to be used for 3.4.46_HVAC_2.2 (JB)
13 26th Jan ‘10 HRU application added. (JB)
14 4th Feb ‘10 Extract fan application added. (JB)
15 16th Feb ‘10 Extract fan application corrections. (JB)
16 18th Mar ‘10 Updated for 3.4.46_HVAC_2.2 Pump exercise (all pump apps). Holiday and Time schedules.
Outside and Average outside temp. Night purge. Fire override. Trace heating. Application Status.
Heat Plant; multiple boiler failure alarm. Radiator/Radiant/NonControlled; External setpoint, Night &
Frost heat curve. Radiator/Radiant/Delivery; Transport loss correction. Cooling pre-controlled;
Optimised start. AHU; App selection, Optimiser, Space temp. limit, Fan start sequence, Exhaust air
damper, Calc. heat demand options, Heat demand correction, Wheel exercise, PHE Mod &
Open/Close action on fire. Extract Fan; Emergency switch, Exhaust air damper. (JB)
Prepared by John Brown Authorised by AJ

e-mail: jbrown@tridium.com
th
16 PAGE 284 of 284

Vykon Hvac

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Vykon Hvac

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PARTNER INFORMATION

Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2

Copyright © TRIDIUM. INC.

TRIDIUM EUROPE LTD

Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2

This page intentionally left blank

Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2

Acknowledgements and references........................................................................ 7

The applications library............................................................................................ 9

Vykon HVAC applications ........................................................................... 11

Common functions ................................................................................................... 17

General functions and applications ........................................................................ 31

The pump exercise application.................................................................... 32

Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2

The night purge application ......................................................................... 57

The Max 10 boilers application ................................................................................ 67

The radiator group application ................................................................................ 81

The radiant panels application ................................................................................ 99

The heating delivery system application ................................................................ 117

Overview ..................................................................................................... 117

The heating non controlled group application....................................................... 129

Overview ..................................................................................................... 129

The domestic hot water (DHW) application............................................................ 135

Overview ..................................................................................................... 135

The Max 4 chillers application ................................................................................. 145

Overview ..................................................................................................... 145

Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2

System enablers, interlocks and alarms ..................................................... 147

Cooling delivery - The delivery system application............................................... 165

Overview ..................................................................................................... 165

Cooling delivery - The pre-controlled group application ...................................... 175

Overview ..................................................................................................... 175

The Air Handling Unit application ........................................................................... 189

Overview ..................................................................................................... 189

Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2

The extract fan application....................................................................................... 251

Overview ..................................................................................................... 251

The heat recovery unit (HRU) application............................................................... 257

Overview ..................................................................................................... 257

Default alarms............................................................................................................ 277

Logging ...................................................................................................................... 281

Overview ..................................................................................................... 281

Related documents ................................................................................................... 284

Document Control..................................................................................................... 284

Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2

Summary of the applications library

Acknowledgements and references

Title Author Organisation

Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2

This page intentionally left blank

Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2

The applications library

Heat distribution (secondary circuits)

Chilled water distribution (secondary circuits)

Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2

Air Handling Systems

Cooling coil Fire / smoke control

General control strategies

Time control Compensated control

Vykon HVAC release 3.4.46_HVAC.2.2

Vykon HVAC applications

‘Mini-applications’ and ‘standard-applications’ are the building-blocks of the ‘super-applications’ because

General applications (hvacAppsGeneral)

General station application configuration